JP2019180995A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve amusement of a game machine for executing control corresponding to a set value, and executing a state shift lottery.SOLUTION: When the last variable display executed in a high-base state is finished, based on 'existence of probability variation fall' is determined in probability variation fall determination corresponding to the 20-th time variable display executed in a high-provability high-base state, a CPU for performance control displays 6 stars corresponding to the fact that a present set value is '6', and displays an image 01TM300 of 'full moon background' showing that a reliability of the suggesting set value is high.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 14-17

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in Patent Document 1, as a pachinko machine in which a probability setting for determining a winning probability in whether or not to win a special figure is performed, a game in which a setting change effect is suggested that suggests that a probability setting change (setting change) has been made. A machine has been proposed. Further, as shown in Patent Document 2, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a falling lottery by the falling lottery means is won in a high probability state and a transition is made to a normal probability state.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2017-109081 (FIG. 12) Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2012-5614 (FIG. 52)

  As shown in Patent Document 1, as shown in Patent Document 2, to shift the gaming state to a gaming machine that executes control according to the set value among a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage as shown in Patent Document 1. When the configuration in which the state transition lottery is executed is applied, there is room for improving the interest of such a gaming machine.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is to improve the interest of a gaming machine in which control according to a set value is executed and state transition lottery is executed.

The gaming machine of means X1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing control according to a set value among a plurality of set values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages (big hit probability) for the player ( Pachinko machine 1)
Game state control means (for game control) that can be controlled to a special state (highly accurate state) that is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) where the game medium easily enters the variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) A microcomputer 100);
State transition lottery execution means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing state transition lottery (probability change fall determination) for transitioning the gaming state in the special state (high probability state)
A setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value based on the result of the state transition lottery (determined to be “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination) And a setting suggestion effect executing means (effect control CPU 120).
According to such a configuration, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the result of the state transition lottery, the control according to the set value is executed and the interest of the gaming machine in which the state transition lottery is executed is improved. be able to. In particular, even when the result of the state transition lottery is disadvantageous for the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation by executing the setting suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means X2 is
A gaming machine of means X1,
The probability of the state transition lottery (probability change fall determination) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 14-10, the common probability change fall determination table is referred regardless of the currently set value). Therefore, the probability of terminating the high-accuracy state is 1/80 regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the probability of the state transition lottery is common regardless of the set value, it is easy to be controlled continuously in the advantageous state when the advantageous value is set to a high set value. Can improve the interest of

The gaming machine of means X3 is
A gaming machine of means X1 or means X2,
The setting suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) sets a setting value suggested in the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) and a set value (currently set setting). Multiple setting suggestion effects with different ratios (value)) (first setting suggestion effect to display characters “REACH !!” or “REACH”, “full moon background”, “half moon background”, or “crescent moon background” 2nd setting suggestion effect to display "
Which of the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects depends on the timing determined to shift the gaming state in the state transition lottery (the number of fluctuation display times when it is determined that there is a “probable fall”). The ratio of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect of different types is different (in the first setting suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (A), when the number is 50 times or less, the characters “reach !!” are displayed. When the number of times is 51 or more, “REACH” is displayed, and in the second setting suggestion effect, “full moon background” is displayed when the number is 30 times or less, as shown in FIG. (If it is 31 times or more and 60 times or less, “Half moon background” is displayed. If it is 61 times or more, “Crescent moon background” is displayed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved by associating the timing determined to shift the gaming state in the state transition lottery with the type of setting suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means X4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means X1 to the means X3,
Any one of a plurality of performance modes (normal mode (low accuracy low base state), battle RUSH mode (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state), chance time (low accuracy high base state)) Production mode control means (production control CPU 120) that can be controlled to the mode,
The production mode control means (production control CPU 120) can control to a predetermined production mode based on the decision to shift the gaming state in the state transition lottery (probability change fall determination) (FIG. 14-). As shown in FIG. 23, control is performed in the battle RUSH mode (high accuracy base state) from the control to the high-accuracy base state until the 19th fluctuation display, and the “probable change” is determined by the probability change fall determination corresponding to the 20th fluctuation display. The battle RUSH mode is terminated by the 20th fluctuation display based on the determination that “falling is present”, and the 21st and subsequent (up to the 100th) fluctuation display is controlled to the chance time),
The setting suggestion effect execution means can execute the setting suggestion effect based on the decision to shift the gaming state in the state transition lottery (as shown in FIGS. 14-23, the 20th variation). The battle RUSH mode (low-accuracy base state) is terminated and the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting are displayed at the 20th fluctuation display based on the probability variation falling determination corresponding to the display, which is determined to be “probability falling”. (After the suggestion effect is executed, the fluctuation display after the 21st time (up to the 100th time) is controlled to the chance time)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when shifting the gaming state by associating the effect mode with the setting suggestion effect. In particular, even if the result of the state transition lottery is disadvantageous for the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation.

The gaming machine of means X5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means X1 to the means X4,
The game state control means (game control microcomputer 100) can be controlled to a specific state (high base state) which is a game state in which variable display is easy to be executed, and in the state transition lottery executed in the specific state It is possible to continue the specific state on the condition that it is not decided to shift the gaming state (as shown in FIG. 14-19, the 100th variation display after the control to the high-accuracy base state is performed. If it is determined that none of the probability variation falls performed in response to the previous variation display including the 100th variation display, it is determined that there is a “probable variation fall”. After the display, continue the high-accuracy base state)
A continuation suggestion effect that suggests that the specific state (high base state) will continue (as shown in FIG. 14-17 (12)) A continuation suggestion effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing (effect)
If it is decided to shift the gaming state in the state transition lottery until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) in the specific state, the predetermined number of variable displays in the specific state is executed. The specific state is continued until a predetermined number of variable displays are performed in the specific state, and the continuation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed (as shown in FIGS. 14-17). When the 100th variation display is executed after the control to the high base state, any probability variation fall determination executed in response to the variation display so far including the 100th variation display is performed. When it is determined that “there is”, the CPU 120 for effect control executes a battle effect corresponding to the 100th variation display, and the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting. Also performs and out 唆演)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that both the continuation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed when the predetermined number of times of variable display is executed, it corresponds to the predetermined number of times of variable display. It is possible to pay particular attention to the performance performed.

The gaming machine of means X6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means X1 to the means X5,
The ratio at which the specific effect is executed corresponding to the variable display executed when controlled to the advantageous state is the specific effect is executed corresponding to the variable display executed when not controlled to the advantageous state. (As shown in FIGS. 14-12 (A) and (B), when the display result is “big hit”), the battle effect is executed more than when the display result is “out of place”. Is high),
Proportion at which the specific effect is executed in response to the variable display executed when it is decided to change the gaming state in the state transfer lottery (when it is determined that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination) Is executed in response to the variable display executed when it is determined not to shift the gaming state in the state transition lottery (when it is determined that there is no “probable fall” in the probability change fall determination). (As shown in FIGS. 14-12 (A) to (D), when it is determined that there is a surely falling fall) in the probability variation falling judgment, it is determined that there is no surely falling fall in the certain variation falling judgment. The rate at which battle effects are executed is higher than when
The setting suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the setting suggestion effect during execution of variable display with the specific effect (variable display determined as “probably falling” in the probability variation fall determination). In response to the battle effect, the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the battle effect is executed in response to the 100th variation display, and the first setting suggestion effect and the second Setting suggestion production is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that the setting suggestion effect is also executed during the execution of the variable display with the specific effect, it is possible to improve the interest when the variable display with the specific effect is executed. . Further, even when the result is not controlled to the advantageous state and the result of the state transition lottery is disadvantageous for the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation by executing the setting suggestion effect.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-084863 (FIGS. 33 and 34), the hold information expands while moving toward the center of the screen, and the mode of the hold information changes from the normal mode to the special mode. A gaming machine has been proposed. In gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-084863 (FIGS. 33 and 34), there is room for improving the interest of production using correspondence display corresponding to variable display such as hold information. The invention according to the means V1 to the means V5 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of production using the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The gaming machine of means V1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display (special symbol variation display, decorative symbol variation display, small symbol variation display),
Corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying the corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display when the specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to the battle effect)) is displayed. ,
An action effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an action effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) acting on the corresponding display;
When the action effect is executed, the visibility of the specific effect display can be changed (as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), the first change suggestion effect is executed). Accordingly, a blackout effect is executed, and the movable body 01TM050 is operated while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in a visually difficult state.
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the visibility of the specific effect display is changed when the effect effect is executed, so that unexpectedness can be generated and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means V2 is
A gaming machine of means V1,
The change which changes the display mode of the corresponding display (holding display, active display) used as the object of the action effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) from the display mode before the action effect is executed. It includes a change effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing effects,
When the action effect is executed after reducing the visibility of the specific effect display (when the first change suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10) is executed), and the specific effect display. When the action effect is executed without lowering the visibility (when the second change suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (15) is executed), the rate at which the change effect is executed is Different (as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), when the first change suggesting effect is executed, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the second change suggesting effect is executed). In some cases, the display mode of the active display may not change)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player is interested in the visibility of the specific effect display when the action effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means V3 is
A gaming machine of means V1 or means V2,
The specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to the battle effect)) is a reproduction display of the effect video (FIGS. 14-4 (6) and (7) and battles shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (17)). A series of images related to the production)
The replay display period of the effect animation is common regardless of whether or not the action effect is executed (as shown in FIG. 14-3, the period from T6 to T12 during which the battle effect is executed is 1 change suggestion effect and 2nd change suggestion effect)
The action effect execution period is shorter than the effect video playback display period, and the action effect ends before the effect video playback display period ends (as shown in FIG. 14-3, The execution period of the change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is T8 to T11, which is shorter than the period of T6 to T12 in which the battle effect is executed, and before the battle effect ends, The change suggestion production ends)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to adjust the reproduction display period of the effect movie and the execution period of the effect effect, and the display control of the effect movie can be simplified.

The gaming machine of means V4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means V1 to the means V3,
It is possible to execute variable display of performance identification information (decorative design, small design) corresponding to variable display of special identification information (special design),
As the effect identification information, there is first effect identification information (decorative symbol) and second effect identification information (small symbol),
When the action effect is executed, the visibility of the identification information for the first effect is lowered while the visibility of the identification information for the first effect is lowered while the visibility of the specific effect display is lowered. (As shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), the blackout effect is executed in association with the execution of the first change suggesting effect, and the decorative design is made difficult to visually recognize, while the small design is performed. Will not reduce visibility)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to appropriately grasp that the variable display of the special identification information is continued while enhancing the effect by reducing the visibility of the specific effect display. .

The gaming machine of means V5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means V1 to the means V4,
The action effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is an operation promotion display (special mode operation promotion display 01TM031A) that prompts the player to operate at a specific timing (timing T7 after development of super reach shown in FIG. 14-3). In accordance with the player's operation, one of the types of specific effects (first change suggesting effect and second change suggesting effect) (first change suggesting effect or second change suggesting effect) Can be executed as the action effect,
The operation promotion display (normal mode operation promotion display 01TM031) is performed at a predetermined timing different from the specific timing (timing T2 immediately after the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 14-3), and a predetermined performance (in accordance with the player's operation) A predetermined effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a cut-in notice effect);
When the specific effect is executed, the ratio of the advantageous effects advantageous to the player is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed and the specific effect is not executed (first change suggesting effect). Alternatively, if any of the second change suggestion effects is executed and the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect are not executed, and the cut-in notice effect is executed. The percentage of big hits is higher than if
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the player performs an operation according to the operation promotion display, the player is interested in whether the specific effect is executed or the predetermined effect is executed, and the interest is improved. be able to.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-084863 (FIGS. 33 and 34), the hold information expands while moving toward the center of the screen, and the mode of the hold information changes from the normal mode to the special mode. A gaming machine has been proposed. In gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-084863 (FIGS. 33 and 34), there is room for improving the interest of production using correspondence display corresponding to variable display such as hold information. The invention relating to the means W1 to the means W6 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the effect using the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The gaming machine of means W1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display (special symbol variation display, decorative symbol variation display, small symbol variation display),
Corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying the corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display when the specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to the battle effect)) is displayed. ,
Change effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (effect that changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001),
When executing the change effect, the visibility of the corresponding display that is the target of the change effect can be made higher than the visibility of the specific effect display (FIGS. 14-7 (18) to (19)). As shown in the above, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is increased by displaying the active display 01TM001 at the center of the screen while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in a difficult-to-view state due to the blackout effect. (The effect of changing the display mode of the active display 01TM001 in that state is made higher than the visibility of the image related to the battle effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the corresponding display that is the target of the change effect rather than the specific effect display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the change effect.

The gaming machine of means W2 is
A gaming machine of means W1,
It is characterized by comprising action effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing action effects (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) acting on the corresponding display (hold display, active display).
According to such a configuration, the effect of the change effect can be further improved by executing the effect effect.

The gaming machine of means W3 is
A gaming machine of means W2,
In the change effect (effect that changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001), the display mode of the corresponding display (holding display, active display) that is the target of the action effect (first change suggesting effect, second change suggesting effect) Is changed from the display mode before the action effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10)), the normal mode active display 01TM001 (white round display) is changed to the red mode. Active display 01TM001 (red circle display)),
When the action effect is executed, the visibility of the specific effect display can be changed (as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), the first change suggestion effect is executed). Accordingly, a blackout effect is executed, and the movable body 01TM050 is operated while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in a visually difficult state.
When the action effect is executed after reducing the visibility of the specific effect display (when the first change suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10) is executed), and the specific effect display. When the action effect is executed without lowering the visibility (when the second change suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (15) is executed), the rate at which the change effect is executed is Different (as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), when the first change suggesting effect is executed, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the second change suggesting effect is executed). In some cases, the display mode of the active display may not change)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player is interested in the visibility of the specific effect display when the action effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means W4 is
A gaming machine of means W2 or means W3,
The specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to the battle effect)) is a reproduction display of the effect video (FIGS. 14-4 (6) and (7) and battles shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (17)). A series of images related to the production)
The replay display period of the effect animation is common regardless of whether or not the action effect is executed (as shown in FIG. 14-3, the period from T6 to T12 during which the battle effect is executed is 1 change suggestion effect and 2nd change suggestion effect)
The action effect execution period is shorter than the effect video playback display period, and the action effect ends before the effect video playback display period ends (as shown in FIG. 14-3, The execution period of the change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is T8 to T11, which is shorter than the period of T6 to T12 in which the battle effect is executed, and before the battle effect ends, The change suggestion production ends)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to adjust the reproduction display period of the effect movie and the execution period of the effect effect, and the display control of the effect movie can be simplified.

The gaming machine of means W5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means W2 to the means W4,
It is possible to execute variable display of performance identification information (decorative design, small design) corresponding to variable display of special identification information (special design),
As the effect identification information, there is first effect identification information (decorative symbol) and second effect identification information (small symbol),
When the action effect is executed, the visibility of the identification information for the first effect is lowered while the visibility of the identification information for the first effect is lowered while the visibility of the specific effect display is lowered. (As shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), the blackout effect is executed in association with the execution of the first change suggesting effect, and the decorative design is made difficult to visually recognize, while the small design is performed. Does not change the visibility of
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to appropriately grasp that the variable display of the special identification information is continued while enhancing the effect by reducing the visibility of the specific effect display. .

The gaming machine of means W6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means W2 to the means W5,
The action effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is an operation promotion display (special mode operation promotion display 01TM031A) that prompts the player to operate at a specific timing (timing T7 after development of super reach shown in FIG. 14-3). In accordance with the player's operation, one of the types of specific effects (first change suggesting effect and second change suggesting effect) (first change suggesting effect or second change suggesting effect) Can be executed as the action effect,
The operation promotion display (normal mode operation promotion display 01TM031) is performed at a predetermined timing different from the specific timing (timing T2 immediately after the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 14-3), and a predetermined performance (in accordance with the player's operation) A predetermined effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a cut-in notice effect);
When the specific effect is executed, the ratio of the advantageous effects advantageous to the player is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed and the specific effect is not executed (first change suggesting effect). Alternatively, if any of the second change suggestion effects is executed and the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect are not executed, and the cut-in notice effect is executed. The percentage of big hits is higher than if
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the player performs an operation according to the operation promotion display, the player is interested in whether the specific effect is executed or the predetermined effect is executed, and the interest is improved. be able to.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention according to the means A1 to the means A9 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to the provision of gaming media.

The gaming machine of means A1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing related to value (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings balls, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes prepaid balances, ball lending that consumes holding balls, ball lending that consumes savings, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
A granting unit (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for giving a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device;
Games for executing processing such as specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to set values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) A control microcomputer 100);
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
With
When controlled in the setting change mode, the application of game media based on signals output from the gaming device is restricted (1. the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting change mode). Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output to the payout control board 21TM037) 2. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit a connection confirmation command when controlled in the setting change mode, the payout control micro The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal 3. When the gaming machine frame opening sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No. 4. When the game is controlled in the setting change mode, Even if the blackout computer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command (the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command), even if the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is turned on, the EXS signal is output. Do not turn on.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when being controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the operation voltage is supplied to the main board 11 by operating the power switch 21TM055, the game control microcomputer 100 is in the ON state of the lock switch 21TM051. In addition, based on the fact that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the setting value is controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, since the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Don't rent a ball.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine, comprising the specific control means and the setting change mode control means;
The game control means includes setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) can give a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is inputted from the game control means,
The game control means does not output the special signal when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 for outputting a connection confirmation signal is a setting change). Executed after the end of the mode, after the end of the setting confirmation mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being given when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming apparatus, and the gaming apparatus is based on the input of the first predetermined signal. The game medium can be given based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
The first predetermined signal is not output when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (1. The PRDY signal is not turned on when the connection confirmation signal is not input). When the command is not received, the PRDY signal is not turned on)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being given when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine, comprising the specific control means and the setting change mode control means;
At least one of the game control means and the grant means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detection means for detecting an open state in which a gaming machine frame or door frame corresponding to the gaming machine is opened ( A gaming machine frame equipped with a gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is opened. Door frame opening sensor 21TM300),
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the application of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a). The PRDY signal is not turned on when is open)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, in the case where the gaming machine frame or the door frame is opened in order to control to the setting change mode, it is possible to restrict the provision of the game medium.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A4,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The granting unit outputs a grant preparation signal (turns on the EXS signal) in response to the grant request signal input from the gaming device (BRQ signal is turned on), and the grant preparation signal When a grant command signal output from the gaming device is input in response to an input (when the card unit 21TM050 that detects the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), a game medium is given,
When controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the provision preparation signal is not output even if the provision request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected to be on). do not do),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being given when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A5,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The setting change mode control means is configured so that when the setting change condition is satisfied when power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting change switch ) When 21TM052 is on), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means is configured so that when a setting confirmation condition is satisfied when power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and a clear switch (setting changeover switch ) When 21TM052 is off), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be controlled.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A6,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
Based on the end of the setting change mode control, the game state is initialized after the notification corresponding to the end of the setting change mode control is executed (after the setting value blinks on the display monitor 21TM029). (Display the letter “C” on the display monitor 21TM029)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the gaming state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A7,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine, the specific control means and the setting change mode control means;
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means further includes setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when a setting confirmation mode command is received, which displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to recognize that the game shop clerk or the like has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A8,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation for turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation for turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
As the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is entered. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear process in step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming device. The invention according to the means B1 to the means B7 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing related to value (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings balls, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes prepaid balances, ball lending that consumes holding balls, ball lending that consumes savings, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
Predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming device;
Games for executing processing such as specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to set values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1100 to step S21TM1200) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, it is possible to execute predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming device (the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal can be turned on, the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command can be transmitted, and the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command are received when the connection confirmation signal is on The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute ball rental regardless of whether or not it is a period controlled in the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid the control burden when the predetermined control is not executed when being controlled in the setting change mode. .

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
When the predetermined control is executed, the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (power interruption or the like), and then the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. After completion of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is resumed (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the ball lending when the power interruption occurs during the ball lending, and after the power supply is resumed. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball rental is resumed immediately after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished without restarting the ball rental).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, even when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the occurrence of the predetermined event, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
When the predetermined control is being executed, if the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is terminated (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is powered off during the ball rental). When it occurs, the ball rental is forcibly terminated (canceled), and the ball rental is not resumed when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. Ball rental will not resume after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends)
It is characterized by that.
This eliminates the need for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, thereby simplifying the predetermined control.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B3,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
When the setting change condition is satisfied when power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state. Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state. Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the game information is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after the change of the set value is notified (after the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the fact that the gaming state is initialized is displayed (display) Display the letter “C” on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the gaming state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B5,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine, the specific control means and the setting change mode control means;
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means further includes setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when a setting confirmation mode command is received, which displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to recognize that the game shop clerk or the like has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B6,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation for turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation for turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
As the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is entered. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear process in step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when a set value is changed, it is necessary to appropriately execute control when a game medium passes a specific area. The invention according to the means C1 to the means C6 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a game medium passes through a specific area.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed a specific area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening), specific control (special value 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) (special) Specific control means (microcomputer 100 for game control executing processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing jackpot determination processing in the symbol process),
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1100 to step S21TM1200) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting change mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Thus, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value may be changed.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
When the setting change condition is satisfied when power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state. Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state. Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed)
Based on the end of the setting change mode control, the game state is initialized after the notification corresponding to the end of the setting change mode control is executed (after the setting value blinks on the display monitor 21TM029). (Display the letter “C” on the display monitor 21TM029)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the gaming state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C3,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine, the specific control means and the setting change mode control means;
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means further includes setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when a setting confirmation mode command is received which displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to recognize that the game shop clerk or the like has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C4,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting confirmation mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Thus, during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value is confirmed.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C5,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation for turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation for turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
As the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is entered. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear process in step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute an appropriate process when power supply is stopped when a set value is changed. The invention according to the means D1 to the means D5 is made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that executes appropriate processing when power supply is stopped.

The gaming machine of means D1 is
Games for executing processing such as specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to set values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) A control microcomputer 100);
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode that informs the setting values in a confirmable manner;
Setting value storage means for storing the setting value (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting value is stored);
The setting change mode control means satisfies the first condition when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition (the clear switch ( The setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state)
The setting confirmation mode control means satisfies the first condition when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (cleared). Switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an OFF state)
The set value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state),
The setting value storage means stores a setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode when being controlled to the setting change mode (stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set values that have been set are continuously stored without changing with the transition to the setting change mode)
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power switch is generated without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter When the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is notified (control to the setting confirmation mode after power-on). In the case where the setting value is stored, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when the power supply is stopped when the store clerk or the like of the game hall is controlled to the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means D2 is
A gaming machine of means D1,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting change mode control means performs a transition operation (an operation for turning the lock switch 21TM051 on) and an initialization operation (turns the clear switch 21TM052 on). Control) when the operation is performed,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed and the initialization operation is not performed when power supply to the gaming machine is started.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control.

The gaming machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, a notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (set value is displayed blinking on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The gaming machine of means D4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine (game control micro that executes game control timer interruption processing), comprising the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means Computer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for performing production control,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means performs notification according to the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when the setting confirmation mode command is received. "Displaying setting confirmation" on the device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to recognize that the game shop clerk or the like has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means D5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D4,
Timing after power supply to the gaming machine is started (timing after the gaming control microcomputer 100 can execute gaming control timer interruption processing after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed) When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is given (the effect control CPU 120 uses a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that 21TM052 has been operated is received from the gaming control microcomputer 100, “the operation of the lock switch has been detected.”, “The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected.” Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is established at the timing after the power supply is started.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a “hit signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. For gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the status of processing related to the change of the setting value. Even if the conventional signal output technology of a gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The invention according to the means E1 to the means E8 is made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of processing related to the change of the set value on the external device side. is there.

The gaming machine of means E1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in a special symbol process) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination)
The set value can be changed (can be changed based on an operation in the setting change mode),
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from the first terminal (10th terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
A special signal (setting change correspondence signal) can be output from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to processing related to the change of the setting value (shift to setting change mode, transition to setting confirmation mode). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of the predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The gaming machine of means E2 is
A gaming machine of means E1,
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed)
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepared,
When controlled in the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are output simultaneously).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode has been controlled by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of a special signal, the setting is changed by the specific signal. It can be understood that the mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E3 is
A gaming machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on the control in the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting change change signal). The security signal will continue to be output for 30 seconds after the
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode is controlled by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of a special signal, the specific signal is set. It can be understood that there is a possibility of being controlled in the change mode.

The gaming machine of means E4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to the means E3,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The special signal can be output based on being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (a setting correspondence change signal is output during a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be notified to the outside that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means E5 is
A gaming machine of means E4,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting check mode can be controlled (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state. Is controlled to the setting check mode)
Based on being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are output simultaneously),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the specific signal, even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting confirmation is performed by the specific signal. It can be understood that the mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E6 is
A gaming machine of means E1,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepared,
Outputs the special signal when controlled in the setting change mode (outputs a setting change response signal when controlled in the setting change mode), and outputs the specific signal when the setting change mode ends. (When RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output process when controlled in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means E7 is
A gaming machine of means E1 or means E6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepared,
The special signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the setting change response signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (When a RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside while simplifying the signal output process when controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means E8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to the means E7,
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the set value can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and the lock switch 21TM051).
When the setting change operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is given (the effect control CPU 120 operates the lock switch 21TM051. When a lock switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, “the operation of the lock switch has been detected. ”,“ The operation of the setting switch has been detected. ”Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a “hit signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for an external device to grasp information related to a set value. Even if the conventional signal output technology of a gaming machine described in the publication (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp this on the external device side. The invention according to the means F1 to the means F11 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to a set value on the external device side.

The gaming machine of means F1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in a special symbol process) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination)
The set value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (can be changed based on an operation in the setting change mode),
A special signal (setting change correspondence signal) can be output in correspondence with the processing related to the change of the setting value (shift to setting change mode, transition to setting confirmation mode),
The special signal can be output in a special manner in which the set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it becomes possible to notify the set value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F2 is
A gaming machine of means F1,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed,
The special signal is output in the special mode upon completion of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode ends, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value determined is output),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal for notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from a common terminal.

The gaming machine of means F3 is
A gaming machine of means F2,
When controlled in the setting change mode, a special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is in an ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode) is output, and upon completion of the setting change mode Once the output of the special signal is stopped (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off once the setting change mode is ended), the special mode special signal (the number of pulse-like settings corresponding to the determined set value) Change response signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F3,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
A special signal in the special mode is output when the setting check mode ends (when the setting check mode ends, the number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value is output),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal for notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from a common terminal.

The gaming machine of means F5 is
A gaming machine of means F4,
When the setting check mode is controlled, a special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change response signal that is in an ON state during the period in which the setting check mode is controlled) is output, and the setting check mode ends. Once the output of the special signal is stopped (the setting change corresponding signal is once turned off at the end of the setting confirmation mode), the special mode special signal (the number of pulse-like signals corresponding to the displayed set value) Output setting change response signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by a special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F5,
In the special signal of the special mode, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses (the set value can be specified in an external device by setting the number of output of the pulse-like setting change response signal to the same number as the set value. is there),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the set value can be easily specified in the external device.

The gaming machine of means F7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F6,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F8 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from a common terminal (for example, output from the tenth terminal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside with a simple configuration.

The gaming machine of means F9 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
Outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change correspondence signal) from different terminals (for example, outputting a security signal from the tenth terminal and outputting a setting change correspondence signal from the seventh terminal);
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a manner that can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of means F10 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F9,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed,
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the set value can be changed according to an operation of a setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052),
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, a special signal of the special mode is output upon completion of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, (The number of pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as a setting change corresponding signal regardless of whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been previously operated). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output processing by executing the common signal output processing regardless of whether the setting change operation is actually performed.

The gaming machine of means F11 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F10,
A special signal in the special mode is output upon completion of the processing related to the change of the set value (the number of pulse signals corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 upon completion of the setting change mode) And a number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the end of the setting confirmation mode). After the output is completed, the special signal in the special mode is output (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) at a predetermined trigger (for example, the end of the big hit gaming state) different from the process related to the change of the set value. Output the number of pulse-like setting change response signals corresponding to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it becomes possible to notify the set value to the outside at a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to increase the opportunities for specifying the set value in the external device.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention according to the means G1 to the means G10 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to the provision of gaming media.

The gaming machine of means G1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) provided with a granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) capable of giving a game value (pachinko ball),
Games for executing processing such as specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to set values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) A control microcomputer 100);
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Open state detection capable of detecting an open state in which at least one of the gaming machine frame (the gaming machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) corresponding to the gaming machine is opened (for example, the gaming machine frame 3). Game having a means (a gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened) and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is opened. A dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 having a machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, when the open state is detected, the provision of gaming value is limited (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame When the 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 so that the game medium is not paid out in the ball lending process and the prize ball process).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when being controlled in the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game value.

The gaming machine of means G2 is
A gaming machine of means G1,
The setting change mode control means (the gaming control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) is the open state detecting means (the gaming machine capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state). The disengagement control microcomputer 21TM370 having a gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 having a frame opening sensor and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in the opened state. When (the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is opened) is detected, the setting change mode can be controlled (if YES in step S21TM3520, the processing after step S21TM3530 is executed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game machine frame or the door frame from being controlled to the setting change mode in a state where the opened state is not detected.

The gaming machine of means G3 is
A gaming machine of means G1 or means G2,
Specific information storage means (RAM 102 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) for storing specific information (setting change flag value) that can be specified to be controlled in the setting change mode;
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
The setting change mode control means can be in a game stop state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed (game). When the setting change flag is set after the power is turned on, the control microcomputer 100 has the gaming machine frame 3 open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON. If the condition for shifting to the setting change mode and shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the process does not shift to the normal game process and loops until the power is cut off)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after the power supply is resumed, the game can be stopped when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit.

The gaming machine of means G4 is
A gaming machine of means G3,
Corresponding to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (value of the setting changing flag) is deleted (YES in step S21TM3530 based on the operation to turn off the lock switch 21TM051), and the setting change mode is The setting changing flag is cleared in step S21TM3710),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game process after the setting change mode ends.

The gaming machine of means G5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to G4,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing),
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether or not to give a game value based on the detection of the open state. (When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is not paid out, When no opening of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game medium is paid out).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the granting unit that controls the granting of the game value has the open state detecting unit, it is easy to determine whether or not the granting of the game value is executed, and the processing burden can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means G6 is
A gaming machine of means G5,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289)
Based on the reception of information (payout number) relating to the provision of game value from the game control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the game control timer interrupt process), the game value is assigned.
Storage means (RAM 21 TM 302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21 TM 370) capable of storing grant information (unpaid number) relating to a game value to be given,
The storage means can store the grant information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
After the power supply to the gaming machine has been resumed, the granting unit assigns a game value according to the grant information stored in the storage unit (the power supply is cut off while the game medium is being paid out). If it occurs, stop paying out game media, resume paying out after the power is turned on, and pay out unpaid game media)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, it is possible to store the grant information related to the gaming value to be granted, and the memory is stored after the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Since it is possible to give a game value corresponding to the grant information, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player.

The gaming machine of means G7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to the means G6,
It can be connected to a gaming device (card unit 21TM050)
The granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) executes game value assignment based on signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from the gaming device,
When the open state is detected, the provision of a gaming value based on a signal output from the gaming device is restricted (the gaming machine frame included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is used for gaming machines). When the opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not transmit the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the game medium is paid out. Not)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the giving of the gaming value while opening the gaming machine frame or the door frame is limited, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems associated with the giving operation while opening the gaming machine frame or the door frame, Maintenance work or the like while opening the gaming machine frame or door frame can be smoothly advanced.

The gaming machine of means G8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to the means G7,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation for turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation for turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with being controlled in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized,
As the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, based on the fact that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state, in step S21TM3040) If YES is determined, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050, or if YES is determined in step S21TM3140, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3150. On the basis of the fact that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state, NO is determined in step S21TM3040, or the process does not proceed to step S21TM3050, or NO is determined in step S21TM3140. Do not want to migrate to step S21TM3150),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state.

The gaming machine of means G9 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
Storage means (RAM 21 TM 302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21 TM 370) capable of storing grant information (unpaid number data) relating to the game value to be given,
The given information is initialized as the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 in which the RAM 102 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is initialized is executed). Accordingly, the RAM clear of step S21TM1880 that initializes the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed. Count data is initialized),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the gaming state of the gaming machine including the information on the gaming value to be given is initialized, management at the gaming store can be facilitated.

The gaming machine of means G10 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
Storage means (RAM 21 TM 302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21 TM 370) capable of storing grant information (unpaid number data) relating to the game value to be given,
The given information is not initialized regardless of whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine has been initialized (the RAM 102 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is initialized by executing RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). In step S21TM1880, which initializes the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the RAM clear is not executed. Data will not be initialized)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized, the grant information is not initialized, and thus information regarding the game value to be given can be appropriately protected.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a “hit signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), on the external device side, the occurrence status of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of processing related to the change of the set value are determined. Although it may be necessary to distinguish and recognize, even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, both are detected on the external device side. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize. The invention relating to the means H1 to H5 has been made in view of the above-mentioned situation, and the external device side determines the occurrence status of the predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the process related to the change of the set value. Another object is to provide a gaming machine that can be recognized separately.

The gaming machine of means H1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to a setting value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
The set value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, gaming machine frame / door frame opening detection, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine, and processing related to a change in setting value (setting change) Mode) can output a specific signal
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value (the security signal is not controlled in the setting change mode by executing the RAM clear. Output for 30 seconds, and when RAM clear is executed and controlled to the setting change mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled to the setting change mode),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of the predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The gaming machine of means H2 is
A gaming machine of means H1,
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The output period of the specific signal is different between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting check mode is controlled (if the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the setting change mode is controlled. Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a structure, it can distinguish externally that it was controlled to the setting change mode and it was controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means H3 is
A gaming machine of means H1 or means H2,
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation for turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation for turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control) When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the “lock switch ”,“ The operation of the setting switch has been detected. ”Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, a game shop clerk or the like can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means H4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means H1 to the means H3,
A special signal (setting change support signal) can be output corresponding to the processing related to the change of the setting value (setting change mode, setting check mode)
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal and a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value has been executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means H5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means H1 to the means H4,
A special signal (setting change support signal) can be output corresponding to the processing related to the change of the setting value (setting change mode, setting check mode)
The special signal can be output in a special manner in which a set value can be specified (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on an external setting change operation. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a “hit signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. For gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for an external device to grasp the execution status of processing related to a set value. Even if the conventional signal output technology of a gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The invention according to the means I1 to I6 is made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping an execution state of processing related to a set value on the external device side. .

The gaming machine of means I1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to a setting value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
The set value can be changed,
In response to the start of control related to the set value (setting change mode, setting check mode), the output of a specific signal (security signal) is started,
In response to the end of the control related to the setting value (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the output of the specific signal (security signal) is stopped,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than the predetermined period (when controlled to the setting change mode, the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more and controlled to the setting confirmation mode. , The security signal output period is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified outside the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of means I2 is
A gaming machine of means I1,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, gaming machine frame / door frame opening detection, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the setting value (the security signal is executed by RAM clear) When the setting change mode is not controlled, it is output for 30 seconds. When the RAM is cleared and the setting change mode is controlled, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled by the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of the predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The gaming machine of means I3 is
A gaming machine of means I1 or means I2,
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The output period of the specific signal is different between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting check mode is controlled (if the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the setting change mode is controlled. Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means I4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I3,
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation for turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation for turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control) When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the “lock switch ”,“ The operation of the setting switch has been detected. ”Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, a game shop clerk or the like can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means I5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I4,
A special signal (setting change support signal) can be output corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the set value.
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal and a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value has been executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means I6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I5,
A special signal (setting change support signal) can be output corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the set value.
The special signal can be output in a special manner in which a set value can be specified (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  In addition, a gaming machine that displays a title for notifying the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2006-101428). In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2006-101428, it is desired to enhance the effect. The invention according to the means J1 to the means J8 has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced rendering effects.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to means J1 is:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that it is controlled to the advantageous state;
Title informing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of informing the title corresponding to the suggestion effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means J2 is the gaming machine of means J1,
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects,
In the plurality of types of suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executed in a common manner (for example, FIG. 8-2 (C)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which suggestion effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means J3 is the gaming machine of means J1 or means J2.
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

The gaming machine of means J4 is the gaming machine of any one of means J1 to means J3.
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach A or Super Reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach D or Super Reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification effect of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J5 is the gaming machine of means J4.
You may make it the ratio by which the case where the said 1st suggestion effect is performed is controlled to the said advantageous state is higher than the case where the said 2nd suggestion effect is performed.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J6 is the gaming machine of any one of means J1 to means J5.
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J7 is the gaming machine of any one of means J1 to means J6.
A detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's action;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that performs specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display executing means includes
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10 (E), FIG. 8-11 (I )),
In the effective period of detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J8 is the gaming machine of any one of means J1 to means J7.
As a suggestion display that suggests the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed during the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (a)). Display and the second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (reach title image 31AK062 of the second size displayed during the reach title production shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), etc.) Means (for example, the image display device 5 and the CPU 120 for effect control),
The display means includes
Plural kinds of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) Etc.) can be displayed, and a specific image (such as a fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) can be displayed.
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (The shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d) may be displayed so as to include the elements E1 to E5).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that the specific image is displayed.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest related to information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means K1 to the means K7 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest related to information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means K1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, decorative display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (production control CPU 120) for performing display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005). ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. Display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
The rate at which the first information mode changes is different from the rate at which the second information mode changes (as shown in FIG. 11C, the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually the final display mode rather than the active display 30TM003. (The mode in which the mode different from the mode is selected is low, and the display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 is less likely to change than the first hold display 30TM001)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information such as the first information and the second information as information corresponding to the common variable display, thereby improving the interest regarding the information corresponding to the variable display. In addition, the aspect of the first information and the second information can be interested.

The gaming machine of means K2 is
A gaming machine of means K1,
The mode of the first information after the change is different from the mode of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display. The secondary hold display 30TM004b in blue mode is a blue star display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the changed information is different between the first information and the second information, so that each information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means K3 is
A gaming machine of means K1 or means K2,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and second information (sub hold display 30TM004, sub active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 can be displayed simultaneously),
Depending on the aspect of the first information after the change and the aspect of the second information after the change, the proportion controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, compared to the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. (If you are in a red mode, the big hit expectation is higher)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means K4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
A first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and a first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103),
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a manner common to the first hold display (FIGS. 11-9 ( 9) As shown in (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in red mode is shifted to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle in red mode) which is the same display color. Display)),
The second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, subactive display area 30TM105) and the second display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary holding display area 30TM104, second active display area 30TM105),
When the variable display corresponding to the second hold display is started, the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a manner common to the second hold display (FIGS. 11-9 ( 9) As shown in (10), when the secondary display 30TM004c (red star display) in the red mode is shifted to the secondary active display region 30TM105, the secondary active display 30TM005c (the red display in the same display color) is displayed. Star display) is displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information such as the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed. While being able to improve, it can be made interested in the aspect of the 1st correspondence information and the 2nd correspondence information.

The gaming machine of means K5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K4,
It is provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can hide the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second information is also displayed when the notification effect is being executed. The information can be visually recognized (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the letters “Leach!”) Are displayed at the bottom of the screen. (While the display 30TM003 is not displayed, the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first information is not displayed to increase the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed, so that the information about the variable display can be confirmed even during the notification effect. Can be possible.

The gaming machine of means K6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K5,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) changes the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). Display a second corresponding display (sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
The mode of effect differs between the first effect produced when the mode of the first corresponding display changes and the second effect produced when the mode of the second corresponding display changes (for example, active The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the action that the character A appears and throws the ball is executed. The sub active action effect that changes the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 is the character that appears. (This is the mode of executing the action of flying balloons)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a structure, an interest can be improved by the aspect of a 1st effect production differing from a 2nd effect production.

The gaming machine of means K7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K6,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and second information. As a second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104),
The rate at which the advantageous state advantageous to the player is controlled differs between when the first hold display mode is changed and when the second hold display mode is changed (as shown in FIG. 11-3). The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed (If the display mode changes, the big hit expectation is higher)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it can be noted which aspect of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest related to information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means L1 to the means L7 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest related to information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means L1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, decorative display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (production control CPU 120) for performing display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005). ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. Display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
When the aspect of the first information changes, at least a part of the notice effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-11, the aspect of the first hold display 30TM001 is (When changed, the secondary hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the secondary hold display area 30TM104 and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information such as the first information and the second information as information corresponding to the common variable display, the complication of the production is suppressed and the interest is improved. be able to.

The gaming machine of means L2 is
A gaming machine of means L1,
The mode of the first information after the change is different from the mode of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display. The secondary hold display 30TM004b in blue mode is a blue star display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the changed information is different between the first information and the second information, so that each information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means L3 is
A gaming machine of means L1 or means L2,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and second information (sub hold display 30TM004, sub active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 can be displayed simultaneously),
Depending on the aspect of the first information after the change and the aspect of the second information after the change, the proportion controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, compared to the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. (If you are in a red mode, the big hit expectation is higher)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means L4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
A first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and a first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103),
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a manner common to the first hold display (FIGS. 11-9 ( 9) As shown in (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in red mode is shifted to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle in red mode) which is the same display color. Display)),
The second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, subactive display area 30TM105) and the second display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary holding display area 30TM104, second active display area 30TM105),
When the variable display corresponding to the second hold display is started, the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a manner common to the second hold display (FIGS. 11-9 ( 9) As shown in (10), when the secondary display 30TM004c (red star display) in the red mode is shifted to the secondary active display region 30TM105, the secondary active display 30TM005c (the red display in the same display color) is displayed. Star display) is displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information such as the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed. While being able to improve, it can be made interested in the aspect of the 1st correspondence information and the 2nd correspondence information.

The gaming machine of means L5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L4,
It is provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can hide the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second information is also displayed when the notification effect is being executed. The information can be visually recognized (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the letters “Leach!”) Are displayed at the bottom of the screen. (While the display 30TM003 is not displayed, the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first information is not displayed to increase the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed, so that the information about the variable display can be confirmed even during the notification effect. Can be possible.

The gaming machine of means L6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L5,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) changes the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). Display a second corresponding display (sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
The mode of effect differs between the first effect produced when the mode of the first corresponding display changes and the second effect produced when the mode of the second corresponding display changes (for example, active The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the action that the character A appears and throws the ball is executed. The sub active action effect that changes the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 is the character that appears. (This is the mode of executing the action of flying balloons)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a structure, an interest can be improved by the aspect of a 1st effect production differing from a 2nd effect production.

The gaming machine of means L7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L6,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and second information. As a second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104),
The rate at which the advantageous state advantageous to the player is controlled differs between when the first hold display mode is changed and when the second hold display mode is changed (as shown in FIG. 11-3). The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed (If the display mode changes, the big hit expectation is higher)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it can be noted which aspect of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As shown in JP-A-2006-144583 (FIG. 36), a game machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed each time a pseudo continuous change is executed. Has been. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving the interest related to information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means M1 to M6 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest related to information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means M1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, decorative display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
A change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes,
The change suggestion effect executing means displays a change suggestion effect as a change suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 11-18 (1) and (2)), and the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 30TM003. The effect that changes the mode) and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (10) and (20)), the ball thrown by the character is played by the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is not changed. )
In accordance with the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the successful mode, within the predetermined period (for example, the period from the start of the change until the reach state is established, the decorative pattern (revariation (pseudo-continuous) is performed after the temporary stop). The next change suggestion effect is within the period until the temporary stop of the decorative pattern combination or pseudo-continuous pattern), within the period from the start of change until the first stop of the left, middle, or right decorative pattern). The percentage of execution is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-16, in the stage where the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful, the third change at a ratio of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and once is a success mode and once is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by increasing the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means M2 is
A gaming machine of means M1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the proportion controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player varies (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the final display of the active display) Expectation of jackpot depends on the mode)
Depending on the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continued, the ratio of which mode the correspondence display becomes is different (as shown in FIG. The greater the number of, the higher the expectation level for jackpots, and the higher the number of consecutive success mode suggestion effects, the higher the expectation level for jackpots)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continued, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means M3 is
A gaming machine of means M1 or means M2,
Variable display of decorative designs can be performed,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIG. 11-18, when the change suggestion effect is being executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative symbol. The direction of change does not change)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the change suggestive effect more noticeable because the decorative display variable display mode does not change.

The gaming machine of means M4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which character B appears),
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, different types of change suggestion effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1), after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears). As shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), a change suggestion effect in which character B appears is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify change suggestion effects.

The gaming machine of means M5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M4,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the display corresponding to the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIG. (Character D has a higher rate of execution of the change mode suggestion effect of the success mode and a higher rate of change of the display mode of active display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give interest to which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means M6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and character D. Change suggestion production) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is different (as shown in FIG. 11-17, the character A performs the next change suggestion effect more than the character D. The ratio is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give interest to which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  As shown in JP-A-2006-144583 (FIG. 36), a game machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed each time a pseudo continuous change is executed. Has been. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving the interest related to information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means N1 to N6 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest related to information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means N1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, decorative display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
A change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes,
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means hits the active display 30TM003 when the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1) and (2). The effect of changing the display mode) and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (10) and (20)), the ball thrown by the character D is played on the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is changed. Can be performed)
For a predetermined period (for example, during the period from the start of change until the reach state is established, a decorative symbol (a combination of decorative symbols or a pseudo continuous symbol that will undergo re-variation (pseudo-continuous) after temporary stop) is temporarily In the period until the stop, the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode relative to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the period from the start of the change to the first stop of any decorative symbol of the left middle right Accordingly, the proportion controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode] with respect to [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect]). The higher the ratio, the easier it is to have a display mode with a high degree of expectation of jackpots. For example, the display mode when [the number of executions of the success suggestion effect / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect] is 2/3 is the blue mode Next Display mode when it is 4/5 is more jackpot expected high degree of red aspect.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by increasing the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means N2 is
A gaming machine of means N1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the proportion controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) varies (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the big hit expectation degree depends on the final display mode of the active display. Different),
Depending on the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continued, the ratio of which mode the correspondence display becomes is different (as shown in FIG. The greater the number of, the higher the expectation level for jackpots, and the higher the number of consecutive success mode suggestion effects, the higher the expectation level for jackpots)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continued, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N3 is
A gaming machine of means N1 or means N2,
Variable display of decorative designs can be performed,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIG. 11-18, when the change suggestion effect is being executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative symbol. The direction of change does not change)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the change suggestive effect more noticeable because the decorative display variable display mode does not change.

The gaming machine of means N4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which character B appears),
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, different types of change suggestion effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1), after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears). As shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), a change suggestion effect in which character B appears is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify change suggestion effects.

The gaming machine of means N5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N4,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the display corresponding to the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIG. (Character D has a higher rate of execution of the change mode suggestion effect of the success mode and a higher rate of change of the display mode of active display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give interest to which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means N6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and character D. Change suggestion production) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is different (as shown in FIG. 11-17, the character A performs the next change suggestion effect more than the character D. The ratio is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give interest to which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a “hit signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. For gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when the setting value is changed, it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side However, even if the conventional signal output technology of a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult to grasp this on the external device side. is there. The invention relating to the means O1 to the means O4 is made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the gaming machine of the control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
Specific signal output means for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560); ,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (a value of the security signal timer) relating to a period during which the specific signal is output;
The setting means can set a predetermined value common to the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting check mode is controlled (in step S21TM4710, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in the setting confirmation mode). The security signal is continuously output until 1 second has elapsed from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode. To do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the external device of the state of the gaming machine related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Initializing means for initializing the gaming state (game controlling microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050, step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the gaming state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled to the setting change mode),
The setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value after setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465)
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode) The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value when the setting change mode control is finished and when the setting confirmation mode control is finished. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so that the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are different outputs while sharing the setting process by the setting means. A period can be set.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing the specific information (setting change flag) in the step S21TM4580, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the fact that the setting change mode has been entered in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the absence of the condition for shifting to the setting change mode). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is resumed.

The gaming machine of means O4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means O1 to the means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means includes
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
In the setting change mode, power supply to the gaming machine is not performed without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, an error notification can be executed in the display means and an error command can be sent to the effect control means (set value error error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and the display monitor is displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210 21TM029 can display the letter “E”)
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of an operation for changing the set value (“turns on the power after the power is turned off and enters the setting change mode”). Message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the store clerk of the game hall of the state of the gaming machine and to prompt an operation for changing the set value.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The invention relating to the means P1 to the means P4 is made in view of the above situation, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. It is to provide.

The gaming machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. And a game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) And an error notification means capable of performing error notification (the game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not established). .
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means determines that a setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state, and a clear switch (setting The changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state), and can be controlled to the setting change mode,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) If the setting change condition is satisfied, the setting change mode can be controlled without executing the error notification (when the power is turned on, all of the steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are performed). Based on the determination of YES, the process proceeds to the setting change mode without proceeding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the control is performed in the setting change mode without executing the error notification, and it is possible to appropriately set the setting value by avoiding unnecessary error notification. Can prompt change.

The gaming machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, the error notification can be executed and the game can be stopped (if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not established when the power is turned on (any of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). (If NO is determined in step S2), the process proceeds to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable can be limited, and appropriate game control can be realized.

The gaming machine of means P4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to the means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means includes
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
The specific information storage means,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is transmitted in step S21TM4190 and displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter “E” on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of an operation for changing the set value (“turns on the power after the power is turned off and enters the setting change mode”). Message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the store clerk of the game hall of the state of the gaming machine and to prompt an operation for changing the set value.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed, it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine. The invention according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 is made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed There is to do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. And a game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). When it is determined that it is set, control is made to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (Setting change-over switch) Regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is in the ON state is established, the setting change mode is automatically controlled to the setting change mode.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode that involves initialization of the gaming state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
Note that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, the RAM based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in the steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150). You may further provide the game control microcomputer 100 which performs clear (step S21TM1410).

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means, based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Control is made to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Yes, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON). Based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, the mode changes to the setting change mode), and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. If it is remembered, control is made to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied (if the setting changing flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030) ), Regardless of whether the conditions for entering the setting change mode are met or not, the setting change mode is automatically controlled)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power interruption occurs during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is entered even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it will be controlled, workability | operativity can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the setting changing flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030)) Is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state) Is set to the setting change mode), and the setting change mode can be controlled based on the fact that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied. Specific operation (in step S21TM4680, it was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on the)
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when controlled in the setting change mode (sets a setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. The setting information is deleted when the setting change mode ends based on (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends)
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether the transition operation is performed or not. Control is performed in the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030)), regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting changing mode is satisfied. The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is ended based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Let me)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine a condition for ending the control of the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which setting values are stored) for storing setting values (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (such as a big hit determination process in the special symbol process) can be executed,
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means ends the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (in step S21TM4680, it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off). To exit the setting change mode based on
The setting value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed when the setting change mode is controlled. (The set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the set value storage area is stored in the RAM 102). The setting value stored in is changed, so even if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting value after the change operation is retained.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is resumed, the setting value after being changed by the changing operation in the setting changing mode before the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the setting value storage means, and the setting value is changed according to the setting value. Since control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which setting values are stored) for storing setting values (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (such as a big hit determination process in the special symbol process) can be executed,
The setting change mode control means is stored in the setting value storage area when the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode). Only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the specific operation after the changing operation. The setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored at that time in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area. To confirm the effective setting value and exit the setting change mode)
The setting value storage means performs the change operation in the setting change mode when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area is stored unless the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off even when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode. (If the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled in the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2006-10508 (FIG. 38), a gaming machine that executes an effect of counting down the remaining time until a reach effect is started is disclosed. In a gaming machine that performs a predetermined operation such as a countdown described in JP-A-2006-10508 (FIG. 38), there is room for enhancing the effect. The invention according to the means R1 to the means R7 has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of performing a predetermined operation.

The gaming machine of means R1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an suggestion effect (pseudo-continuous effect, anticipation notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
Predetermined effects (countdown effects, count-up effects) that change the display mode of the effect display by performing predetermined actions (countdown operation for subtracting numerical values, count-up operation for adding numerical values) in response to execution of the suggestive effects Predetermined execution execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can be executed,
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
In the first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) that performs a predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) after displaying the effect display ("3" defined as an initial value) according to the first special mode. As shown, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays “3” as an initial value, and then performs a countdown operation, thereby performing a countdown effect in which a numerical value is subtracted),
A second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17)) in which a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) is performed after displaying the effect display in the second special mode (“70” defined as an initial value). As shown in FIG. 5, after displaying “70” as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a count-up operation is performed, and a count-up effect for adding numerical values) can be executed.
A predetermined operation can be executed in a predetermined display area common to the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5) and FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (As shown in (17), subtraction or addition of numerical values can be executed in the common sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 for the countdown effect and the countup effect.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effects executed in the predetermined display area and improve the interest of the effects executed in the predetermined display area.

The gaming machine of means R2 is
A gaming machine of means R1,
As the suggestion effect, there are a first suggestion effect (pseudo-continuous effect) and a second suggestion effect (expectation notice effect),
The predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120)
The first predetermined effect is executed corresponding to the execution of the first suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5), the countdown effect is executed corresponding to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect). ),
The second predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the second suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17)) Execute)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect correspond to different types of suggestion effects, the correspondence between the predetermined effect and the suggestion effects can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means R3 is
A gaming machine of means R1 or means R2,
As the predetermined operation, there are a first predetermined operation (countdown operation for performing subtraction) and a second predetermined operation (countup operation for performing addition) having different operation modes,
When the first predetermined effect is executed, the first predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the countdown effect is executed, numerical subtraction is performed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300), and the second predetermined effect is performed. When the effect is executed, the second predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the count-up effect is executed, a numerical value is added in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the difference between the first predetermined action and the second predetermined action can be clarified, the player can clearly distinguish the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of means R4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means R1 to the means R3,
The display mode of the predetermined display area differs between when the first predetermined effect is being executed and when the second predetermined effect is being executed (shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)). Thus, when the countdown effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed in white, and as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), when the countup effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed. (Displayed in blue or red)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means R5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means R1 to the means R4,
The display mode of the predetermined display area when the first predetermined effect is executed is different from the display mode of the predetermined display area when the second predetermined effect is executed (FIGS. 13-9 (2) and As shown in FIG. 13-11 (14), “3” as an initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the countdown effect is executed, and the sub liquid crystal display when the countup effect is executed. This is different from “70” as the initial value of the count-up display displayed on the instrument 35TM300)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means R6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means R1 to the means R5,
There are a plurality of display modes of the predetermined display area when the predetermined effect is executed for at least one of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect (the initial value of the count-up effect is the expectation notice effect As shown in FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G), the initial value of the count-up effect is “50”, “60”, “70”, “80”, and Either “90” can be determined)
Depending on the display mode of the predetermined display area when the predetermined effect is executed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different (as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G), the same final value). In this case, the big hit expectation is higher when the initial value of the count-up effect is smaller than when the initial value of the count-up effect is large)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the display mode of the predetermined display area when the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means R7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means R1 to the means R6,
In a special display area (main liquid crystal display 35TM200) different from the predetermined display area, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17). ), The initial value, change pattern, and final value of the numerical bar 35TM610 shown in the expectation notice effect of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are the initial values shown in the count-up effect of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Value, change pattern, and final value)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, an effect related to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be enhanced by enabling the effect related to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect to be executed in the special display area. .

  As shown in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2006-10508 (FIG. 38), a gaming machine that executes an effect of counting down the remaining time until a reach effect is started is disclosed. In a gaming machine that performs a predetermined operation such as a countdown described in JP-A-2006-10508 (FIG. 38), there is room for enhancing the effect. The invention according to the means S1 to the means S5 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of performing a predetermined operation.

The gaming machine of means S1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an suggestion effect (pseudo-continuous effect, anticipation notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
Predetermined effects (countdown effects, count-up effects) that change the display mode of the effect display by performing predetermined actions (countdown operation for subtracting numerical values, count-up operation for adding numerical values) in response to execution of the suggestive effects Predetermined execution execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can be executed,
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
In the first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) that performs a predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as an initial value) according to the first special mode. As shown, the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays “3” defined as an initial value, and then performs a countdown operation to perform a countdown effect in which a numerical value is subtracted).
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17)) in which a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as an initial value) according to the second special mode. As shown in FIG. 5, after displaying “70” defined as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a count-up operation is performed, so that a count-up effect for adding numerical values) can be performed. Yes,
When the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), The expectation level for jackpot is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means S2 is
A gaming machine of means S1,
As the suggestion effect, there are a first suggestion effect (pseudo-continuous effect) and a second suggestion effect (expectation notice effect),
The predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120)
The first predetermined effect is executed corresponding to the execution of the first suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5), the countdown effect is executed corresponding to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect). ),
The second predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the second suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17)) Execute)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect correspond to different types of suggestion effects, the correspondence between the predetermined effect and the suggestion effects can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means S3 is
A gaming machine of means S1 or means S2,
As the predetermined operation, there are a first predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) and a second predetermined operation (addition, countup operation) having different operation modes,
When the first predetermined effect is executed, the first predetermined operation is performed in a predetermined display area (when the countdown effect is executed, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 subtracts a numerical value), and the second predetermined effect is performed. Is executed, the second predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the count-up effect is executed, numerical values are added in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the difference between the first predetermined action and the second predetermined action can be clarified, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of means S4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means S1 to the means S3,
The display mode of the predetermined display area differs between when the first predetermined effect is being executed and when the second predetermined effect is being executed (shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)). Thus, when the countdown effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed in white, and as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), when the countup effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed. (Displayed in blue or red)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means S5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means S1 to the means S4,
In a special display area (main liquid crystal display 35TM200) different from the predetermined display area, an effect corresponding to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be executed (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17). ), The initial value, change pattern, and final value of the numerical bar 35TM610 shown in the expectation notice effect on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are the initial value, change pattern, and Is consistent with the final value)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, an effect related to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be enhanced by enabling the effect related to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect to be executed in the special display area. .

  As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), a timer effect is started in parallel with the progress of the battle effect (super reach effect), and when the timer effect display eventually reaches 0, the battle effect ( A gaming machine from which a result of super reach production is derived is disclosed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), a related effect (timer effect) related to the execution status of a suggestion effect (battle effect) that suggests that the game machine is controlled to be in an advantageous state. There is room to improve interest. The invention according to the means T1 to the means T6 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of related effects.

The gaming machine of means T1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (music reach effect, cut-in notice effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
A related effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a related effect (count display effect) related to the execution status of the suggestion effect,
As the execution status of the suggestion effect, as shown in the first stage (as shown in FIG. 13-15 (3), the period of 1 to 15 seconds in the music reach effect) and the second stage after the first stage (FIG. 13). -15 (4), a period of 16 to 30 seconds in music reach production)
When the suggestion effect in the second stage is executed, the ratio of the controlled effects in the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestion effect in the first stage is executed and the suggestion effect in the second stage is not executed (FIG. 13). (As shown in -13 (A) to (D), the expectation level for jackpot is higher when the music reach production is executed until the second stage than when the music reach production is finished in the first stage) ,
It is easier to recognize the related effects when the suggestion is in the second stage than when the suggestion is in the first stage (as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) and (4), music reach). When the production is in the first stage, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin position, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced, and the count display effect of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced. On the other hand, when the music reach production is in the second stage, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved because the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the production position. In addition, the visibility of the count display effect in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestion effect is in the first stage, it is difficult to recognize the related effect as compared to when the suggestion effect is in the second stage.

The gaming machine of means T2 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (music reach effect, cut-in notice effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
A related effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a related effect (count display effect) related to the execution status of the suggestion effect,
As the execution state of the suggestion effect, as shown in the first stage (as shown in FIG. 13-19 (3), the period of 1 to 15 seconds in the music reach effect) and the second stage after the first stage (FIG. 13). -19 (4), a period of 16 to 30 seconds in music reach production)
When the suggestion effect in the second stage is executed, the ratio of the controlled effects in the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestion effect in the first stage is executed and the suggestion effect in the second stage is not executed (FIG. 13). (As shown in -13 (C) and (D), the expectation of jackpot is higher when the music reach production is executed until the second stage than when the music reach production is finished in the first stage) ,
The rate at which the related effect is executed is higher when the suggestive effect is at the second stage than when the suggestion effect is at the first stage (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), a music reach effect). (When the music reach production is in the second stage, the ratio of executing the count display effect is higher than in the first stage.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestion effect is in the first stage, since the execution ratio of the related effect is lower than when the suggestion effect is in the second stage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

The gaming machine of means T3 is
A gaming machine of means T1,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
It is possible to change the visibility of the related effects by changing the visibility of the predetermined display area (as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) and (4), the music reach effect is the first stage). In this case, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin position, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered, and the visibility of the counting display effect in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. On the other hand, when the music reach production is in the second stage, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the production position, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is displayed. To improve the visibility of counting display effects in
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the visibility of the related effects can be changed while sharing the effect information to be displayed in the predetermined display area.

The gaming machine of means T4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means T1 to the means T3,
The related effect is an effect of updating the display corresponding to the execution period of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 13-14, the execution period of the count display effect executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is the music. (This is the same as the execution period from the start of the reach production to the end of the music reach production (period from T3 to T7B))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the period during which the suggestion effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of means T5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means T1 to the means T4,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
As an effect different from the related effect, a predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (timer effect) for performing a specific operation (timer subtraction) different from the predetermined operation,
When the related effect is executed, the ratio of the predetermined effect being executed is lower than when the related effect is not executed (as shown in FIG. 13-13 (E), when the count display effect is executed). The execution rate of the cut-in notice effect is lower than when the count display effect is not executed, and the execution rate of the cut-in notice effect matches the execution rate of the timer effect, so the count display effect is executed. If it is, the execution ratio of the timer effect is lower than when the count display effect is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effects such as related effects and predetermined effects as effects to perform the operation, and it is possible to suppress the complication of the effects while diversifying the effects.

The gaming machine of means T6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means T1 to the means T5,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
As an effect different from the suggestion effect (music reach effect), a special effect (pseudo) in an area (the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200) different from the predetermined display area. Can be executed)
When the special effect is executed, the suggestion effect is in a second stage higher than when the special effect is not executed (when the pseudo effect is executed, the pseudo effect is not executed). More than that, the percentage of music reach production is the second stage)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it can be noted whether or not the special effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), a timer effect is started in parallel with the progress of the battle effect (super reach effect), and when the timer effect display eventually reaches 0, the battle effect ( A gaming machine from which a result of super reach production is derived is disclosed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), a related effect (timer effect) related to the execution status of a suggestion effect (battle effect) that suggests that the game machine is controlled to be in an advantageous state. There is room to improve interest. The invention according to the means U1 to the means U6 is made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of related effects.

The gaming machine of means U1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (music reach effect, cut-in notice effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
A related effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a related effect (count display effect) related to the execution state of the suggestion effect;
As an effect different from the related effect, a predetermined effect executing means (for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (timer effect) for performing a specific operation (subtraction operation) in response to execution of the suggestion effect (cut-in notice effect) CPU 120),
The rate at which the related effects are executed differs depending on the execution state of the suggestion effects (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the music reach effects are more than the case where the music reach effects are in the first stage). In the case of the second stage, the rate at which the counting display effect is executed is higher)
Depending on whether or not the related effect is executed, the ratio of the predetermined effect is different (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (H), when the count display effect is being executed, the count display is performed). The execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect is higher than the case where the effect is not executed, and the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect matches the execution ratio of the timer effect. If it is, the execution ratio of the timer effect is higher than when the count display effect is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by providing the related effect and the predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of means U2 is
A gaming machine of means U1,
As the execution state of the suggestion effect (music reach effect), the first stage (period of 1 to 15 seconds of the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (3)), and the first stage after the first stage. There are two stages (as shown in Fig. 13-19 (4), the period of 16 to 30 seconds of music reach production),
When the suggestion effect in the second stage is executed, the ratio of the advantageous effects being controlled is higher than when the suggestion effect in the first stage is executed and the suggestion effect in the second stage is not executed (FIG. 13). (As shown in -13 (A) to (D), the expectation degree of jackpot is higher when the music reach production is executed until the second stage than when the music reach production is finished in the first stage)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it can be noted whether or not the second stage suggestion effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means U3 is
A gaming machine of means U2,
The rate at which the related effect is executed is higher when the suggestive effect is at the second stage than when the suggestion effect is at the first stage (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), a music reach effect). (When the music reach effect is in the second stage, the ratio of the count display effect is higher than that in the first stage)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestion effect is in the first stage, the execution ratio of the related effect is lower than when the suggestion effect is in the second stage.

The gaming machine of means U4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means U1 to the means U3,
The related effect is an effect of updating the display corresponding to the execution period of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 13-18, the execution period of the count display effect executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is the music. (This corresponds to the execution period from the start of the reach production to the end of the music reach production (period from T3 to T14B))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the period during which the suggestion effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of means U5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means U1 to means U4,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
The predetermined effect (timer effect) is an effect of performing an operation different from the predetermined operation as the specific operation (the timer effect is an effect of performing timer subtraction different from the update of the effect execution period).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a structure, the production can be diversified and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means U6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means U1 to the means U5,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
As an effect different from the suggestion effect (music reach effect), a special effect (pseudo) in an area (the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200) different from the predetermined display area. Can be executed)
When the special effect is executed, the suggestion effect is in a second stage higher than when the special effect is not executed (when the pseudo effect is executed, the pseudo effect is not executed). More than that, the percentage of music reach production is the second stage)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it can be noted whether or not the special effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view which shows a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board | substrate, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a part of memory area in RAM of a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of main board RAM. (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor, (B-1)-(B-6) is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data memorize | stored in the storage area of the ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of a setting suggestion effect, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production | presentation aspect of a setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output with respect to the payout control board from a game control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control board and a payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a control signal and a control command. It is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which CPU for payout control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the ball | bent lending restriction | limiting method in this embodiment. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating communication between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st ball | bending loan restriction | limiting method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd ball rental restricting method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd ball | bending loan restriction | limiting method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 4th ball rental restricting method. It is a timing diagram which shows the example which does not restrict ball lending during setting change mode. It is a timing chart showing an example of restarting payout after the setting change mode ends. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of forcibly terminating payout when shifting to a setting change mode. FIG. 5 is a timing chart showing signal transmission and reception between a game control microcomputer and a payout control microcomputer during normal operation. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during the period controlled in the setting change mode. FIG. 5 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during a period when the gaming machine frame or the glass door frame is opened. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power interruption occurs before the set value is confirmed, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power interruption occurs after the set value is confirmed. It is a figure which shows the warning screen when setting change operation is performed during a game. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from each output terminal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change response signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a setting value and the output mode of a setting change corresponding | compatible signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output mode and output period of a setting change response signal. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. (1) The figure which shows the value displayed on a display monitor when a set value is not a regular value, (2) The figure which shows the value displayed on a display monitor when a set value is a regular value . It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restrict | limiting a ball rental based on the open state detection of the frame for gaming machines. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing a method for resuming ball lending after detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a ball rental, without shifting to setting change mode after power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of changing to setting change mode after a power supply cutoff and forcibly ending a ball rental. It is a timing diagram which shows the method which transfers to setting change mode after a power supply interruption and restarts ball rental. It is a timing chart showing a method of restricting prize ball payout based on detection of an open state of a gaming machine frame. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram showing a method for restarting award ball payout after detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a method for restarting paying out a prize ball without shifting to the setting change mode after power is turned off. It is a timing chart showing a method for shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and forcibly terminating the prize ball payout. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a method for shifting to a setting change mode after power is turned off and restarting paying out a prize ball. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change response signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change response signal. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a hold display and an active display. It is a flowchart which shows a change effect determination process. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the final display mode determination table for 1st change effect determination, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the final display mode determination table for 2nd change effect determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pending | holding change pattern in a 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pending | holding change pattern in a 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pending | holding change pattern in a 2nd change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production in the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect aspect regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect aspect regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production in the 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect regarding a 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect regarding a 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect aspect regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect aspect regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect aspect regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern of an active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the kind of change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production | presentation aspect of a change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production | presentation aspect of a change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production | presentation aspect of a change suggestion production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of alerting | reporting when the setting change flag is set at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power interruption occurs before the set value is confirmed, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power interruption occurs after the set value is confirmed. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. The logo panel drive mechanism of this embodiment is shown, (a) is a front view of a logo panel drive mechanism, (b) is a P arrow view of FIG. 13-2 (a). It is a Q arrow line view of Drawing 13-2 (a). It is a front view which shows the state which moved both the 1st logo panel and the 2nd logo panel to the position which overlaps with the main liquid crystal display in front view. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change start time production | presentation determination process. (A), (B) is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table, (C), (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio determination table of expectation degree notice effect, (E) is expectation degree notice It is explanatory drawing which shows the final display mode determination table of an effect, (F), (G) is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode change pattern determination table of an anticipation notice effect. (H) is explanatory drawing which shows the table which determines the execution presence or absence of count up effect, (I) is explanatory drawing which shows the table which determines the execution presence or absence of count down effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a countdown effect and a countup effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect regarding a countdown production and a countup production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect regarding a countdown production and a countup production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect regarding a countdown production and a countup production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change start time production | presentation determination process. (A), (B) is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table, (C), (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the final stage determination table of a music reach effect, (E) is a cut-in notice effect (F) is an explanatory view showing an effect mode determination table for a cut-in notice effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a count display effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect aspect regarding a count display effect. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the production determination process at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. (G) is explanatory drawing which shows the execution start stage determination table of a count display effect, (H) is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio determination table of a cut-in notice effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a count display effect and a timer effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect aspect regarding a count display effect and a timer effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the form of the effect aspect regarding a count display effect and a timer effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change start time production | presentation determination process. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the final display mode determination table of active display, (B), (C) is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern determination table of active display, (D), (E) is change. It is explanatory drawing which shows a suggestion effect determination table, (F) is explanatory drawing which shows a cut-in notice effect determination table. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the 1st change suggestion effect and the 2nd change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect regarding a 1st change suggestion effect, a 2nd change suggestion effect, and a 3rd change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect regarding a 1st change suggestion production and a 2nd change suggestion production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the 3rd change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect regarding a 3rd change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table at the time of non-probability change (at the time of low probability). It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability). It is explanatory drawing which shows the probability change fall determination table. (A) It is explanatory drawing which shows the game flow in the case of a probability change falling within 100 rotations after the big hit gaming state is finished, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the game flow in the case of a positive change falling after 101 rotations after the big hit gaming state is finished. is there. (A), (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table in a high-accuracy high base state (within 99 rotations), (C), (D) is the fluctuation pattern at the time of the probability variation fall winning (within 99 rotations). It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table, (E), (F) is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table in a low probability base state (within 99 rotations), (G), (H) is the 100th rotation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for use. (I) and (J) are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern determination table for the 100th rotation, and (K) and (L) are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern determination table in a high-accuracy base state (after 101 rotations). It is a figure, (M), (N) is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern determination table at the time of a probability change fall winning (after 101 rotation). (A) It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a 1st setting suggestion effect, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | generation aspect of a 2nd setting suggestion effect. It is a time chart which shows an example of the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect in the case of a probability fall within 100 revolutions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect in the case of a probable fall within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect in the case of a probable fall within 100 rotations. It is a time chart which shows an example of the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect in the case of a probability change falling after 101 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect in the case of a probability change fall after 101 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect in the case of a probability change fall after 101 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the game flow in the case of a probability change falling within 100 rotations. It is a time chart which shows the modification regarding the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect in the case of a probability fall within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production | presentation aspect in the case of a probable fall within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production | presentation aspect in the case of a probable fall within 100 rotations.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. A normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The release state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy-low base state, and so on. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probable big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  A board other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 is also referred to as a sub board. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpot), start information (startup) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko machine 1 Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on “per-game” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of ordinary symbols is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process in step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When a start winning is generated, a display result (including a jackpot type) and a random value for determining a variation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination are performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic fluctuation time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as the presence or absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. This includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the probability variation state is being controlled and the end of the count-off is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot to be open based on the display result being “hit”. It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count has reached the upper limit execution count, The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit ending process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing is ended.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. This small hit opening process is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state and the measured elapsed time. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. Moreover, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the presentation control command etc. which were transmitted from the main board | substrate 11 are performed about the control content of presentation operation | movement using various production | presentation apparatuses.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold storage number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command is received from the main board 11 for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. It is updated to 7 ″, and the big hit effect processing is finished.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding the feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 8-1 is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern and the kind of reach in the pachinko game machine 1 of this Embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the non-reach losing variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. -2, the variation pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. Fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the reach effect is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B), the reliability when each reach is executed (normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super). Reach B <super reach A in order. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is executed via normal reach. Further, during the reach production of the super reach, the development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like, such as variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 shown in FIG. 8A, are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Although FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to a superreach level one level higher, a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability in the super reach is notified of the reach title only by display, and the title of the other super reach is notified by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than the reach with low reliability. Thereby, a player's expectation can be effectively spoken, and the production effect is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the fonts of the title characters (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typefaces (lines, fonts, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the reach title (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of the operation of the feature 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing effect control process processing based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbols indicating the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to reach a reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001, which is a teammate character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of super reach production, such as when the introduction of super reach production (also referred to as super reach production) ends, as shown in FIG. The Super Reach A title 31AK002 (here “SP Reach A” characters) is displayed on the entire screen, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name (here “Super Reach A”) is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is notified. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the enemy character 31AK003 is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed. Subsequent portions of the reach production of Super Reach A that are confronted are executed. An effect in which characters confront each other is also called a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a teammate character wins, the game is a big hit, and if a teammate character loses, the game is lost.

  In addition, when displaying a line on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the line may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the lines are not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed as subtitles on the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction of the super reach effect ends, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. (In this case, the characters “SP reach B”) and the audio corresponding to the title name of the reach (here “super reach B”) are output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach B is Informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (G), the enemy character 31AK006 is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed. Subsequent portions of the reach production of Super Reach B that confront each other are executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach production. By doing in this way, since the title can be notified after showing the introduction portion of the super reach effect to the player, etc., the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Further, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And super reach B (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G)...) Then, in the introductory part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is made after the super reach production is started and which title is notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to making the production mode until the title is notified completely common, and it is possible to determine which super-reach is to be determined if the production is closely watched. You may make it make a part into a common production | presentation aspect. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing in this way, the production effect is improved and the player pays attention to the production. As described above, the title notification may be executed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of the super reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the super reach D title 31AK007 (here, the letters “SP reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, a sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “defeat the enemy”) is output from the speaker 8, thereby informing the title of the super reach D. Thus, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 indicating the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation degree is an expectation degree that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely coincide with the reach big hit reliability.

  Note that the super-reach D audio notification does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the voice title notification is varied depending on the type of reach. Thereby, the notification mode of a title alert | report becomes various and an interest improves.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 are continuously reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing in this way, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during reach production. In FIG. 8-2 (I), the contents of the effects common to FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A and super reach B) are shown, but the super reach effects dedicated to super reach D are executed. May be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the line 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach D where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted. Executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 (here, “SP reach E”) of super reach E is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Executed. Thus, in the super reach E, the title is notified together with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of Super Reach E with a low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent giving a player an excessive sense of expectation by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). (H)). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the super reach production can be executed and the production effect is improved. Note that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach in super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high hit reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of the super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach Production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach Production. The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, but the title is notified at the start of the super reach production when the reach is high and the super hit is low. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
In this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified on a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In particular, in the case of a reach with high hit reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. In addition, the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, in the case where the display area for performing the title notification is varied according to the reach effect, the display area may be varied as in this embodiment, or the display location may be varied.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the supervision A and superreach B title notifications with high jackpot reliability, the superleach D having a lower jackpot reliability than superreach A and superreach B without displaying an expectation indication. In the title notification in, an expectation indication is displayed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect becomes dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E having a lower hit reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying an expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation indication may be displayed in at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the degree of expectation indication is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) or the like, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by a meter or gauge. A numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) or the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectation may be increased so that half black (half) black stars can be displayed. .

(Title display end timing)
In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in super reach A and super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a decision effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the kind of reach can be grasped even during super reach production. In addition, by performing as described above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. Note that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily because any effect can be achieved.

  In addition, although the production operation of the reach effect of Super Reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification or expectation suggestion display corresponding to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when it is time to derive the display result (the final stage of variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “lost”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a decision effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), A definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is “losing”, an image indicating that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a well-defined title notification can be executed.

  8-2 and 8-3, while the reach effect of super reach, the decorative design is reduced in the lower right part of the image display device 5 and variable display is executed. The method of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying on-screen display, active display, character resident display during variable display, and mobile-related display, the image display device 5 is appropriately hidden during the super-reach reach effect in order to focus on the reach effect. It is good. At this time, during the low-reliability reach production such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively due to the low-reliability reach effect, and it is possible to focus attention on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed when the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, in the case of developing to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of super reach A is notified and the reach effect of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of super reach B is notified and the reach effect of super reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the development reach is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and may be an effect that the screen gradually cracks and breaks, or a sandstorm (display that appears to be broken). You may make it display. By making such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. Note that there may be a development effect such as an effect that the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the black star indicating the degree of expectation is displayed from the beginning in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008, but first, five white stars are displayed, An expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star may be executed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when the title of Super Reach D is notified, first, five white star expectation indications 31AK021 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars on the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is increased by one level. Two or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half of the black stars may be displayed and the expectation level may be increased by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of the expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing in this way, expectation suggestion production becomes various and production effect improves. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation that increase at a time, fits into the white stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expected increase Such an effect may be executed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, character, motif, sound output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changeable by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 8-5 (G) to (L) are examples of the presentation operation of the title notification and the degree of expectation suggestion when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the presentation mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the title notification and the expected degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G), the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed. At this time, audio corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but audio different from the normal mode (for example, audio having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and expected. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L). In this way, depending on the presentation mode (the state when the reach presentation is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the gaming state, etc., the presentation can be varied and the presentation effect can be varied by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

  FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). You may make it vary the production | presentation aspect of a suggestion production | generation). Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified or the execution rate of the title notification may be varied. For example, when a predetermined production mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the production according to the player's preference can be executed and the production effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that increases the number of black stars stepwise is executed. An expectation suggestion effect that reduces the number of displays suggesting stepwise may be executed. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect that increases the display indicating the expectation level of the expectation level indication step by step, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation level. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at a time instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), image display is performed. The development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when an operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 (here, the letters “SP reach C”) of the super reach C is displayed. The title of Super Reach C is notified. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by 2 or more, it is displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the degree of expectation suggestion change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the reliability of a big hit is executed according to a notification mode of a title (for example, a display color of a title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the Super Reach A title 31AK036 is displayed in black, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, whereby the Super Reach A title. Is notified, a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B). Thus, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title preview shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the title display.

  In addition, when a title notice that changes the display mode (display color) of the title is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. Moreover, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Title notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title being reached is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that improves the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit advantageous state, such as the notice effect or the development effect. In this way, once the title is informed, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the notice effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect mode. The notice effect determining process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If the change pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 31 AKS 001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31 AKS 002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in Fig. 8-9 (A), the display color of Super Reach titles changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern" A changing thing, a thing changing from "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and the big hit reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of a title, and a production effect improves.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title text is displayed in bold and the text itself is “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area is “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as “fruit pattern” from the beginning. For the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach with a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine any of the changing timings. In the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of timings to be changed may be one or less than that of a super reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the production mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a different rate from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode of the title notice (display color and display color change timing) depending on the effect mode, the effects become more diverse and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the words) of the characters in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After determining the display color of the super-reach title, the display color of the character's speech in the super-reach reach effect (whether or not to execute the speech advance notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the lines in the reach effect is determined at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “losing”. As shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are “white”, “red”, and those that change from “white” to “red”, and this order (ascending order) ) Is a big hit reliability. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the lines. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of words, and the production effect improves. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the line is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the line notice. For example, when the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the line notice, the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice form is obtained. Also, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode of the title notice and the line notice. For example, the big hit reliability may be higher when the change timing is the same than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change is first. In this way, it is possible to focus attention on the change timings of the title notice and the line notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the lines may be determined in a ratio different from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  In addition, it may replace with serif notice and may be made to perform the notice effect which notifies a big hit reliability by the change of the effect aspect of reach production. In that case, in the notice effect, a plurality of effect mode change timings may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the line in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the title notice and the serif notice can be executed in the case of super reach. However, in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the super-reliable super reach), the title notice is provided. And at least one of the serif notices may be made executable. In addition, although the title notice and the line notice have been described as being determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may vary depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing in this way, the notice effect according to the kind of reach can be performed, and the production effect improves.

  In this embodiment, the number of performance modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the line notice. By doing in this way, the production becomes various and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the serif notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing in this way, a unified notice effect can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
An effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed when the effect mode of the title notice and the line notice change. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. And after an effect production | presentation is performed, you may make it a production | presentation aspect (display color) of a title or a line change. The effect mode (action effect image or the like) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the speech. There may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the line does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the line notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, according to the production mode of the action effect, the rate at which at least one production mode of the title notice and the serif notice changes (the rate at which the production mode changes due to the action effect) may be different. The rate of change in which direction of appearance changes (the rate of which acts) may be different, and the rate of change in which color (how many steps) may be different. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title and the line will act when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there exist several production | presentation modes, you may make it determine the presence or absence of execution of an effect production, and the production | presentation aspect at a different ratio according to production | presentation mode. By doing in this way, the effect production according to production mode can be performed and production effect improves.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either a title or a line depending on the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing in this way, the player comes to pay attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-described characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiment are not essential components and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Here, although expressed as a sub liquid crystal, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and super reach E in the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified, the title and the expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title or expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing in this way, a title and an expectation suggestion display which can display a title and an expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach production in the image display device 5 are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (notification that mainly displays characters) related to other effects. May be. For example, in the case where a pre-read zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 is executed as the notice effect (for example, the pre-read notice effect), the transitioned zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When presenting a mission (such as “Reach with 7”, “Defeat all enemies using a stick controller”) and executing a mission effect that will be advantageous to the player when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for informing whether or not the display result is “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is shown ( FIG. 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, when a predetermined timing is reached before the display result is derived, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation effective period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the result of battle effect or by temporarily stopping the display result. By doing in this way, since a display result is shown according to a player's operation, a player's willingness to participate in a game can be raised and interest is improved.

  8-10 and FIGS. 8-11 are diagrams illustrating an example of super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), a character 31AK041 that is an ally character and a character that is an enemy character 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed in the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is executed are prepared. The big hit reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a happy character 31AK046, and a small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to a large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. An effect 31AK050 in which a bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to a stick image 31AK051.

  Thus, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without an action effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of action effect.

  Thereafter, before a predetermined time before the display result is derived, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), the restriction line 31AK044 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K), the stick image 31AK051 is in the central portion. And a display prompting an operation to pull the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, an operation effective period in which the operation to the stick controller 31A is effective.

  When an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (M), a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived at the timing when the variation time ends. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation effective period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of the small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during reach production, so the production effect is improved and the player's expectation is also improved. Can be maintained.

  8-10 and 8-11, the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted, but the reach effects shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (the presence / absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence / absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which suggests the expectation degree of control to advantageous states, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display after the variable display is started is executed. In the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. There are cases where a specific image is included and displayed when any one of the shutter display and the reach title display is displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the display size difference between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When a shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the big hit reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the big hit reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red letter reach title). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When a fruit pattern is displayed during shutter display and reach title display, a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 and a notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. By the light emission control of the common sound and game effect lamp 9, the player is shown that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed, and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b), variable display of decorative symbols is started. A downward arrow indicates variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach production is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, in the reach title image 31AK062, characters “battle reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Atsuiatsui”. Here, the size of the suggestion display displayed in the reach title effect is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting a specific sound, it can be made easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the case where the output period of the common sound and the specific sound is completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters “Battle Victory!” Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen with the original number design. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all symbols are stopped and a big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that a fruit pattern image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  Also, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noted.

  Also, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. If it does in this way, it can prevent that the fruit pattern image which is a specific image becomes difficult to see by the execution timing overlapping.

  The determination relating to the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, a fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily performed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Various components are connected, and the effect control board 12 is connected to various effect devices such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9, but these are omitted in FIG.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being accommodated in the board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 Also, it has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from the gaming control microcomputer 100 and various gaming ball detection switches. A switch circuit 110 for transmitting to 100 and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5 (A), the main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, 11, a display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front side when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) includes each prize opening (large prize winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning prize opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as “entrance area”. The total number of game balls entering (also referred to as) is counted, and various winning information such as run ratio and role ratio is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. In this way, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as a connection ratio and a role ratio after installation in the amusement hall. That is, it is normal for the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to design the game board surface so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Further, when the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is performed and, as a result of the adjustment, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening as frequently as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made after the installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The power supply board is enclosed in a substrate case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (outtake rate) to be described later is changed at the lower right side of the back of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 functioning as setting switches are provided. A game shop clerk or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 in a state in which the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that each board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037 is predetermined. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Therefore, only a store clerk possessing a predetermined key can operate. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, only a store clerk possessing a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated among the store clerk of the game store. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by a predetermined key. The switch 21TM051 can execute the switching operation and execute an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation. Possible switch may be used.

  Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can be maintained in the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a store clerk or the like in the game hall. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is configured such that the key can be inserted / removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game shop clerk or the like has to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so the game shop clerk or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. Can be prevented.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used for discharging the game balls that have won the prize winning holes and the game balls that have entered the out slot to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a released game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the above-described switch circuit 110 as shown in FIG.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. LED control commands used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Detection signals from the ball break switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  Further, on the payout control board 21TM037, as shown in FIG. 9-2, a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2 and a front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided with a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. (Error) is also determined. Note that the detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby a payout control microcomputer. 21TM370 can distinguish and recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect a clogged game ball, that is, a so-called ball bite. . In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball short switch 21TM187 indicates a full ball state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launcher. A full tank signal is output. The launch motor signal output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). Signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. The firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals to / from the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal and reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving a prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are placed at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal by putting specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out by changing predetermined bits of the winning ball request signal, and the award for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the winning ball payout operation ends, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets data indicating the end of the winning ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It transmits to the microcomputer 100 for control. In addition, when a predetermined error (an error such as ball lending, full tank, or out of ball) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is The received reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Note that specific signal exchange by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9-22 and 9-34 to 36.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of balls to be lapped through an output port 21TM372b to a terminal board (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board). Output to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, it is not shown in FIG. 9-2.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball cut LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

  Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is not shown in FIG. 9-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 is connected with a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063.

  In response to the player's operation, the card board 21TM050 receives a ball switch signal indicating that the ball switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending possible display signal are provided from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the dispensing control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066 as shown in FIG. 9-2.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines whether the card unit 21TM050 is connected or not based on the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give the player a predetermined number of rental balls. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to fall. Thereafter, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100 on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided on the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. It is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process described later, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value consists of 6 levels 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  FIGS. 9A to 9F are explanatory diagrams illustrating display result determination tables corresponding to the setting values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the subject of variable display, a determination value for jackpot is set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the variable display target. If the set value is “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, then the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set value is “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”. ing. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. Winning a big hit with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 is used and the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, A big hit is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of “2”. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 is used and the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The winner is won with a higher probability (1/250) than the cases of “2” and “3”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The winner is won with a higher probability (1/235) than the cases of “2”, “3”, and “4”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 is used, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The winner is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is a variable display target.

  In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value corresponds to any one of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). When the winning judgment value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). In other words, the big win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. Note that the “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). Separately, jackpot determination is performed using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Also good.

  In the present embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The setting value that can be set to may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  Here, the display of the total of game balls and the ratio of the bonuses on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described.

  The main board 11 has information on game winnings, for example, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning opening (electrical chew), and the big winning opening. The number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls are entered and the number of fired balls is totaled, and the display monitor 21TM029 displays the number of winning balls for winning the big winning mouth (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. Percentage ratio (%), of the total number of prize balls, the percentage of the number of prize balls due to winning the 2nd start prize opening (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls due to winning the big prize opening (Attacker) A certain ratio (%) and a base (%) that is a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched are displayed. The continuous ratio is a ratio of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive consecutive feature winning balls) obtained by winning a big prize opening (attacker). The ratio is the number of winning balls in the 2nd starting winning entrance (Den Chu) out of the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the big winning entrance (attacker) (the number of winning balls below) Is the proportion occupied. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of winning balls (the total number of winning balls below) is the number of winning balls for winning the winning prize winner (attacker), the number of winning balls for winning the second starting winning prize opening (Den Chu), and the winning prize opening (Attacker) and the total number of winning balls by winning in winning ports (first starting winning port, general winning port) other than the second starting winning port (Den Chu). In addition, the big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electrical chew) are variable roles, and the winning percentage of the game ball is changed due to the change of the passable width of the game ball. is there. In addition, the winning ports (first starting winning port, general winning port) other than the big winning port (attacker) and the second starting winning port (Den Chu) are fixed roles, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected percentage of winning game balls is a fixed character.

  As for the calculation and calculation method of information related to game winnings, as for the ratio and role ratio, the winning ball in the first starting winning hole (heso) and the general winning opening (sode) with 6000 winning balls Number (general prize ball number), number of regular electric ball award (electric chew prize ball number), which is the number of prize balls won by winning the 2nd starting prize opening (electric chew), and winning prizes (attacker) The number of special electoral award balls (the number of attacker award balls) that is the number of winning balls is counted. The total is set as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the winning ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of award balls (general award ball number), the number of ordinary electoral award balls (the number of electric chew award balls), and the special electric The number of winning balls (the number of attacker winning balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, and has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set. ing. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 is stored in an equivalent amount (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and role ratio (%) can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for 60000 prize balls is counted. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

  The display monitor 21TM029 has a base (%), a hand ratio (%), a cumulative base ratio (%), a hand ratio (%), and a base calculated based on the previous 60000 winning balls (%). Base 1 (%)) and a base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of award balls by winning at the first start winning hole (heso) counted by the progress of the game, The number of winning balls due to winning, and the number of winning balls due to winning a winning prize (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) for 6000 is reflected in the ratio (%) for 60000 displayed after that, There may be a discrepancy between the continuous ratio (%) and the duty ratio (%) for 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), the number of winning balls by winning at the large winning opening (attacker), and the winning balls If the total number is input and aggregated at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, display timing of 6000 continuous ratios (%), etc.), such a discrepancy can be prevented.

  The storage area for storing information related to game winnings in this embodiment is provided for each set value, and includes a general winning ball, a first starting winning ball, a normal electric ball, and a special electric ball. The prize ball, the prize ball total, and the total shot-in are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. For this reason, the connection ratio, role ratio, and base of the present embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

  As an example of the calculation method, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning mouth (Den Chu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning mouth (attacker) A method for calculating the ratio of the winning combinations (ratio (%)) when the total number of acquired winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of winning balls acquired means the total number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutively-acquired balls acquired is the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins an attacker. The total number of hits refers to the cumulative number of game media that have been put into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. For this reason, a connection ratio can be calculated | required by following (1) Formula. Further, the role ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [number of consecutive winning balls / total number of winnings] × 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(number of consecutive feature winning balls + number of winning balls) / total winning number] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of winning balls) / total number of shots] × 100 (3)

  In the case where the total number of winning balls is 60000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the accessory ratio is calculated as 0.70 (3 digits after the decimal point rounded down) by dividing 42000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, firstly, the number of winning characters is multiplied by 100 to 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60000. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain a calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the ratio of the long-term bonuses. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning balls.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, 60 h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh. Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down from 00A410h of the winning character acquisition ball number, and the winning character acquisition ball number is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, calculation with a microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls is 10 times is + 1%. In other words, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and approximates the original value.

The substrate case 21TM201 is formed of a light-transmitting material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 can be visually recognized. The board case 21TM201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of the electrical components of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and an employee who wants to visually recognize the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, 60 h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh. Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down from 00A410h of the winning character acquisition ball number, and the winning character acquisition ball number is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 78%.

  Also, a storage area for storing information related to game winnings (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (totaling information related to game winnings stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters with a maximum of 2 bytes), prize balls The total number buffer) may not be initialized when the reset button is operated, but may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be further described later. Note that the checksum of the stored value is calculated and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the number of winning balls is greater than the value of the total number of winning balls stored, Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to game winnings when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive feature-acquired balls is greater than the value of the number of acquired balls Processing may be performed. Further, an error display or warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or an error display or warning display may be performed or an initialization process may be performed after being performed. The error display and warning display will be further described later.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 are divided as a divisor for 19876 and the ratio is calculated. 1987/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When calculation is performed in the game control microcomputer 100, calculation with a decimal point must be avoided, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following. In the division of 19876/34321, 34321 of the denominator is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the ratio is 57% (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799 respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point rounded down, for example, when the exact value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69% → 70% on the display. % Error may be displayed, but even in the display of 1% error, the duty ratio (%) (or continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100. Therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Further, the error gradually increases even when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, until the total number of acquired balls of a specific number or more (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by a counter, the display of the role (%) and the continuous ratio (%) is not performed on the display monitor Even if the display is performed, the fact that the error may be large may be notified by emitting light from a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  The display monitor 21TM029 displays the role ratio (%), the connection ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium wins an electric chew or an attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to a continuous ratio ( %), There is a possibility that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable that the role ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and are sequentially displayed.

  In addition, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when two 7 segments are provided), it becomes impossible to display 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), numerical values can be displayed in the lower two digits. However, even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, numerical values may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under specific conditions.

  In the present embodiment, the form in which the game medium is won by the sensors provided in the attacker and the electric chew is detected, and the number of the respective winning balls is individually counted based on the detection result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a sensor provided after the discharge passage through which the game medium won by the attacker and the game medium won by the electric chew merges is used as the detection result. On the basis of this, the number of winning balls and the number of consecutive winning balls may be totaled.

  Hereinafter, the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base display will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 9-3). In addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided on the back side of the game board 2.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passage number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth counter. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of winning prizes (attackers) is counted by the big winning number counter, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first big winnings are shown. A first grand prize counter that counts the number of winnings to the mouth and a second grand prize counter that counts the number of winnings to the second winning prize are individually provided, and the number of winnings to the first grand prize opening. And the number of winning prizes to the second grand prize opening may be totaled separately, and the number of winning prizes may be totaled to be the number of winning prizes for the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to the fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch. The big prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, data used for the connection ratio and the role ratio stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when 21TM052, the calculation of the link ratio and the role ratio, or the like, is in a state where the calculation of the link ratio or the role ratio is unavoidable. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal linkage ratio and a hand ratio. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing data.

  The main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106 as described above, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing an initial setting, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure a business hall operating time.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), the main board 11 is accommodated in the board case 21TM201. Caulking pins 21TM011B are attached to the substrate case 21TM201. Since the caulking pins 21TM011B are provided, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 21TM201, and illegal acts on the main board 11 are prevented. Substrate case 21TM201 is a caulked substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as “caulking substrate case”).

  The display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. In addition, a sealing seal 21TM011S is attached to the substrate case 21TM201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is sealed. The seal seal 21TM011S is pasted, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 21TM201. The seal seal 21TM011S is disposed at a position away from the main board 11, and is disposed at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is obstructed, such as in front of the display monitor 21TM029. Thus, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the seal sticker 21TM011S.

  The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D, and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. Each of the first display portion 21TM029A to the fifth display portion 21TM029E is composed of seven segments each composed of seven segments that draw a character “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing in an extremely short period.

  Each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 9-5 (B) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The first display portion 21TM029A in the first digit has a set value (1 to 6) that has been totalized, and a RAM clear notification (“C”) that notifies the completion of the RAM clear that the CPU 103 executes after the processing of the setting change mode. ) Is displayed, the total period is displayed on the second display portion 21TM029B in the second digit and the third display portion 21TM029C in the third digit, the fourth display portion 21TM029D in the fourth digit and the fifth display portion in the fifth digit. 21TM029E displays numerical values as percentages. In display No1, a short-term run ratio is displayed, and in display No2, a short-term role ratio is displayed. In display No. 3, the total cumulative run ratio is displayed, and in display No. 4, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. In display No5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed. Is done.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total cumulative means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the linkage ratio, the role ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the run ratio may be a ratio of the total number of winning balls that is occupied by the number of winning balls by winning a big winning opening in the big hit gaming state. Also, the ratio of the winnings is the percentage of the total number of winning balls that is based on the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls in the winning game in the big hit gaming state. Also good. The base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term ratio of the display No1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term role ratio of the display No2 is displayed, “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the short-term ratio of display No1 is displayed, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the short-term ratio as a percentage (displayed in%) and display the short-term ratio of display No2. In this case, the short-term role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative role of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display No. 5 base 1 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the display No. 4 base 2 is displayed, the second display unit. “B6.” Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, when the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total display ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  The main board 11 enters the fourth general winning opening from the big winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening in calculating the run ratio, the ratio and the base. The number of entered game balls and the number of game balls discharged from the outlet are counted. In the main process, the CPU 103 sets the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, and the discharge port switch 21TM070. Switch processing for confirming the state of each switch (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is performed.

  In this switch process, based on the detection signal output from each switch, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered. And when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when a detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning port switch, When a detection signal is output from the second general prize port switch, the third general prize port switch, or the fourth general prize port switch, the first general prize number counter, the second general prize number counter, and the third general prize number When the value of the counter and the fourth general winning number counter is added and a detection signal is output from the discharge port switch 21TM070, the value of the driving number counter is added to each entry area. Aggregate of entering the number of game balls (the winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). Note that the value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  In this way, the step for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together in a series of processes for checking the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation process). By including it in the switch process, the number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without causing a separate counting program to be executed, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning at each winning opening based on the total number of winning game balls at each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let The number of winning balls by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls to be paid out by one winning with respect to the winning opening and the number of winning times to the winning opening. The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth divided here is a winning ball by winning a general winning mouth winning ball (first general winning mouth to fourth general winning mouth (sode)). ), 1st starting prize mouth prize ball (award ball by winning at the 1st starting prize port (heso)), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball by winning a prize for electric Chu), special electric role award ball (to the attacker) Is the number of prize balls. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of winning balls and the number of game balls that have been driven. Note that the CPU 103 individually counts the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first starting winning opening, but the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the first start. The number of game balls won at the winning opening may be summed up. In addition, the number of winning balls for the general winning opening and the number of winning balls for the first starting winning opening are calculated separately, but the number of winning balls for the general winning opening and the first starting winning opening are calculated. The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of winning balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to ten storage areas, each of which includes a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning opening for every 6000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). The active buffer includes a 0th storage area composed of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls for winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth that increases as the game progresses is added. Eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and the total accumulated for each winning opening. Yes. The storage area of the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 pieces of data can be spared. I can remember.

  In addition, the RAM 102 has a ratio ratio storage area for storing the ratios and ratios of 10 sets and the total cumulative total, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the last 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area for storing. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates 10 sets and total cumulative ratios and run ratios based on the number of winning balls based on the number of game balls received in each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative, and for 10 sets. In addition, it is stored in the linkage ratio storage area for storing the total cumulative ratios and linkage ratios. Each of the combination ratio combination ratio storage areas for storing the ratios and the combination ratios of the 10 sets and the total cumulative number is configured by a counter of 1 byte at maximum. For example, in the case of storing the set ratio and the total ratio of 10 sets and the total cumulative number as an integer, the counter can be stored with a margin with a maximum of 1 byte.

  Further, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates a base for 10 sets based on the number of game balls to be awarded to each winning opening for 10 sets, and the base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time The base (base 1) calculated based on the number of game balls won for each of the 10 sets of winning holes is stored in the base storage area. For example, when the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as integers, they can be stored with a margin of a maximum counter of 1 byte.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 9-7, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is the ROM area of the memory space (0000H to 2FFFH (H is a hexadecimal number in this embodiment. 0000H to 2FBFH, 2FC0H to 2FFFH are allocated to the program management area), and the CPU 103 reads the data from the ROM 101 by designating this ROM area. In this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal line of the internal register is assigned to a register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space. Write the data.

  The address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space. Write data. Note that other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  A RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) includes a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area, and other areas as shown in FIG. 9-8. It consists of In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area, reference data referenced by the control program described above (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) is temporarily stored.

  In addition, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the role ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total cumulative number of winning balls for each winning opening and a total cumulative combination ratio storage area. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas includes an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets). Min) total storage area, and 10 sets of ratio ratio storage areas. It should be noted that the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area respectively store data having different subroutine start addresses.

  In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above data (command data, supplemental data, reference data) is stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. is doing.

  The main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 9-9 (A) is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No1, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the short-term continuous ratio. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of the display No2, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-2), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the characters “3.” are displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

  When the display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-3), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. "Is displayed, and" 6. "is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The total display ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative continuous ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-4), “1” that is a set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. "Is displayed, and" 7. "is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the characters “6.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5). The display of base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No5, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Characters are displayed, and characters “L.” are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E include
The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

  And when the display of display No5 continues for 5 seconds, as shown to FIG. 9-9 (B-1), the short-term connection ratio of display No1 will be displayed. The short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the base 2 of the display No. 1 to the base 2 of the display No. 6 is sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. In addition, the display color of only the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 to base 2 of display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Further, the display of the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is as shown in FIGS. 18 (A) to 18 (B). Based on the above operation, when the set value is “1”, the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, display of the base 1 and base 2, and the set value is “2” Short-term ratio, short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 display, short-term ratio, short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative when the setting value is “3” It is possible to sequentially change to the display of the role ratio, base 1, and base 2. If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the set value is “1” and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “2”, and the short-term linkage ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative linkage ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “2”.

  Further, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “3”, and the short-term linkage ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative linkage ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “3”.

  Further, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “3”, The numerical value displayed on the 1 display unit 21TM029A is updated to “4”, and the short-term linkage ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative linkage ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “4”.

  Further, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “4”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “5”, and the short-term linkage ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative linkage ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “5”.

  Further, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “5”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “6”, and the short-term linkage ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative linkage ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “6”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 when the set value is “6”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “1”, and the short-term linkage ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative linkage ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “1”.

  In the display monitor 21TM029 of the present embodiment, the form in which the connection ratio, role ratio, and base of each set value can be displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 is displayed. In the above, it is possible to display only one numerical value or only two numerical values out of these linkage ratio, role ratio, and base.

  Also, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which a connection ratio, a hand ratio, and a base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 without calculating the run ratio, the hand ratio, and the base. .

  In this embodiment, only the short-term role ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 21TM029, and the short-term role ratio, total cumulative length ratio, total cumulative role ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term service ratio, the total cumulative service ratio and the total cumulative service ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in the same color different from the combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

  Further, in the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the total sum and the total cumulative for 10 sets is updated, and the storage of the combined ratio storage area for storing the ratio and the continuous ratio for the 10 sets and the total cumulative is updated.

  In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10, the number of the winning balls of the general winning opening in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is “27” “81” “120” “36” “225” “87”, respectively. It is assumed that “66” “117” “45” “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st memory area to the 10th memory area is “27”, “81”, “ 120 ”,“ 36 ”,“ 225 ”,“ 87 ”,“ 66 ”,“ 117 ”,“ 45 ”, and“ 21 ”. Also, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the number of prize balls stored may be temporarily deleted and a new number of prize balls may be stored. Or you may memorize | store a new number of prize balls in the form overwritten on the number of prize balls stored.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. As shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether or not the content of the program is valid, and then executes the game control main process after step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, the process waits until the effect control board 12 starts operating (step S21TM1040).

  Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (such as CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050), and then stores the RAM 102. An accessible state is set (step S21TM1060). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value of the specific register (I register) (1 byte) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 9-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 input via the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

  When the ON state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. . That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and also satisfies the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode.

  As the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode, the information output circuit 112 outputs a setting change corresponding signal and also outputs a security signal (step S21TM1130). As a result, in the external device such as a hall computer that manages the gaming information of each gaming machine, the setting machine changes the setting based on the setting change response signal and the security signal being input. It is possible to specify that the control is in the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, the display device provided in the external device can notify the game machine (for example, a machine number) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an identifiable manner.

  Further, CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command for designating that the setting control mode has been controlled, as an effect control command for effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, it waits for the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM1160) and waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1180).

  In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, each time a setting change operation is received, the displayed set value is incremented by 1, and display control is performed to return to 1 after reaching 6.

  Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in a state waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value is confirmed by overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the displayed set value. Then, the determined setting value (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

  In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (YES is determined in step S21TM1160), and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF (YES in step S21TM1180). If the determination is made), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 coincide with each other. The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

  When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 proceeds to an initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 described later.

  When the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM1120 is detected as being OFF (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 can set the setting value to be confirmed. Transition to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  As the CPU 103 shifts to the setting confirmation mode, the information output circuit 112 outputs a setting change response signal and also outputs a security signal (step S21TM1210). As a result, in the external device such as a hall computer that manages the gaming information of each gaming machine, the setting machine changes the setting based on the setting change response signal and the security signal being input. It is possible to specify that the mode or setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Therefore, the display device provided in the external device can notify the game machine (for example, a machine number) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an identifiable manner.

  In addition, CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command that specifies that the setting control mode is controlled as an effect control command for effect control board 12 (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). And it waits for OFF operation of lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1240).

  Further, when the CPU 103 detects an OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in a state waiting for the lock switch 21TM051 OFF operation (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the CPU 103 performs the process shown in FIG. The process proceeds to a determination process of whether or not the power-off detection process is executed in step S21TM1320 shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S21TM1110 described above that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 clears the input via the input port as shown in FIG. 9-13. (Setting changeover switch mounted on power supply board) The state of the output signal (clear signal) of 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

  If the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes a power-off detection process (see FIG. 9-14). Is determined based on whether check data is stored in a predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

  In this example, the process of step S21TM1320 is executed as follows: (1) When the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also OFF. When the process of step S21TM1320 is executed immediately without shifting to either the mode or the setting confirmation mode, (2) when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. There is a case where the process proceeds to the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the process of step S21TM1320 is executed after the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  When backup data is stored, the CPU 103 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM 1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power-off detection process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage such as an unexpected power outage, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on but not when the power supply is stopped is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), the CPU 103 performs a game state recovery process (the process in steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup time setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), and the contents of the backup time setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 102), and step S21TM1360 is set. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, reserved memory, restriction member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output An area where the output state of the port is stored (output port buffer), a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like. A setting value storage area (an area in which a fixed setting value is stored) is also included in a portion that should not be initialized. In addition, for each set value, an area in which total values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a linkage ratio, a winning ratio, and a base are stored is also included in a portion that should not be initialized.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In a game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the big hit determination in the special symbol process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of recovery) as a command at the time of power supply recovery (step S21TM1370). Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the recovery from the power-off has been performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9, recovery from the power interruption is performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. Can be notified. Next, CPU 103 executes setting command transmission processing in step S21TM1470.

  In step S21TM1310, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES), or when backup data is not stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), in step S21TM1330 If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), initialization processing is executed (step S21TM1410).

  In this example, the case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed is based on (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON. When the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed immediately without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 Based on the fact that it is also OFF, on the condition that it is determined NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, step S21TM1410 is immediately executed without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the initialization process is executed, (3) based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also ON, the mode shifts to the setting change mode. Based on the case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the setting change mode, and (4) when the lock switch 21TM051 is on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is off when the power is turned on. There is a case where the process proceeds to the setting confirmation mode and the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed on the condition that it is determined NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after the setting confirmation mode ends. .

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, hold memory, etc.) is cleared to the initial value. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clearing process. In addition, for each set value, an area in which each aggregate value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a linkage ratio, a role ratio, and a base is stored is not cleared. The value is not changed from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of a counter value for generating a random number for determination per normal symbol) may be left as it is. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

  In addition, by the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. for selectively performing processing according to the control state An initial value is set in the flag.

  In the present embodiment, the mode for shifting to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is exemplified on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. Furthermore, a setting change mode, provided that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the opened state), Transition to the setting confirmation mode may be possible.

  After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In a game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the big hit determination in the special symbol process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the game state and the like have been initialized in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. Is possible. Next, CPU 103 executes setting command transmission processing in step S21TM1470.

  CPU103 transmits the setting command which designates the setting value read by step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to CPU120 for effect control (step S21TM1470). Receiving the setting command, the effect control CPU 120 can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value designated by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value.

  Then, CPU 103 executes setting processing of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21). In addition, communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). For example, the CPU 103 performs processing according to a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt permitted state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit. The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when controlled in the setting change mode, the CPU 103 sends a setting change mode command (step S21TM1140) and then sends an initialization command at power-on. (Step S21TM1460), a setting command is transmitted (Step S21TM1470). Further, when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220), and then transmits a backup command when power is restored or an initialization command when power is turned on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). S21TM1460), a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can identify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and can display the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect. The end of the setting change mode can be notified by an effect device such as the lamp 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R. The end of the setting confirmation mode can be notified by an effect device such as the game effect lamp 9.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9-14. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615). On the condition that no game stop error has occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to switch The state of detection signals input from the various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 is determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, if a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

  For example, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormal state is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). The level of magnetism to be determined is detected, the level of vibration determined to be abnormal is detected by a vibration sensor (not shown), the level and frequency band determined to be abnormal by a radio wave sensor (not shown) Based on the detection of the radio wave, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. When the detection signal is input from the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is Prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays a winning information process (step S21TM1640) for calculating winning information such as a winning ratio, a running ratio, and a base, and a display monitor for winning information such as a winning ratio, a running ratio, and a base calculated in the winning information processing. A winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) displayed on the 21TM029 is performed. Thereafter, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the explanation of step S1615. If an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set and the next timer interrupt step. In S21TM1615, the game may be stopped (switch processing is not executed). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, payout information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (Step S21TM1670).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of game random numbers such as the random number MR1 and the random numbers MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process process, thereby displaying the normal symbol variation display and the movable wing in the variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Enables the tilting operation setting of the piece.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, the output port included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. Then, by turning it off, etc., it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for sending a command for notifying a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or a command for notifying that a fluctuation pattern or a fluctuation display has ended. By transmitting the existing command such as information including the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 12. Further, the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11, and executes productions that suggest the set values at various timings, such as during variable display or during big hit games. May be.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is controlled. This is because, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the range of random numbers determined to be a big hit differs according to the set value. For example, although the jackpot determination random number extracted at the start winning before the setting change is determined to be a big hit in relation to the setting value before the change, an event that is determined to be out of relation in relation to the setting value after the change On the contrary, although it is determined that the relationship with the setting value before the change is out of place, an event that is determined as a big hit may occur with the relationship with the setting value after the change. In such a case, the game after the setting change is continued based on the jackpot determining random number extracted at the time of starting winning before the setting change (the game control timer interrupt process including the special symbol process process is executed). It is inappropriate to clear the reserved memory (special symbol reserved memory, normal symbol reserved memory) by initializing the gaming state, and set the number of reserved memories to the initial value (0). Yes.

  In addition, during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of the interruption permission in step S21TM1540 not being performed, the switching process (step S21TM1620) in the game control timer interruption process is not performed, Passing through the gate is invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) or the like is not yet executed during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the random number is not updated. If a random number is extracted based on the start prize during the period controlled in the setting change mode, the same random number value is obtained regardless of the timing of the start prize, and the game is played based on such a random number value. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, start winnings and passing gates are invalidated.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the process related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main process) and the RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main process) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a game shop clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is stopped. The display at 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), the store clerk or the like of the game hall performs a clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When the power is turned on while operating 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the processing of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 is executed by the CPU 103, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area in the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the setting value “1”) is displayed. Step S21TM1150).

  In the state in which the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A as described above, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (C), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by a game shop clerk or the like. Each time an operation is detected, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, each time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is changed from 1 → 2 → 3 → Update display is performed as 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 →. Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value “1”) itself is not changed depending on the operation. When a lock switch 21TM051 to be described later is turned off, the set value (in this example, the set value “1”) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. (In this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is changed (overwritten).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (D), the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the store clerk or the like of the game hall (YES in step S21TM1180), and stores it in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The stored setting value (in this example, the setting value “1”) is a numerical value (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. ) Is set (overwritten), and the setting value (in this example, the setting value “2”) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is confirmed (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 flashes and displays the first display unit 21TM029A, so that a new set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 to the store clerk of the game hall and the control of the setting change mode is completed. (Setting completion notification) is made (step S21TM1200).

  Once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed in the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, in the setting information temporary storage area) Neither the stored setting value “2”) nor the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value “2”) is changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is fixed, there is a possibility that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF. Therefore, in the present embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed.

  Then, the setting change mode (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) is terminated, and the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, reserved memory, etc.) indicating the game state at the time of power-off occurrence stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared to the initial value. Is set, the gaming state is initialized, but the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. After the RAM clear process is completed, the CPU 103 displays “C” on the first display unit 21TM029A, thereby notifying the store clerk or the like of the game hall that the RAM clear process has been executed (RAM clear notification). (Step S21TM1420). Thereby, the store clerk or the like of the game hall grasps that the setting change mode has ended (the set value has been determined) and the initialization process has been executed. Then, by executing the processing after step S21TM1430, a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a variable display result, a jackpot type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, or the like can be performed.

  In the setting change mode of the present embodiment, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited, and the most advantageous setting value (“6” in this embodiment) for the player, or the most disadvantageous for the player A set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

  In addition, the CPU 103 notifies the display monitor 21TM029 that the set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) corresponding to the confirmed setting value after the RAM clear notification with the end of the setting change mode. You may make it display each total value, such as ratio and a base. Further, for each set value, the total values such as the linkage ratio, the role ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending order or descending order of the set value).

  When the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off when the setting change mode is being controlled, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the process of the setting confirmation mode (steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), when the power is turned off (turned off) by an operation of a game shop clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is displayed. The display at 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an OFF state on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process). In step S21TM1120 of the main process, the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S21TM1210 and S21TM1220 and sets the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting values). “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and in the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A), the setting value (in this example, stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The set value “1”) is displayed (step S 1TM1230).

  Unlike when the setting change mode is controlled, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the first display unit may be operated even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a store clerk or the like of the game hall. The numerical value displayed in 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a game store clerk or the like while the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (this example) Then, if the setting value “1”) stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, the setting value may be misunderstood as being changeable in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting The setting value “1”) stored in the temporary information storage area is not updated and displayed.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on detection of an OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by a store clerk or the like of the game hall (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the processing after step S21TM1320, the game can be played, that is, a change display result, a jackpot type, a change pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, or the like can be executed. That is, when the process of the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the process related to the RAM clear unless the determination is NO in Step S21TM1320 or Step S21TM1330.

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed in the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, setting information Neither the setting value “1” stored in the temporary storage area nor the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value “1”) is changed.

  As described above, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. When the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is established, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch ) When the condition for controlling to the setting confirmation mode that 21TM052 is in the OFF state is established, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  In order to change or display the setting value (in order to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the game shop clerk or the like turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on. In order to shift to, an operation for further executing the initialization process (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization process is performed. Do not perform the operation. In this manner, the game shop clerk can select whether the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (or neither of them is controlled), and the initialization process is performed. Whether to execute or not can also be selected.

  In the present embodiment, no initialization process is required to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clearing is not executed unless NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, even if the game shop clerk wants to check the set value while the player is playing a game, even if the power is turned off and the mode is switched to the setting check mode when the power is turned on thereafter, the gaming state remains It is not initialized and will not be a disadvantage to the player. On the amusement hall side, it is possible to confirm the set value without any trouble by the setting confirmation mode.

  Further, the CPU 103, on completion of the setting confirmation mode, displays a connection ratio, a role ratio, a base, and the like corresponding to the displayed setting values (setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) on the display monitor 21TM029. The total values may be displayed. Further, for each set value, the total values such as the linkage ratio, the role ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending order or descending order of the set value).

  FIG. 9-17 shows the setting change mode by the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which notification of transition to the setting confirmation mode is performed. FIG. 9-17 (1) shows an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled in the setting change mode, and FIG. 9-17 (2) shows an image displayed when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are respectively shown.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (1), when the power is turned on (particularly before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the start of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (1) (B), for the effect control based on the fact that the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1140 in the main process. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode and can notify the fact. For example, the character “change setting” is displayed on the image display device 5, and a voice (for example, a voice “setting is being changed”) is output from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R to notify the transition to the setting change mode. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white flashing mode), thereby notifying that the setting change mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like, it is possible to notify that the mode is changed to the setting change mode. It becomes possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in FIG. 9-17 (1) (B), other display information on the image display device 5 (for example, effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) is not displayed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, it is not in a state in which a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). When the image display device 5 cannot be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the sound notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound for notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (for example, a sound “setting is being changed”) and the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode) By making it emit light, it is notified that it has shifted to the setting change mode. Thereafter, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the characters “setting change” are displayed on the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or in step S21TM1460, the CPU103. (Based on the reception of the power-on initialization command transmitted to the effect control board 12), the effect control CPU 120 specifies that the game control microcomputer 100 has ended the setting change mode, This can be notified. For example, in the image display device 5, a “setting change complete” character is displayed, and a voice (for example, a voice “setting is being changed”) for notifying the transition to the setting change mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The output is stopped, and the game effect lamp 9 stops the light emission in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), thereby notifying that the setting change mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended. It is possible to clearly understand that the process has ended.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and has entered a game-ready state (game control timer interrupt processing is completed). The effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen is transmitted in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (2), when the power is turned on (particularly before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the start of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1220 in the main process, The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and can notify the fact. For example, the characters “confirming setting” are displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound (for example, a sound “confirming setting”) is output from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R to notify the transition to the setting confirmation mode. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white flashing mode), thereby notifying that the mode has been switched to the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the mode has been switched to the setting confirmation mode. It becomes possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), other display information (for example, effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) in the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, it is not in a state in which a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). When the image display device 5 cannot be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the sound notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound for notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode (for example, a sound “setting is being changed”), and the game effect lamp 9 is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode). By making it emit light, it notifies that it changed to setting check mode. Thereafter, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the characters “confirming setting” are displayed on the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). In step S21TM1460, the effect control CPU 120 is set by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the reception of the power-off recovery backup command or power-on initialization command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12. It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has ended and to notify the fact. For example, in the image display device 5, a “setting confirmation end” character is displayed, and a voice (for example, “setting confirmation is in progress”) for notifying the transition to the setting confirmation mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The output is stopped, and the game effect lamp 9 stops the light emission in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), thereby notifying that the setting confirmation mode has ended. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting confirmation mode is It is possible to clearly understand that the process has ended.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and has entered a game-ready state (game control timer interrupt processing is completed). The effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen is transmitted in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  Receiving the setting command, the effect control CPU 120 can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value designated by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value. FIGS. 9-18 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. 9-18 (1) shows an example in which the “sunny” mode ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 9-18 (2) shows that the “cloudy” mode ending screen is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-18 (3) shows an example in which an “ending” image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 9-18 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of setting suggestion effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

  In step S21TM1470 of the main process, CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a setting value to CPU 120 for effect control. In addition, when the big hit gaming state is ended, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect in the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the ending effect mode based on the stored setting value by storing the setting value designated by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the big hit gaming state is ended, the image display device 5 is stored together with a character for notifying that the big hit gaming state has ended (a character “BONUS end”). It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (a clear mode, a cloudy mode, a rain mode) determined based on the set value.

  In the table shown in FIG. 9-18 (4), the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3,4”, and “5, 6”. , When determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect to the “clear” mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (1), to determine the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (2), and FIG. When the “rain” mode shown in 18 (3) is determined, the determination value is assigned.

  When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, the effect control CPU 120 sets the “sunny” mode setting indication shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute an effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” aspect shown in (2) at a moderate rate (for example, 40%), and medium It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a ratio (for example, 40%). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 has the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” aspect shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and medium It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a ratio (for example, 30%). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, the effect control CPU 120 has a “sunny” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), and medium It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a ratio (for example, 30%).

  In this way, by changing the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed. The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player will be interested in how the ending effect that is executed when the jackpot gaming state ends, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in a “sunny” manner. Expect to be.

  Next, the prize ball process (step S21TM1630) in the main process will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

  FIGS. 9-19 is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output with respect to the payout control board 21TM037 from the microcomputer 100 for game control. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls relating to the payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 9-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 rises (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control process), and is connected to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (notification signal for connection of the main board 11) for notifying that the signal has started up. The connection confirmation signal indicates that the winning ball can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output via the I / O port 21TM057 and the output circuit 21TM067 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the payout control is performed via the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each connection confirmation signal is 1-bit data, and is transmitted through one signal line. Note that the connection confirmation signal is ready to be output by setting an initial value to the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Is output by the process of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440).

  As with the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21TM380. Various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIGS. 9-20 is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls relating to payout control and the like.

  As described above, the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and are output as control commands indicating predetermined contents depending on the contents of the set 8-bit data. Is done.

  The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) to confirm whether or not the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. Control command to be sent. The data content of the connection confirmation command is “A0 (H)”, that is, “1010000”.

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command. This is a control command that is transmitted as a response signal in response to reception of. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when a prize ball error (abnormal state in which a prize ball payout operation based on winning a prize or a ball rental payout operation based on a ball rental request cannot be normally performed) occurs, “x” in the first bit Is set to “1”. If a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. When a ball break error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, during the confirmation of connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detected. 100 can be notified.

  The award ball number command is a control command for notifying the number (0 to 14) of game balls for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a win. . The content of the prize ball number command data is “5x (H)”, that is, “0101xxx”. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is received by a prize port switch corresponding to the general winning port 10. When detected, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Accordingly, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, a prize ball number command “01010011” for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the general prize opening 10. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, a prize ball number command “01011010” for notifying 10 prize balls is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls A prize ball number command “01011110” for notifying 14 is transmitted. Note that either the connection confirmation command or the prize ball number command is transmitted as a prize ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted instead of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted based on the fact that the prize ball payout condition (occurrence of winning etc.) is established. In this embodiment, as described above, data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits. However, data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the lower 4 bits in common with the upper 4 bits. You may do it.

  The award ball end command is a control command indicating that the award ball operation (award ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits based on the end of the award ball operation. The data content of the winning ball end command is “50 (H)”, that is, “01010000”. The winning ball end command is transmitted instead of the connecting OK command at the timing when the connecting OK command is transmitted based on the end of the winning ball operation. In this embodiment, data indicating error information is not set in the winning ball end command. This is because the award ball end command is transmitted only once when the award ball motion is completed, so even if error information is not transmitted at that timing, data indicating error information is set and transmitted in the next connection OK command. This is because it is possible to do so. Note that data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball end command.

  The winning ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the winning ball operation has not ended, and a predetermined error has occurred while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executing the winning ball operation. This is a control command to be transmitted based on what has been done. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when a prize ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the first bit. If a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. When a ball break error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that a predetermined error has occurred during execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not ended. In addition, it is possible to notify the game control microcomputer 100 of the content of the error. As in the case of the connection OK command, the award ball preparation command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits depending on the error state (different predetermined bits). The connection OK command, the winning ball preparation command, and the winning ball end command are configured such that any command is transmitted as a received ACK signal. The prize ball preparing command is a command (signal) that is output not only in a state where an error occurs and the prize ball operation cannot be performed but also in a state where the prize ball operation is being executed.

  The prize ball preparation command is sent instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is sent based on the situation where an error has occurred and the prize ball operation cannot be performed. is there.

  FIG. 9-21 is a block diagram illustrating signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of the control signal shown in FIG. 9-19 and the control command shown in FIG. 9-20. As shown in FIGS. 9-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067 and input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. Of the control commands, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The Of the control commands, the connection OK command, the winning ball end command, and the winning ball preparing command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit built in the game control microcomputer 100. It is input to 21TM505. 9-21 illustrate two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a reception ACK signal) as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal are actually transmitted and received through one signal line.

  Next, transmission / reception of signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The prize ball request signal includes a connection confirmation command and a prize ball number command, and the reception ACK signal includes a connection OK command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparation command.

  FIG. 9-22 is a sequence diagram showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-22, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether the signal line connection with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is disconnected through the serial communication circuit 21TM505. Then, a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, it transmits a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets the interruption prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). The payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the internal device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM in an accessible state (step S21TM1860). Further, 0000 (H) is set as an initial value of the award ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Therefore, in the built-in device register setting process in step S21TM1840 and the process in step S21TM1850, register setting for setting the channel to be used to timer mode, register setting for permitting interrupt generation, and setting an interrupt vector. The register is set. The interrupt by the channel is used as a timer interrupt. For example, when it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register).

  The interrupt vector set for the channel set to the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. The timer interruption process includes a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including a process for driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to at least a command signal related to paying out a prize ball from the main board, and driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request. Processing may be included).

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, an interrupt process based on counting up the built-in CTC can be used. Also, an interrupt processing start address can be set according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The interrupt based on CTC channel 3 (CH3) count-up is an interrupt that occurs when the CPU internal clock (system clock) counts down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1880). In addition, initial values are set in the flags and counters of the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the award ball unpaid number counter initial value in the award ball unpaid number counter.

  Also, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initial setting of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to serially communicate with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Make settings for

  When serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request from serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21 TM 371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt process according to the same process as the priority order initial setting process performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, the CTC register provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated (step S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt generation interval is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since the interruption is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initial setting process, the interruption is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). Thereafter, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of a timer interrupt is entered.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following process as the payout control process. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of the input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of the input port 1 and reflecting the detection result to a predetermined 1 byte (referred to as an input state flag) of the RAM. is there. In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not directly checked, but the input state is checked. Check the status of the flag.

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the patterns of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  The payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process for performing a control for paying out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and for performing a control for paying out the number of award balls indicated by a prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

  Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). Also, an information output process for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and a display control process for lighting the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball-out LED 21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

  In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, a full tank error, a ball shortage error, and a prepaid card unit unconnected error) are detected in error processing described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, based on the error bit being set, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374. Also, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for lighting the prize ball LED 21TM053 when the prize ball is being paid out in the display control process. When the prize ball payout is completed, control for turning off the prize ball LED 21TM053 is performed.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the payout control CPU 21TM371 outputs The contents of the port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer are a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020), a prepaid card control process (step S21TM2030), a main control communication process (step S21TM2035), and an information output process (step S21TM2060). And it is updated by the display control process (step S21TM2070).

  Next, an operation in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits and receives various commands in the main control communication process of step S21TM2035 will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21TM380 that serially communicates various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command shown in FIG. 9-20 from the game control microcomputer 100 using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. When the prize ball number command is received, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the prize ball ACK command “D2” as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

  Similarly to the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control CPU 21TM371 receives an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while the interrupt is enabled, and the interrupt that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has issued an interrupt request for. Performs interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interrupt process when it is determined that the interrupt cause is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving reception data. The payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt process. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether or not the read received data is a prize ball number command in the interruption process during reception. When the received data is a prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball non-payout number counter. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the fact that the reception interruption flag is set in the main control communication process described later, and the number of prize balls is awarded as a prize ball. There is no need to execute the process of adding to the unpaid-out number counter.

  FIG. 9-25 shows a ball rental executed between the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370), the payout motor 21TM289, and the card unit 21TM050. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the communication processing of. Here, as will be described later, as a method for restricting the ball rental by the payout motor 21TM289, there are the following first ball rental restriction method to fourth ball rental restriction method.

  First, (1) in the first ball lending restriction method, during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control micro-computer) from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). Further, (2) in the second ball lending restriction method, the PRDY for the card unit 21TM050 from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is controlled during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping signal output. Further, (3) the third ball lending restriction method is such that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 provided with the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. In this period, the output of the signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 to the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is stopped. Further, (4) in the fourth ball lending restriction method, the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 is controlled during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping signal output.

  Transition to the setting change mode and transition to the setting confirmation mode are accompanied by power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, there is a possibility that an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the loan request cannot be paid out. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiment, the ball rental in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is limited. Hereinafter, the first ball rental restriction method to the fourth ball rental restriction method will be specifically described.

  FIG. 9-26 is a timing diagram for explaining communication among the main board 11, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. Based on the fact that power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the payout control board 21TM037 sets the PRDY signal to the ON state when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on in the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13 (see FIG. 9-19). When power supply is started, card unit 21TM050 turns on the VL signal as a connection signal.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  The payout control board 21TM037 sets the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are ON, and the card unit 21TM050 When the trailing edge (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 falls the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of restricting the ball rental in the period controlled in the setting change mode, there are the first to fourth ball rental restriction methods described above. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 9-27.

  FIG. 9-27 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370 for control and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, so the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, even if the card is received by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the processing is being executed, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the ball lending (game media payout) is not executed.

  In this way, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not turn on the connection confirmation signal so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the game medium payout control. You can prevent it from running. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to be in the ON state, and executes subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, the structure which can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed) is adopted. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops outputting the connection confirmation signal (switched from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by setting the PRDY signal to the OFF state or not setting the EXS signal to the ON state. Do not be.

(Second ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 9-28. In the example shown in FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Shall. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370 for control and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in an ON state (that is, a state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in an ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the connection confirmation command is not received), the PRDY signal is turned on. Not in the state, but in the OFF state.

  As a result, even if the card is received by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. However, while the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, even if the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated, the ball rental (payout of game media) is not executed.

  In this way, during the period when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21 TM 370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command. Thus, the PRDY signal is not turned ON. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game media payout control from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is resumed. Based on resuming the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to be in the ON state, and executes subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, the structure which can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed) is adopted. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. In addition, a PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether or not a connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in an ON state or an OFF state). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state based on the fact that it has not received a connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. To the OFF state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since it is impossible to operate as much as possible, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened during the period when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. That is, during the period when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Become. Thus, the period in which the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  FIG. 9-29 shows the main board when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 9-29, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Thus, the PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in an ON state (that is, a state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in an ON state (ie, a game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state) The PRDY signal is not turned on but is turned off.

  As a result, even if the card is received by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ Since both the signal and the EXS signal are OFF and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated even when the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Lending (game media payout) is not executed.

  Thus, during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used for the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). By detecting the open state, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game media payout control from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  Then, when a store clerk or the like of the game hall performs an operation of turning the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state, the CPU 103 ends the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, a game shop clerk or the like closes the gaming machine frame 3 so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state, whereby the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when a payout operation is possible.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to be in the ON state, and executes subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, the structure which can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed) is adopted. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. In addition, a PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether or not a connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in an ON state or an OFF state). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. That is, during the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is connected to the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned ON based on detecting the open state of the glass door frame 3a). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is shown. The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). Thereby, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by setting the PRDY signal to the OFF state or not setting the EXS signal to the ON state. Do not be.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 9-30. In the example shown in FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Shall. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-30 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370 for control and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal on based on the connection confirmation signal being on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in an ON state (that is, a state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in an ON state (ie, a game control microcomputer). When the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  When the card is received by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 executes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Here, in the payout control board 21TM037, the PRDY signal is in the ON state, and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, but no connection confirmation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 is not turned ON. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in an ON state (that is, a state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in an ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). 100, the PRDY signal is in an ON state (ie, a state in which a payout operation is possible by the payout control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in an ON state (ie, a ball rental switch 21TM062). And the ball lending switch signal is input), and the CPU 103 is set even if the BRQ signal is ON (that is, a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned ON). While processing in change mode or setting confirmation mode is being executed (while connection confirmation command is not received) It is without EXS signal ON state to the OFF state. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state and the dispensing motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, even if the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated, the ball rental (payout of game media) is not executed.

  In this way, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game media payout control from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned ON, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred).

  Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRQ signal when the BRQ signal is turned on and when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal is turned off (when a timer set to a predetermined value times out). To do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the BRQ signal being turned off. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is resumed. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 then restarts the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state. The EXS signal for the unit 21TM050 is turned ON, and the subsequent ball lending payout control is executed.

  In addition, the structure which can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed) is adopted. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. In addition, a PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether or not a connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in an ON state or an OFF state). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Also, in FIG. 9-30, when a predetermined time elapses after the BRQ signal is turned on and the EXS signal is turned off (when a timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050. Shows an example in which the BRQ signal is returned to the OFF state and the BRDY signal is also returned to the OFF state. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the EXS signal remains in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned ON. Even after a predetermined time elapses, the BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state, and the BRDY signal may be maintained in the ON state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 restarts receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended), the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal. The EXS signal may be turned ON based on the fact that both are ON. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the ball lending switch 21TM062 is not operated again, and the BRQ signal is turned off and the ball lending is automatically executed (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, a ball lending process corresponding to a ball lending operation accepted within the period of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be executed). (2) Ball lending When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and ball lending may be executed.

(Method not to execute ball rental limit during setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-31. In the example shown in FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is also in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Shall. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370 for control and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the connection confirmation signal being in the ON state and receiving the connection confirmation command. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in an ON state (that is, a state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in an ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer 100 When the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is in the state of being electrically connected) and receiving the connection confirmation command. Is turned on.

  When the card is received by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 executes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and the connection confirmation command is received, the payout control board 21TM037 receives the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. Is turned on, and when the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

  In this way, even during a period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the gaming control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, thereby continuously receiving the connection confirmation command. The PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on on the control microcomputer 21TM370 side. In this way, the game medium payout control by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be executed even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting check mode is controlled. The control burden for preventing the payout control from being executed during the controlled period can be reduced. In addition, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be inspected and the workability can be improved. it can.

  The CPU 103 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been completed. Based on the continued reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  Note that when the payout of the predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting check mode is controlled, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. . That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. In this way, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly. Further, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, when the payout of a predetermined number of game media is finished and the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. Thus, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the EXS signal changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state.

(How to resume lending after completing the setting change mode)
Next, with respect to the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the ball lending is being executed and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, FIG. This will be described in detail. In the example shown in FIG. 9-32, the game medium payout is interrupted based on the occurrence of power interruption during the execution of the game medium payout, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. The payout which has been interrupted after the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is resumed.

  FIG. 9-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of game media. FIG. 12 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out game media, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal, EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  In the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, when the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. The That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is OFF, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of payouts is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, a payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, so the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is OFF. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state where the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  Then, based on the fact that the power supply is resumed and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled when the power is turned on is completed (the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the PRDY signal is turned on). The microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the contents of the unpaid-out number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Perform a payout operation. Thereby, the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by the power-off and the transition to the subsequent setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed. In this way, when a power interruption occurs during execution of a ball rental and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored thereafter, the setting After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the suspended game media and complete the ball rental.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, the payout process is interrupted due to the power interruption during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. Although the example in which the interrupted payout process is resumed after the end of the game is shown, this power cut is caused by the fact that the store clerk at the amusement hall has turned off the power switch 21TM055 in order to change or confirm the set value. It may be a power interruption that has occurred, or it may be a power interruption that has occurred due to the power switch 21TM055 being turned off as the game hall is closed. Further, not only when the power is cut off, but during the payout process, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, or the glass door frame 3a is opened. In response to the state being detected, the payout process being executed is interrupted, and then controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It may be resumed.

(Forced termination of ball rental due to power interruption)
Next, with reference to FIG. 9-33, the processing when the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power interruption occurs while the ball lending is being executed and the payout is not resumed after the power supply is restored will be described with reference to FIG. explain. In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when a power interruption occurs during the execution of a game medium payout, the payout being executed is stopped, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The payout is not resumed, and the payout is not resumed even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  FIG. 9-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of game media. FIG. 12 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out game media, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal, EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  In the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, when the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. The That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are both turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off, and forcibly ends (stops) the payout of the game medium. At this time, the unpaid number data is not stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid number storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power supply is restored, payout of game media equivalent to the number of payouts is not executed.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is OFF. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state where the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. In addition, since the data of the number of unpaid is not backed up, the predetermined amount to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power interruption occurred (before being controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode when the power is restored) Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts specified from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), payout is made for the number of payouts that have not been paid out due to withdrawal (forced termination). Not done. In this way, when a power interruption occurs during the execution of a ball rental, the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped), and thereafter, when power is restored, the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode or the setting By not performing the payout for the number of unpaid after the confirmation mode is finished, the control for backing up the data of the unpaid number and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when a power interruption occurs during payout, the payout in progress is forcibly terminated (stopped) halfway by not backing up the data of the number of unpaid out. Not only in such a form, but as in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, when the power interruption occurs, the data of the unpaid number is backed up, and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are restored after the power is restored. On the condition that it is not controlled at all, payout of game media equivalent to the number of unpaid out is executed based on the data of the number of unpaid out being backed up (payout is resumed based on the backup data) When controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, payout of game media equivalent to the number of unpaid out is not executed (payout based on the backup data is not resumed) and the setting change is not performed. After mode or setting confirmation mode end also not perform the payout of unpaid coin number corresponding to the game medium may be so.

  In addition, the structure which can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed) is adopted. Even in this case, the method for forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. In addition, a PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether or not a connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in an ON state or an OFF state). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method for forcibly terminating ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Prize ball payout control)
9-34 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  If there is a win when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal and transmitting the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, and the prize ball is paid out (prize ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal, it transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception.

  Although not shown, there is a prize during the execution of the connection confirmation communication process (between the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal and the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and sends a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, it is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, and the prize ball is paid out (prize ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. It should be noted that a prize ball preparation command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 during execution of prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation).

(Prize is invalid during setting change mode or setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 9-35 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process.

  As described above, until the CPU 103 executes the interrupt permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 9-13, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first general winning port switch to the fourth port. The switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIG. 9-14) for confirming the state (detection signal presence / absence) of each switch of the general prize opening switch and the count switch 23 is not executed, and a special symbol process including a jackpot determination process and the like The processing (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 9-14) and the like are not executed. For this reason, during the period in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the detection signal output from each switch is not detected, and the big hit determination process is not executed. In other words, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the winning is invalidated even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Furthermore, since the switch process is not executed, the detection of the game ball by the discharge port switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the counting of the base is not executed. In other words, until the interruption permission is executed, it is not necessary to aggregate each item such as the linkage ratio, the role ratio, and the base. Therefore, during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, these items are Thus, the processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced.

  During the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the winning based on the fact that the game medium has passed through each winning opening. And That is, the winning ball number command is not transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the big hit determination process or the like is not executed. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that no prize ball number command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100. That is, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening, prize ball payout control is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, and the count switch 23 are set. Switch processing to check the status of each switch (presence / absence of detection signal) can be executed, it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed through each winning hole, and it is possible to send a prize ball number command (and connection confirmation command). Become. Further, special symbol process processing including jackpot determination processing can be executed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has received the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal receives the reception ACK. A connection OK command as a signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. At this time, when the game medium passes through any of the winning openings (when a winning occurs), the CPU 103 detects a winning by executing a switch process, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 outputs a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the award ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and receives the award ball number command as the award ball request signal. Pay out game media. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  Temporarily, the jackpot determination random number is extracted by executing the switch processing within the setting change mode period in which the setting value may be changed, and the jackpot determination is executed based on the jackpot determination random number. And if the setting value before the change is a big hit, but the setting value after the change (set value after confirmation) will not be a big hit, the big hit determination will be executed, or conversely before the change However, there may be a case where the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number which becomes a big hit with the set value after change (the set value after confirmation). That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the jackpot determination and the set value becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the player or the game arcade may be disadvantaged.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is controlled, it is determined that the big hit determination is not performed by not performing the payout of the winning ball based on the fact that the game ball has passed through each winning opening and not performing the big hit determining process. The relationship between the execution timing and the set value is prevented from becoming complicated, and the disadvantage of the player or the playground is prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed but also in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value is displayed but cannot be changed, winning is similarly invalidated so that the jackpot determination process is not executed. I have to. For example, unlike the setting change mode, the setting check mode can be controlled when the game control timer interrupt process is being executed instead of when the power is turned on, and the switch period is also controlled during the setting check mode. If the special symbol process can be executed, control completely different from the setting change mode is required, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, control is possible only when the power is turned on, as in the setting change mode. By not performing the process, the process is shared, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the timer interrupt is set after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). . Therefore, because the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Winning in is disabled. On the other hand, if the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, etc., is a game stop error occurring during the period during which the game control timer interrupt process is executed, that is, during the game? If it is determined (step S21TM1615) and it is determined that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol process processing (step S21TM1620) in the same interrupt processing (step S21TM1615) The winning is invalidated by not executing (S21TM1690). As described above, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) differs between the case where the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and the case where the game stop error occurs.

  In addition, in the period when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, by stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100 receives a connection OK command as a prize ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the fact that the connection OK command is not received during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium by not transmitting the prize ball number command. Thus, based on the fact that the gaming control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command as the award ball request signal, the gaming control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control, The winning can be invalidated.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which can be controlled to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode by operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 during a game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). . Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIG. 9-35 can be applied, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The switch process and the special symbol process process should not be executed.

  Also, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute a switch process when being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration in which it is possible to detect that a game medium has passed through each winning opening) It is also good. When such a configuration is adopted, as described above, when the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, by stopping the transmission of the award ball number command and the connection confirmation command, the payout control The microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control, invalidates the winning, and does not execute the special symbol process. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, transmission of the winning ball number command and the connection confirmation command is resumed in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Payment restriction method during detection of opening of gaming machine frame / door frame)
FIG. 9-36 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during detection of the gaming machine frame / door frame opening. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, during normal operation, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. A connection OK command as a signal is received. At this time, when a game shop clerk or the like opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is connected to the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected.

  Prize balls to be paid out when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and the glass door frame 3a is opened if the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated) Since the path through which the prize ball flows down is not physically connected to the upper plate in which the prize ball that has flowed down is stored, if the prize ball is paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without it. Here, with the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being opened, the first start winning port, the second starting winning port, the first general winning port to the fourth general winning port, and the big winning port The game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 when the passage of the game medium is detected at any one of the winning openings. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends a prize ball preparing command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to. This award ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a The transmission continues to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state.

  In this way, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the game medium passes through each prize opening and detects a winning, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the payout motor 21TM289. The prize ball payout control is not executed without driving. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the dispensing motor 21TM289. Drives and executes payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winnings within the period when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. . Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  If the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected during the award ball payout, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the payout of the award ball and Of the number designated by the number command, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the dispensing motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute payout control of game media corresponding to the number of unpaid out. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a winning ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  In addition, the structure which can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed) is adopted. Even in this case, the payout limiting method during the detection of the gaming machine frame / door frame opening shown in FIG. 9-36 can be applied. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. It is considered impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. Usually, the machine frame 3 is opened. During the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, by restricting the drive of the payout motor 21TM289, the payout of the prize ball is not executed. As a result, the payout of prize balls during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode is limited.

  Next, control when a power failure occurs during the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2).

  FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to power-off in separate charts based on the difference in the situation when power-off occurs. 9-37 (1) shows the control when the power is turned off in the situation where “setting value confirmation” is not performed during “setting value change”, and the power-off recovery pattern shown in FIG. The setting value at the time is the setting value at the previous power-on. 9-37 (2) shows the control in the case where the power interruption occurs in the situation where “setting value confirmation” is performed during “setting value change”. The setting value at the time of disconnection recovery is the setting value at the time of power failure occurrence.

  That is, FIG. 9-37 (1) shows the setting when a power failure occurs in a state where there is no “setting value confirmation” operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (the lock switch 21TM051 remains on). FIG. 9-37 (2) shows the control related to the setting value when the power is turned off after the “setting value confirmation” operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state. Show.

  FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the setting change work from the top to the bottom along the order of occurrence (see the “Order” and “Situation” columns). ). 9-37 (1) and (2), the “lock switch” column shows the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (orders 1 to 8). In the “set value” column, set value data (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. In the “set value display” column in the figure, display contents (set values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. Yes.

  When the setting change work is performed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (order 1) as shown in the uppermost column of the “Status” column in FIG. As shown in the “lock switch” column, the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is in the ON state. Further, in FIG. 9-37 (1), the “setting value” at the time of “power on” in order 1 is “1” because the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is “1”. , “1”.

  Also, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the “set value display” column is blank (blank) at this stage because the power has just been turned on. This indicates that the setting value display has not been started since the process of reading and displaying the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM1150) is not performed.

  After the “power-on” situation, the “setting change mode start” situation (order 2) is entered. In this “setting change mode start”, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the “lock switch” column is “ON”, and the “setting value” column is the RAM 102. Is set to “1” based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not changed, and the “setting value display” field is the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as described above. Is set to “1” based on the fact that the setting value read from the memory and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A).

  Subsequently, when the “setting value changing” status (order 3) is entered, the “lock switch” column remains “ON” and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the setting value stored in the area from “1” to “2”, the “setting value display” field (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) The selected new value is changed to “2”.

  Further, when the “setting value changing” status (order 4) is entered, the “lock switch” field remains “ON”, and if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information temporary storage area The setting value stored in is changed from “2” to “3”, so that the “setting value display” column (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. The new value is changed to “3”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the power interruption occurs during “setting value change” (order 5), the operation for confirming the setting value is not performed, and the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the process of overwriting the set value stored in (the process of step S21TM1190 for finalizing the set value) is not executed, the “set value” column remains “1”. That is, when the power interruption occurs, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of “1” when the power is turned on. Here, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state and power is turned on (order 6), In the “setting change mode start” situation (order 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Since it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the “set value” column remains “1” and the “set value display” column also becomes “1”. The same applies to the case where the setting check mode is controlled instead of the setting change mode in order 7.

  In this way, when the power is turned on, the mode changes to the setting change mode, and the setting change operation is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state). Since the setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after power recovery is This is the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on the last time (before the occurrence of power interruption). In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine a set value when a power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode.

  Next, control when a power failure occurs after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 9-37 (2). The description of the processing parts common to the case where the power interruption occurs before the set value is determined will be omitted. In the case where the power interruption occurs after the setting value is confirmed, “setting value confirmation” shown in order 5 is performed after “setting value changing” shown in order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for confirming the setting value is performed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area ( The display monitor 21TM029 (the set value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state “3”. In the setting change mode, the “lock switch” column is set to “OFF” based on turning the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state.

  That is, in the setting change mode, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value “1” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored in the setting information temporary storage area. It is overwritten with “3” which is the stored setting value (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)), thereby confirming the setting value (step S21TM1190). As a result, “3” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

  Then, when the power interruption occurs in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for determining the setting value) is executed. The “set value” column is “3”. That is, when the power interruption occurs, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to “3”, which is different from that when the power is turned on. Here, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (order 7), the subsequent “setting change mode start” state ( In order 8), the setting value (“3” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). ), The “setting value” field is “3”, and the “setting value display” field is also “3”. Note that the same applies to the case where the setting check mode is controlled instead of the setting change mode in order 8.

  Note that, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off while being controlled to the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted. Therefore, a game clerk or the like temporarily changes the gaming machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and further performs a setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by subsequently turning off the power switch 21TM055, it is possible to cancel the setting value change and return to the state before the transition to the setting change mode.

  Transition to the setting change mode and transition to the setting confirmation mode are accompanied by power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. However, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the power is not turned on. When a disconnection occurs, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed from when the power is turned on, so that the setting value can be appropriately determined and the control related to the setting value is unstable. Can be avoided, and appropriate control regarding the set value can be executed.

  FIG. 9-38 shows an effect device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the game (in a state where the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). An example is shown in which a notification that an operation for changing a set value has been performed by the (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) is performed.

  FIG. 9-38 (1) shows a state in which decorative symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 5 during the game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a game control timer interrupt process. When the main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during execution of variable display of special symbols) (game control) Timer interrupt processing step S21TM1660), a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) (game control timer interrupt process step S21TM1710). ), When it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (step S21TM1660 of the timer interrupt processing for game control), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated Command the production control board 12 And it transmits to the effect control CPU 120) (step a game control timer interruption process S21TM1710). That is, a lock switch operation command and / or a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted in order to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and receives the setting change mode and Although it is not controlled in any of the setting confirmation modes, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “The operation of the lock switch has been detected.” Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “Setting changeover switch operation detected” is executed.

  In this example, the production control CPU 120 receives “both lock switch operation commands and setting changeover switch operation commands”, and as an abnormal operation warning notification, “the operation of the lock switch and setting changeover switch has been detected.” Are displayed on the image display device 5. Since the display priority of the abnormal operation warning notification is higher than that of the background image and the decorative design (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative design), as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), Even during the variable display of symbols, the game shop clerk, etc., confirmed that an operation to change the setting value was performed even though it was not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to grasp clearly and confirm whether fraud has been carried out. Note that a sound notifying that an operation for changing the set value has been detected is output from the speakers 8L, 8R (for example, a sound saying “the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected”), and the game effect lamp 9 May be informed in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a red flashing mode) to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been detected.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration can be controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt process is executed). The operation (the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within a period in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Therefore, the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is performed during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is executed, or the period in which the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. If this happens, there is a possibility that the setting value is about to be changed illegally.

  In the present embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at a timing other than the time when the power is turned on or during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Informs that the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value have been performed on the image display device 5 which is the largest display device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. I try to suppress it.

  Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally opened, so that the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and the fact is notified. Further, as described above, the ball lending is interrupted or stopped, and the prize ball payout is also interrupted or stopped. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position opposite to the predetermined position is opened on the gaming island. Thus, it is possible to see the back side surface of the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch ( Setting switch 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position and In some cases, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is used regardless of whether or not the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. In the event that an operation has been performed, it is informed that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value have been performed, thereby strengthening fraud suppression.

(Setting change signal)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 9-39, the information output circuit 112 in this embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and signals corresponding to the respective information output terminals are output. Is done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse-like signal output every time ten prize balls are paid out, and the pulse width is 0.1 second. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is output from the second terminal. The gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned ON when the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. Even when it is in the ON state.

  From the third terminal, a total symbol determination number signal is output. The total symbol determination frequency signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when determined), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result is derived. It is a pulse-like signal that is output when displayed (when confirmed), and has a pulse width of 0.5 seconds. All starting port signals are output from the fourth terminal. The all start opening signal is a pulse-like signal that is output when a game ball wins at the first start winning opening, and is also output when a game ball win at the second start winning opening occurs. Yes, the pulse width is 0.1 seconds.

  One signal is output from the fifth terminal. The jackpot 1 signal is turned on when the jackpot game state is controlled. Two signals are output from the sixth terminal. The jackpot 2 signal is in an ON state when being controlled in the jackpot gaming state, and is also in an ON state when being controlled in the high base state. In other words, the period in which the big hit 1 signal is in the OFF state and the big hit 2 signal is in the ON state can be specified as the high base state.

  A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change response signal is a signal that is in an ON state during a period that is controlled in the setting change mode and that is also in an ON state during a period that is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As will be described later, the setting change response signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the setting value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal that is output every time ten out balls (game balls launched into the game area and guided to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. It is 1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. Each time the game ball wins a prize signal (corresponding to each prize opening), each winning opening (first starting prize opening, second starting prize opening, large winning prize opening, first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening) This is a pulse-like signal that is output every time a winning is detected by the switch, and is output every time ten winning balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 seconds.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is in an ON state for 30 seconds when initialization processing (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. Moreover, when an illegal act is detected, it will be in an ON state for 4 minutes. When cheating is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal winning has occurred is included, and an abnormal frequency is detected at each winning opening (for example, a game ball is played at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds in the first starting winning opening). Based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning, etc., it is determined that the prize is abnormal. In addition, a case where a switch abnormality is detected is included, and a period in which a switch corresponding to each winning opening is in a winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is repeated ten times or more consecutively). Based on the fact that the 1 start-up switch is in the ON state, etc., it is determined that the switch is abnormally detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the occurrence of a game stop target error, and when the abnormal magnet is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is released, it will be ON for 4 minutes.

  Furthermore, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the security signal is turned on during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. .

  In this way, a security signal can be output from the 10th terminal, and a setting change response signal can be output from the 7th terminal. It is possible to notify the outside that the control has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a process related to the setting change has been executed). In addition, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is once turned OFF, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the current set value is output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), when the mode is changed to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal. Outputs a security signal. After the RAM clear is executed, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off when the setting change mode ends.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change response signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. 9-40 (1) Similarly to the above, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change response signal is turned off along with the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  If the RAM is cleared without switching to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Does not turn ON.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period when it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal without assuming the input of the setting change correspondence signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change response signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting check mode is completed. However, the security signal is set to the parity in the setting change mode (or the setting check mode based on the RAM clear being executed). Even if the check result is not normal, the state remains ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time of power-on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, if the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, when the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, it can be recognized that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled, and the security signal input period has reached 30 seconds. If not, it can be recognized that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. In other words, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear may have been executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If the security signal can be recognized by the apparatus and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize that the setting confirmation mode may be temporarily controlled. When the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize that the setting change mode may be controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the outside based on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal without assuming the input of the setting change correspondence signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear is executed and the possibility that the RAM is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 9-40 (3), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. In this configuration, a security signal is output during a period controlled in the setting change mode, while a security signal is not output during a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and a period controlled in the setting change mode. Includes a configuration in which the security signal is not output and the security signal is not output even during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. When the setting change response signal is turned off as the setting check mode ends, the security signal is kept off based on the fact that RAM clear is not executed. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting check mode is controlled, as shown in FIG. In the case (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is in the ON state for 30 seconds after the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change response signal).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (4), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled. That is, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but a security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is executed with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, when the RAM is cleared without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is in the ON state for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change response signal is not in the ON state.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on while the security signal is turned off. When the RAM clear is executed, The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change response signal is turned off). When one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. It becomes a relationship. With this relationship, signal output control is simplified (both signals are not turned on at the same time, so output control is simplified), and the control period for setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. It is possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (6), when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game is started from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame opening signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a has been detected to be open as the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. Even after the machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. There are cases where it is difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to a setting change compatible signal. The example of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39 (2) shows an example in which a setting change response signal is also output from the tenth terminal from which the security signal is output.

  In the pattern 2, the first to sixth terminals, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the signal allocation in the pattern 1. In the pattern 2, unlike the pattern 1, the high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is turned on when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is in an ON state for 30 seconds when initialization processing (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. Moreover, when an illegal act is detected, it will be in an ON state for 4 minutes. When cheating is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal winning has occurred is included, and an abnormal frequency is detected at each winning opening (for example, a game ball is played at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds in the first starting winning opening). Based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning, etc., it is determined that the prize is abnormal. In addition, a case where a switch abnormality is detected is included, and a period in which a switch corresponding to each winning opening is in a winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is repeated ten times or more consecutively). Based on the fact that the 1 start-up switch is in the ON state, etc., it is determined that the switch is abnormally detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the occurrence of a game stop target error, and when the abnormal magnet is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is released, it will be ON for 4 minutes.

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 9-39 (2), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change response signal is a signal that is in an ON state during a period that is controlled in the setting change mode and that is also in an ON state during a period that is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As will be described later, the setting change response signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the setting value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, a security signal and a setting change response signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change response signal are output from the common terminal.

  As described above, by being able to output the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the outside that the fraudulent act has been performed, and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal is provided. Without being notified, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a process related to the setting change may have been executed). Also, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the 10th terminal is once turned OFF (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the 10th terminal is in the OFF state), and then, from the same 10th terminal, the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the setting change response signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Then, since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the gaming machine number (unit number) via the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the setting value based on the unit number and the setting change corresponding signal in the management device. And the setting value determined in advance are displayed in association with each other, thereby enabling processing to be displayed in a comparable manner. As a result, the actual setting values of a plurality of gaming machines can be easily managed by the game store administrator via the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the administrator and the settings changed in the setting change operation The administrator can grasp the inconsistency with the value. And when such inconsistency arises, the management regarding the setting in a plurality of gaming machines in a gaming store can be optimized by confirming the setting of the gaming machine or performing a setting change operation again. it can.

  As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF with the end of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but then corresponds to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. Output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal. In this example, the same number of pulses as the set value is output. The width of the pulse is, for example, 0.1 second. For example, when the set value is 3, a pulse having a width of 0.1 second is output three times at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.5 second interval). As a result, the set value of each gaming machine can be easily specified in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), the setting change response signal is turned on in accordance with the control to the setting change mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode has ended without changing the setting value. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. However, based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1, a special mode setting change corresponding signal As a result, 1 pulse is output.

  In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and at the end of the setting change mode (when the set value is changed) (Setting value after change) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value are output from a common information output terminal. Is possible.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as a special mode setting change response signal not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are ended, but also at a predetermined predetermined event. The Specifically, events related to the gaming state such as being controlled to the big hit gaming state, having finished the big hit gaming state, having finished the high base state, having increased the number of awarded balls to be thrown by 1000 Or an event related to a gaming machine error such as detection of opening of the gaming machine frame 3, detection of opening of the glass door frame 3a, detection of magnetic abnormality, etc. A setting change correspondence signal in a special mode corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of occurrence). In the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), 1 pulse is output as a special mode setting change response signal triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  As a result, the external device can secure an opportunity to grasp the setting value of each gaming machine. For example, when the setting change response signal is not properly input at the end of the setting change mode, the external device Even if the set value cannot be specified on the side, it becomes possible to specify the set value at a predetermined opportunity thereafter, and it is possible to enhance prevention of fraud in which the set value is changed by an inappropriate method.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on in accordance with the control to the setting change mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3 as a result of changing the setting value in the setting change mode. In this case, with the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF, and the setting change stored based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has become 3. Three pulses are output as signals. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), 3 pulses are output as a special mode setting change response signal triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (1), the setting value is not changed (the operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) is not performed when the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting value is not changed. As shown in FIG. 9-41 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, an operation for changing the setting value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) is performed, and the setting value is changed. In either case, after the end of the setting change mode, a number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are output. Yes. As described above, when the setting change mode is controlled, the common signal output process is executed upon completion of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. The signal output process can be simplified.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), the setting change response signal is turned on in accordance with the control in the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. In the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains 1 and remains unchanged. In this case, the setting change response signal is temporarily turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the setting change response signal is based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1. As a result, 1 pulse is output. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), 1 pulse is output as a special mode setting change response signal triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  In this way, it is possible to notify the outside of whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the setting change response signal, and the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (setting value storage in the RAM 102 when the power is turned on) The setting value stored in the area and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) can be notified to the outside, and the signal indicating whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and the setting value Can be output from a common information output terminal.

  In the information terminal allocation pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39 (2) described above, when the RAM clear is executed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is After 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the OFF state is entered, and then, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (special mode) ) Setting change response signal is output.

(Modification of game control main process)
Next, another embodiment relating to the game control main process of FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44. 9-11 to 9-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 9-44, after the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be entered.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 9-11, when the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 in an accessible state (step S21TM1060), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM2110 in FIG. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052, if the ON state is detected (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 causes the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 to be A RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and an initialization process is executed (step S21TM2220). A series of processing (processing shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) associated with the initialization processing is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110, when the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM2120. To do. The processing shown in step S21TM2120 to step S2170 is the same as the processing shown in step S21TM1320 to step S21TM1370 shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off recovery in step S21TM2170 or after transmitting the initialization command at power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 in FIG. 9-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. Is confirmed (step S21TM2320).

  When the RAM clear flag is set, that is, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 changes the setting value in the setting change mode. (Step S21TM2330 to Step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and also satisfies the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode. The processes shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. Then, after executing the process of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is erased (step S21TM2410), and the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  If the RAM clear flag has not been set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has not been operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value. The mode is changed (step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processing shown in steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240 in FIG. If it is confirmed in step S21TM2540 that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned OFF (YES in step S21TM2540), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is temporarily determined NO in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIG. The RAM clear flag is not set even when the above process is executed. As a result, NO is determined in step S21TM2320, and the setting change mode is not entered. As described above, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by clearing the RAM) is executed, the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON at the time of power-on is not satisfied. Are not controlled in the setting change mode.

  A series of processing relating to step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state at the time of turning on the power is the same as step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. This is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44, when controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits a power-on initialization command (step S21TM2270) and then a setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) And a setting command are transmitted (step S21TM2550). When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command after transmitting a backup command at the time of power-off recovery or an initialization command at power-on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270) (step S21TM2170). S21TM2520) and a setting command are transmitted (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting change mode command, and can display the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by the effect device such as 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and can display the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the effect device such as 9. According to such a configuration, by receiving a setting command without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting confirmation mode end command) for specifying that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended. Since the fact that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended can be specified on the side of the effect control CPU 120, the number of commands can be suppressed. That is, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be reduced.

(Other Modifications Related to Feature 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the switch for changing the setting value is the same as the clear switch for initializing (RAM clearing) the gaming machine is shown. Is a switch different from the clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear), which is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect the operation). It may be. With such a configuration, the position of the switch for switching the setting value and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is compared with the case where the switch for switching the setting value is provided on the power supply board. Therefore, when the set value is changed, confirmation of the set value and switching operation corresponding to the confirmation of the set value are facilitated, and workability can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the set value is displayed in a partial display area (first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which game information such as the aggregated base is displayed. The display device is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 that displays the total gaming state, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying set values, which is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the totaled game information and the set value can be grasped more clearly individually, so that the operation of changing the set value according to the totaled game information is easy. Thus, workability can be improved.

  In addition, a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) may be provided, but a switch for changing the set value may not be provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the set values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in order when the setting change mode is controlled (for example, 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 every 5 seconds), and the lock switch 21TM051 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state. Set values (set values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) are stored in the set value storage area (the set values stored in the set value storage area are stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The setting value may be determined by overwriting with the setting value that has been set). The store clerk at the amusement hall switches the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be confirmed is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value can be determined as the set value of the gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium in a gaming machine and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. In this enclosed game machine, information on the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be included in the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037. For example, being controlled in the setting change mode, being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, being in the period controlled in the setting change mode, being in the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode, setting value It may include information indicating that an operation for changing the setting has been performed, that the setting change mode has been completed, that the setting confirmation mode has been completed, and the like. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit such information to a management device such as a hall computer, and the hall computer may be able to specify that each gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the above embodiment, it is within the period controlled by the setting change mode by the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12, is within the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode, based on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4A. The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20 or the like may notify that it is controlled in the setting change mode (for example, the 7-segment display is caused to emit light in the first notification mode). Is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20 and the like. Notification (for example, emit light to a different second notification manner from the first notification manner the 7-segment display) may be. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a display for displaying the number of rounds in the big hit game (round number display), and instructs the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the game area on the right side). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, the display indicates that the setting change mode processing is being executed and the setting confirmation mode processing is being executed. You may make it light-emit in a mode.

  In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned ON when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, Although the example in which the security signal is continuously turned on for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal being turned off has been shown. Alternatively, when the security signal is turned on when controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and then RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated. Accordingly, the security signal is temporarily turned OFF for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal is changed. Utility signal specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) may be turned ON. By adopting such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period during which the external device such as a hall computer is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and it is clear that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

  Regarding the expectation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) depends on the set value of the gaming machine (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) and the big hit expectation. The selection ratio may be changed. For example, even when the big hit expectation is low, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, The expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of 1 or 2. By adopting such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high due to the expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more. Can be expected from the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation suggestion effect is executed. In addition, even in the case of a reach where the degree of big hit expectation is low, a player can perform the expectation suggestion effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more), thereby allowing the player to play the pachinko machine 1 Since it can be expected that the set value is high, the interest can be improved even when the big hit expectation is low.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine. However, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When a symbol is stopped in response to a stop button operation by a player, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big game The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of a bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus). In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs depending on the setting value, and the setting value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode, and the setting value can be changed by controlling the setting check mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and other forms regarding the feature 21TM]
Next, details regarding the above-described feature 21TM and other forms will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). In addition, the gaming machine frame includes a hinge mechanism portion (not shown) on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when viewed from the player). The other end side in the left-right direction (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) is connected so as to be rotatable in a direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door with the hinge mechanism portion as a fulcrum, the inner part of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. On the other end side of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a (for example, the right side when viewed from the player), there is provided a lock mechanism that fixes the other end side to the outer frame.

  Further, the outer frame is made of metal and is a frame body that becomes an outer portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a synthetic resin frame body to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape with the center penetrating when viewed from the front. The gaming board 2 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 from the front. The game board 2 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 is locked by a fixing device so as not to be detached from the gaming machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame in which speakers 8L and 8R, a gaming effect lamp 9, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, and the like are arranged. The glass door frame 3a includes a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a transparent window that protects the game board surface and allows the game area on the front surface of the game board 2 to be visually recognized.

  When a game shop clerk performs maintenance on the game board surface (for example, measures to eliminate clogged balls), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state in which the other end is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. By rotating the mechanism part (one end side) to the near side like a door with the fulcrum as a fulcrum, it is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame. In order for the store clerk to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 2, and also for viewing the display monitor 21TM029. By rotating the gaming machine frame 3 from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame, the hinge mechanism portion (one end side) is pivoted to the front side like a door, It is necessary to make the other end side open from the outer frame.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 can detect to the payout microcomputer 21TM370 that the gaming machine frame 3 is open. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal that can specify that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state is output to the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

(Power-on processing)
FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2 are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. FIGS. This process corresponds to the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-43 to 9-44. However, some of the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like (for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11) are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This process is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1330 in FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 in FIG. 9-43, and a parity check is performed as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), CPU 103 checks whether the setting change flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting changing flag is set when the processing shifts to a setting changing / confirming process described later (step S21TM3510), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM3710).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 matches the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with a normal value, for example, any one of 1 to 6. (Step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine manufacturer (before being installed in the game hall), a value (for example, 0) different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area. There may be. Further, when the data in the set value storage area is broken, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040), CPU 103 clears the area excluding the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3050, the data (the special symbol process flag, the probability change flag, the time reduction flag, the hold memory, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. Although the initial value is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, for each set value, an area in which each aggregate value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a linkage ratio, a role ratio, and a base is stored is not cleared. The value is not changed from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized. Note that the notification that the gaming state has been initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the game state and the like have been initialized in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. Is possible.

  On the other hand, if clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of restoration of power supply (step S21TM3045), Control goes to step S21TM3060. Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the recovery from the power-off has been performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9, recovery from the power interruption is performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. Can be notified.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opened. A detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and a detection signal indicating that the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects a detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected for the gaming control microcomputer 100, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a. When the detection signal indicating that this is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 By inputting the detection signal, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. The setting value can be confirmed and changed when the setting change mode is entered, and the setting value can be confirmed when the setting confirmation mode is entered.

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), no power interruption has occurred during setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step If the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM3060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), and / or It becomes possible to confirm, and the game machine frame 3 is in a closed state (NO in step S21TM3060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in an OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), and shifts to normal game processing. .

  In the present embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to enter a state where the set value can be confirmed (setting check mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, 2) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state are necessary. The CPU 103 can check the set value when it is confirmed that both of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing in step S21TM3060 and step S21TM3070 (setting check Mode). In addition to the conditions (1) and (2), (3) on the condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is determined to be in the ON state (YES) in step S21TM3040, As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed.

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated in order to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and is operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has an abnormality or some illegal The setting value may be confirmed or changed by the means. In such a state, since it is inappropriate to allow the setting value to be confirmed or changed, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. In addition, neither the setting change mode nor the setting change mode is controlled.

  In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is possible to control, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Even if the glass door frame 3a is in an open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in an open state, a setting confirmation mode and a setting change mode Any of these may be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3060 (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to normal game processing. If it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the routine proceeds to normal game processing. Along with the transition to the normal game processing, processing corresponding to steps S21TM1470 to S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 9-13 or steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 9-44 can be executed, and FIG. The indicated game control timer interrupt process can be executed (special symbol process process or the like can be executed).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if a regular value (1 to 6) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, step S21TM3110 is executed, The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the set value storage area may be inappropriate.

  If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), CPU 103 transmits a set value abnormality error command to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

  Further, in step S21TM3030, when the regular value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), the CPU 103 stores 0 in the set value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), A set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Temporarily, in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the normal value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area. , 0 is set as the set value, and a set value abnormal error command is transmitted.

  When receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal (for example, a message “setting value is abnormal”). To do). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value is to be changed (for example, displays a message “Please change the setting value”). Note that the speakers 8L and 8R may notify that there is a possibility that the set value is abnormal (for example, output a sound “the set value is abnormal”), and change the set value. It is also possible to notify that the state should be changed (for example, output a voice “Please change the setting value”).

  When transmitting the set value abnormality error command, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3130). .

  If lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3130), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3140).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3140), CPU 103 clears the area including the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3150, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, reserved memory, etc.) indicating the game state before stopping the power supply stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. The initial value is set, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and 0 is stored in the setting value storage area. On the other hand, for each set value, the area in which the total values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the linkage ratio, the role ratio, and the base are stored is not cleared. The total value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized.

  Then, after executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM3160), and the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. Migrate to The backup command at the time of power-off recovery (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) are commands that are transmitted only once when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits these power-on commands, it can specify that the power-on commands have been transmitted, and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The command transmission flag may be cleared when the normal game process is started (step S21TM1470 ~). Only when the command transmission flag is not set, the backup command at the time of power-off recovery (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), when the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, If the determination is YES in step S21TM3020) and the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be performed in this state. Before shifting to the normal game process, it is necessary to fix the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM is cleared to clear the area including the set value storage area (step S21TM3150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to make the setting value changeable (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are necessary. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the setting value can be changed ( It is possible to shift to the setting change mode.

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value in the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if it is determined NO in any of the determination processes of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the power is turned off once and the next power-on (1) to (3) All of the above conditions are satisfied, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the setting value in the setting value storage area is fixed to a normal value.

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not established, the CPU 103 transmits a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the effect control CPU 120. You may make it do. The presentation control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, “let the power off.”) Prompting the image display device 5 to turn off the power. . Further, when any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 determines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. You may make it prompt to make a power supply OFF state by making it light-emit in a power-off instruction | indication mode.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. In the process of FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 outputs a setting change response signal and a security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the setting value stored in the setting value storage area. The information is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

  Furthermore, CPU103 confirms whether a RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed, the CPU 103 designates that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the process proceeds to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is being executed, the CPU 103 is set to specify that the setting change mode has been controlled. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM3590), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM3520. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and proceeds to step S21TM3520. Transition.

  Here, the security signal output (step S21TM3540), the current setting value display (step S3550), and the setting confirmation mode command transmission (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the setting change mode command transmission (step S21TM3585). ) And a state in which the setting value update (step S21TM3600) cannot be executed corresponds to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040, and the RAM clear flag Is controlled to be 0).

  In addition, the security signal can be output (step S21TM3540) and the current setting value can be displayed (step S3550), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM3585) and the setting value can be updated (step S21TM3600). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140). The RAM clear flag is set to 1).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is cut off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can set the setting change mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  If lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM3530 (YES in step S21TM3530), CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO) in the subsequent processing of step S21TM3020, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game processing. Become.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value storage area to CPU 120 for effect control (step S21TM3720). As described above, the production control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730) and checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

  If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740), the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and a power interruption occurs during the setting change. If it is determined that the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM3030) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an OFF state (step S21TM3040). No) and RAM clear (step S21TM3050) has not been executed. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute normal processing when power is restored, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. (Step S21TM3060 When the NO) has been confirmed, it may be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740), this means that the RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the lock switch 21TM051 is temporarily turned off. If the normal set value (1-6) is not stored in the set value storage area before (YES in step S21TM3530) (for example, in the setting change mode while the set value remains 0) For example, when an operation for changing the set value is not performed), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the normal set value (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on process again and executes the processes after step S21TM3010.

  As described above, a game clerk or the like turns the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the gaming state and the like (execute RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the game state and the like. Can not be initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140, and the RAM is not cleared in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). In this way, the game shop clerk can select whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is to be controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state and the like. Yes.

  In the control shown in FIG. 10-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off in the state in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (NO in step S21TM3530), and the gaming machine frame 3 and If all of the glass door frames 3a are in the closed state, NO is determined in step S21TM3520, and a state is awaited that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. At this time, the gaming control microcomputer 100 operates the lock switch 21TM051 to instruct that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and the lock switch 21TM051 to confirm the setting change mode or setting confirmation. A command for instructing that the mode should be terminated may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Upon receiving these commands, the effect control CPU 120 informs that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened by the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like, and sets the lock switch 21TM051. It is notified that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode should be ended by operating. For example, a message “Open the gaming machine frame 3 and turn off the lock switch 21TM051 to end the setting change mode” may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In addition, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process proceeds to the normal game processing, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051. Is operated from the OFF state to the ON state, a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting changeover switch ( When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) sets based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Although it is not controlled in either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “The operation of the lock switch has been detected.” Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “Setting changeover switch operation detected” is executed. As a result, the game shop clerk clearly understands that the operation for changing the setting value was performed even though it was not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Can be confirmed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process proceeds to the normal game process. The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for checking the set value is not checked. As a result, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

  FIG. 10C is an explanatory diagram of a change in the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When the setting change mode is controlled, in step S21TM3550, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed. At this time, if a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1), the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 Displays the letter “E”. Accordingly, the store clerk of the game hall grasps that at least a regular value is not stored in the set value storage area, and operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs a setting change operation).

  Every time the store clerk operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. In this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. The information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 in accordance with the order of → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

  As described above, when the value stored in the set value storage area is not a regular value, information (alphabet E in this example) different from the number is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the corresponding information. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly understand that a value different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, and to prompt a setting change operation. If a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, if that value (0 in this example) is also displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the game hall manager May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to one of the regular values, and may cause the lock switch 21TM051 to be in the OFF state without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the normal value is stored in the set value storage area, information different from the number (alphabet E in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. Therefore, such misunderstanding is prevented and the setting change operation is surely performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1), when the setting change mode is controlled, a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the setting value storage area. The character “E” is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. After that, when a setting change operation is performed even once and a normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, In addition, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the normal setting value. No value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, and the display monitor 21TM029 has information different from the normal value (in this example, the letter E) ) Is never displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when controlled in the setting change mode, step S21TM3550 is executed. Thus, the regular set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. In this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3 In this order, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

  That is, when the setting change mode is controlled and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is a normal value at the beginning, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed after that, During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the set value is updated within the range of the normal set value, and the normal value is stored in the set value storage area. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information (character E in this example) different from the regular value is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  For example, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is set in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. Then, at the game hall side, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the setting value is not changed to a regular value through the setting change mode, a game can be performed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. become unable. Thereby, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the game hall, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

  In addition, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. If the set value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is not terminated, it is impossible to play a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Thereby, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the game hall, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

(Limited ball rental based on open state detection of gaming machine frames or glass door frames)
Next, a ball lending restriction method when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-4 shows the main board 11, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing diagram for explaining a communication process performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 10-4, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, The PRDY signal is not turned ON. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in an ON state (that is, a state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in an ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the CPU 103 does not turn the PRDY signal on but turns it off.

  As a result, the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, Since both the EXS signal and the EXS signal are OFF and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball lending (game medium payout) is not executed even when the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  Thus, during the period when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is turned on. It is supposed not to. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game media payout control from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  A game shop clerk or the like places the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in a closed state so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided does not detect the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, and does not detect the opening state of the glass door frame 3a. As both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when a payout operation is possible.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to be in the ON state, and executes subsequent ball lending payout control.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the setting change mode is controlled and a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Here, since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, the state of the gaming machine If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or the prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request can be paid out. There is no possibility. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order to grasp the control status to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, commands and determination processing for that are necessary, and control is complicated. There is a problem of becoming.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. During this period, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is prevented from executing the ball lending process and the winning ball process. Thus, the payout control is not executed regardless of whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the ball lending process and the prize ball process during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode are limited without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side. The With such a configuration, appropriate payout control for the ball lending process and the prize ball process is realized.

  In this way, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. By limiting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems associated with payout control, such as the inability to pay out an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is possible to smoothly proceed with maintenance work and the like of the gaming machine in the case where is opened.

(Resumption of ball rental after completion of open state detection)
Next, the payout is interrupted when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the ball lending is being executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The processing in the case of the above will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10-5, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state during the game medium payout. Then, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is resumed based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not in the open state (becomes closed).

  FIG. 10-5 illustrates the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of game media. FIG. 12 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out game media, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal, EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  If the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the period when the dispensing control board 21TM037 is executing the gaming medium dispensing, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370. However, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is OFF, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of payouts is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, a payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  During the period when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the PRDY signal. Is not turned on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the fact that the PRDY signal is OFF during the period when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state where the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is detecting the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are Since the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal on when the payout operation is possible.

  Based on the fact that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the PRDY signal is in the ON state), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. This completes the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by opening the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a.

  Accordingly, out of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before the power interruption occurs (that is, the number of payouts designated from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). Since the payout is executed for the unpaid number that has not been made, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player.

(Ball rental process when power failure occurs (without changing to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-6, the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the ball lending is being executed and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not controlled after the power supply is restored will be described with reference to FIG. I will explain it. In the example shown in FIG. 10-6, the game medium payout is interrupted based on the occurrence of power interruption while the game medium is being paid out, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the suspended payout is resumed.

  FIG. 10-6 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of game media. FIG. 12 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out game media, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal, EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  In the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, when the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. The That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is OFF, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk in the game hall sets the power switch 21TM055 to the ON state after opening the gaming machine frame 3. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the power-on process is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. Shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in an OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3 in an open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state where the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the dispensing motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state ( During the period when the PRDY signal is OFF), the game medium is not paid out.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is not detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is also detected. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not.

  As described above, after the power supply is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, payout of game media is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, The ball rental process is prevented from being executed by maintaining the PRDY signal in the OFF state without turning it on. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  In addition, when RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is performed, the store clerk of the game hall normally confirms that the RAM clear has been performed, and then removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to be in the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in an open state even during a period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. .

  When a game shop clerk puts both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a into a closed state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a connection confirmation signal ON and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The PRDY signal is turned on based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300. Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned ON, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes zero. Thereby, the occurrence of the power interruption and the payout of the game medium suspended due to the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being opened thereafter are completed. As described above, when the power supply interruption occurs during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state when the power is restored thereafter. As a condition, it is possible to complete the ball lending by restarting the dispensation of the suspended game medium.

(Lending process when power failure occurs (Move to setting change mode))
FIG. 10-7 (1) is a block diagram illustrating a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is changed to the game control micro. The data is input to the I / O 105 of the computer 100 and the I / O 21TM 372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, the store clerk of the game hall operates one clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, thereby clearing the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 and initializing the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Both RAM clearing is executed.

  Next, with respect to the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the ball lending is being executed and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power supply is restored, FIG. This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Shall be sent. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when a power interruption occurs during the execution of a game medium payout, the payout being executed is stopped, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. Sometimes, the payout is not resumed, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout is resumed based on the execution of the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. do not do.

  FIG. 10-7 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of game media. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. During the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out game media, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal, EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  In the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, when the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. The That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are both turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk in the game hall sets the power switch 21TM055 to the ON state after opening the gaming machine frame 3. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the power-on process is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, the setting switch mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3 in an open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is OFF. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state where the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, even if the data of the number of unpaid out has not been cleared, the game medium is not paid out.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processing from step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 is executed. When the RAM clear process is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is not detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is also detected. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not.

  As described above, after the power supply is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, payout of game media is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, The ball rental process is prevented from being executed by maintaining the PRDY signal in the OFF state without turning it on. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game shop clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in an ON state (step S21TM1480 or later), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a remains in the closed state. There may be an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing is ON. Based on this, the PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the store clerk in the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a connection confirmation signal in an ON state (processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). And the PRDY signal is turned on based on the fact that no opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. And

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated at the time of power-on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 The microcomputer 21TM370 has not cleared the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there is a remaining game medium to be paid out). Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. One by one until the data of the unpaid coin number becomes 0 performs a payout operation. Thereby, the game medium which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power-off, and then being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. Is completed. In this way, when a power interruption occurs during the execution of a ball rental and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data on the number of unpaid is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter. Resuming the dispensation of the suspended game medium and completing the ball rental on the condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Is possible.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on) The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining payout amount to be paid out). Since there is no gaming medium), even when the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not yet formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Unpaid number data stored in the payout number storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data on the number of unpaid-out items is initialized. Therefore, before the power interruption occurs, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before) (that is, the number of payouts designated from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the unpaid out No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number data stored in the RAM 21TM302. Is initialized, it is possible to simplify the management of data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or prize ball process.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data is stored in the buffer. Here, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data for the number of unpaid items is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being resumed. That is, when the power is restored, the payout for the unpaid number is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example regarding ball lending processing (transition to setting change mode) when power interruption occurs)
FIG. 10-8 (1) is a block diagram illustrating a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the above-described clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided corresponding to the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), and corresponds to the payout control board 21TM037. Thus, another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with separate clear switches.

  When the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is input to the I / O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated at power-on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  When the game shop clerk initializes the game control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the power is turned on, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is in the OFF state. On the contrary, when the game control microcomputer 100 is not initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off when the power is turned on. Switch 21TM052a is turned on. When the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is turned on and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on when the power is turned on. And

  Next, with respect to the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the ball lending is being executed, and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power supply is restored, FIG. This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM 102 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 is initialized, and when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when a power interruption occurs during the execution of a game medium payout, the payout being executed is stopped, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. Sometimes, the payout is resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed without resuming the payout. .

  FIG. 10-8 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of game media. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out game media, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal, EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  In the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, when the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. The That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are both turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk in the game hall sets the power switch 21TM055 to the ON state after opening the gaming machine frame 3. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. In addition, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the power-on process is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, the setting switch mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3 in an open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is OFF. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state where the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, even if the data of the number of unpaid out has not been cleared, the game medium is not paid out.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processing from step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 is executed. When the RAM clear process is executed in the game control microcomputer 100, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21 TM 302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is not detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is also detected. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not.

  As described above, after the power supply is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, payout of game media is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, The ball rental process is prevented from being executed by maintaining the PRDY signal in the OFF state without turning it on. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game shop clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in an ON state (step S21TM1480 or later), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a remains in the closed state. There may be an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing is ON. Based on this, the PRDY signal is turned off.

  When a game shop clerk puts both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a into a closed state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a connection confirmation signal ON and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The PRDY signal is turned on based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) Is executed when RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on)). Even in this case, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Because there is a remaining game medium to be paid out, based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on. Then, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the number of unpaid out becomes 0. Thereby, the game medium which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power-off, and then being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. Is completed. In this way, when a power interruption occurs during the execution of a ball rental and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data on the number of unpaid is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter. Resuming the dispensation of the suspended game medium and completing the ball rental on the condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clearing for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is backed up in the RAM 21TM302. When the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), and the PRDY signal is turned on In addition, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed due to the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11, the payout If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Not initialized. Thus, whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 has been executed regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. Regardless of whether the clear switch 21TM052a is operated, the data of the unpaid number is not initialized, and is executed before the power interruption occurs (before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored) Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process that has been performed (that is, the number of payouts designated from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid outs that have not been paid out The payout will be executed.

  Therefore, regardless of whether or not RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the unpaid number data stored in the RAM21TM302 is not initialized. Data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in processing or prize ball processing can be appropriately protected.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number of data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the payout that has been interrupted is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. In other words, after the power supply is restored, after a period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout for the number of unpaid is executed.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is shown. The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). Thereby, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by setting the PRDY signal to the OFF state or not setting the EXS signal to the ON state. Do not be.

(Prize ball payout limit based on open state detection of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a method for restricting prize ball payout when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 10-9 shows that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between computer 100 and payout control microcomputer 21TM370. As shown in FIG. 10-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  At this time, when a game clerk or the like opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used for the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected. Prize balls to be paid out when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and the glass door frame 3a is opened if the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated) Since the path through which the prize ball flows down is not physically connected to the upper plate in which the prize ball that has flowed down is stored, if the prize ball is paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without it.

  In the example of FIG. 10-9, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, The microcomputer 100 detects the passage of a game medium related to any one of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the big winning opening The winning ball number command as a winning ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, the game medium payout control is not executed as the received ACK signal but the game medium payout control is executed as the received ACK signal. To send. This award ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a The transmission continues to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state.

  In this way, during the period when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, each gaming medium receives each prize opening. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control of the winning ball without driving the payout motor 21TM289. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game media payout control from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  A game shop clerk or the like places the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in a closed state so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided does not detect the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, and does not detect the opening state of the glass door frame 3a. When both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the dispensing motor 21TM289 when the dispensing operation is possible, and the gaming machine frame 3 or glass A predetermined number (the number designated by the prize ball number command) of paying out prize balls according to the winning prize within the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

(Recommendation of prize ball payout after completion of open state detection)
Next, the payout is interrupted when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the award ball is being paid out, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. The processing in the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 10-10. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state while the game medium is being paid out. Then, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is resumed based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not in the open state (becomes closed).

  As shown in FIG. 10-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  If there is a win when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal and transmitting the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the period in which the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command is paid out, and the gaming machine frame / door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Based on the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the opening sensor 21TM300, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of game media. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of payouts is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, a payout number specified from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and uses the command for preparing a prize ball as a reception ACK signal for game control. It transmits to the microcomputer 100. This award ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a The transmission continues to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state.

  In this way, during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even during the execution of payout of the game medium. Do not execute game media payout. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Based on the contents of the stored unpaid number storage buffer, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. This completes the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by opening the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a.

(Prize ball processing when power interruption occurs (does not shift to setting change mode))
Next, FIG. 10-11 is used for the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the award ball is being paid out and the control is not switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. Will be described in detail. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-11, the game medium payout is interrupted based on the occurrence of power interruption while the game medium is being paid out, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the payout that has been interrupted is resumed.

  As shown in FIG. 10-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  If there is a win when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal and transmitting the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. In the period when the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command is paid out, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. Suspend media payout. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk in the game hall sets the power switch 21TM055 to the ON state after opening the gaming machine frame 3. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the power-on process is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. Shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in an OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3 in an open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process that is a process at the time of power-on (after the power is turned on, the serial shown in FIG. 10-1 is not controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the communication circuit setting process (period until step S21TM1480 is executed), since the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, the state where the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained.

  As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 does not drive, so the period during which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state (after the power is turned on, the serial communication circuit setting process (step shown in FIG. During the period until the execution of S21TM1480), the game medium is not paid out.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid-out number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid-out number becomes zero. Do. Here, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is not detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is also detected. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power supply is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, payout of game media is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is not executed. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  In addition, when RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is performed, the store clerk of the game hall normally confirms that the RAM clear has been performed, and then removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to be in the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in an open state even during a period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The game medium is not paid out.

  When a game shop clerk puts both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a into a closed state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a connection confirmation signal ON and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. Based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300, the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are displayed. Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the number of unpaid out becomes 0. Thereby, the occurrence of the power interruption and the payout of the game medium suspended due to the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being opened thereafter are completed. In this way, when the power interruption occurs during the award ball payout and the game media payout is interrupted, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. With this condition, it is possible to complete the payout of the winning ball by restarting the payout of the suspended game medium.

(Prize ball processing when power outage occurs (shift to setting change mode))
Next, with respect to the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the prize ball is being paid out, and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. This will be described in detail. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Shall be sent. In the example shown in FIG. 10-12, when a power interruption occurs during execution of a game medium payout, the payout being executed is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, The payout is not resumed, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout is not resumed based on the execution of the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  If there is a win when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal and transmitting the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. In the period when the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command is paid out, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. Suspend media payout. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk in the game hall sets the power switch 21TM055 to the ON state after opening the gaming machine frame 3. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the power-on process is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, the setting switch mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3 in an open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process that is a power-on process (controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1). During the period until () is executed), since the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even if the data of the number of unpaid out is not cleared. It will be.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processing from step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 is executed. When the RAM clear process is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. I do. Here, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is not detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is also detected. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power supply is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, payout of game media is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is not executed. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game shop clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be open. In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It becomes a state.

  When the store clerk in the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a connection confirmation signal in an ON state (processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). And the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. Let

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated at the time of power-on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 The microcomputer 21TM370 has not cleared the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there is a remaining game medium to be paid out). Based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout quantity is paid one by one until the data of the unpaid quantity becomes zero. Carry out the work. Thereby, the game medium which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power-off, and then being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. Is completed. As described above, when a power interruption occurs during the award ball payout and the game medium payout is interrupted, the data on the number of unpaid out has not been cleared when the power is restored thereafter. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, the payout of the suspended game medium is resumed, and the prize ball is paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). This is because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game media to be paid out are The payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not yet formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Unpaid number data stored in the payout number storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data on the number of unpaid-out items is initialized. Therefore, before the power is cut off (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the award ball processing executed before) (that is, the number of payouts designated from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the unpaid out No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the award ball process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data is stored in the buffer. Here, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data for the number of unpaid items is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being resumed. That is, when the power is restored, the payout for the unpaid number is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example of prize ball processing (transition to setting change mode) when power interruption occurs)
Next, with respect to the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the prize ball payout and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. This will be described in detail. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM 102 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 is initialized, and when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-13, when the power interruption occurs while executing the payout of the game medium, the payout being executed is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, The payout is resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed without resuming the payout.

  As shown in FIG. 10-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  If there is a win when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal and transmitting the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. In the period when the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command is paid out, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. Suspend media payout. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk in the game hall sets the power switch 21TM055 to the ON state after opening the gaming machine frame 3. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. In addition, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the power-on process is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, the setting switch mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3 in an open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process that is a power-on process (controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1). During the period until () is executed), since the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even if the data of the number of unpaid out is not cleared. It will be.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processing from step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 is executed. When the RAM clear process is executed in the game control microcomputer 100, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21 TM 302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. I do. Here, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is not detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is also detected. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power supply is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, payout of game media is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is not executed. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game shop clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in an ON state (step S21TM1480 or later), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a remains in the closed state. There may be an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ON. Accordingly, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

  When a game shop clerk puts both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a into a closed state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a connection confirmation signal ON and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. Based on the fact that none of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300, driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is started.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) Is executed when RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on)). Even in this case, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Because there is a remaining game medium to be paid out, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes zero. Thereby, the game medium which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power-off, and then being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. Is completed. As described above, when a power interruption occurs during the award ball payout and the game medium payout is interrupted, the data on the number of unpaid out has not been cleared when the power is restored thereafter. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, the payout of the suspended game medium is resumed, and the prize ball is paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21 TM 302 in the pay-out control microcomputer 21 TM 370 is executed (when the clear switch 21 TM 052 a is operated when the power is turned on), the pay-out control microcomputer 21 TM 370 backs up the RAM 21 TM 302. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout is performed. No action is taken.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed due to the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11, the payout If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Not initialized. As described above, whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. Regardless of whether the clear switch 21TM052a is operated, the data of the unpaid number is not initialized, and is executed before the power interruption occurs (before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored) Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the award ball processing that has been performed (that is, the number of payouts designated from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number of unpaid numbers that have not been paid out The payout will be executed.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the award ball process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number of data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the payout that has been interrupted is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. In other words, after the power supply is restored, after a period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout for the number of unpaid is executed.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is shown. The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Even if a winning is detected, no prize ball number command is transmitted. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that no prize ball number command is received, thereby preventing the payout of the prize ball from being executed.

(Output period of security signal and setting change support signal)
As described above, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), a security signal can be output from the 10th terminal. As described above, this security signal can notify the outside of the possibility that initialization processing (RAM clear), fraud detection, game stop target error, and the like have been performed. In addition, the security signal is processed from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. 10-2, from step S21TM3510 until it is determined NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed).

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), a setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change correspondence signal is transmitted from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. 10-2, from step S21TM3510 until it is determined NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed). By this setting change response signal, it is possible to notify the outside that processing related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode has been executed (processing related to setting value change or confirmation has been executed). Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (when the normal game process is started), the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is once turned OFF, and thereafter, from the same seventh terminal, Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1), when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1), A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change mode is ended and the normal game process is started. In addition, with the end of the setting change mode (more precisely, at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the setting change mode was ended and the routine game process was completed), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. Based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, 2 pulses are output as a special mode setting change response signal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) was executed when the power was turned on, but the setting change mode was not entered. In this case, the security signal is in the ON state for 30 seconds after the power is turned on (at the time of RAM clear execution), but the setting change response signal is not in the ON state.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period when it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal without assuming the input of the setting change correspondence signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished. (To be precise, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game process is started, 50 ms elapses). The security signal is also turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but when RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed as shown in FIG. 10-15 (3) After the setting change mode ends, the OFF state is not immediately turned on, and the ON state continues for 30 seconds after the setting change mode ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, when the setting confirmation mode ends (exactly, the setting confirmation mode ends). Then, it is turned OFF (at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the transition to the normal game process).

  In either case of FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF. The setting value is stored in the RAM 102 after that (for example, after 50 ms or more has elapsed), after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game process is started and 50 ms has elapsed. Based on the setting value stored in the area being 2, a pulse of 2 is output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal. As a result, the set value of each gaming machine can be easily specified in an external device such as a hall computer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the mode is not changed to the setting change mode, the security signal is displayed when the power is turned on (RAM It will be in the ON state for 30 seconds after clearing.

  Therefore, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed on the external device side to which the security signal is input, but the setting change mode is not entered. Can be recognized. On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in particular, there is a high possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode with RAM clear). If the security signal input period has not reached 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may not be executed and the setting confirmation mode may have been entered. (There is a possibility that only the confirmation may have been made without being able to change the set value).

  That is, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, but there is a possibility that the setting change mode may not be entered. If the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may not have been executed and the setting confirmation mode may have been entered. If the management device can recognize that there is a possibility that only the setting value could be changed without entering a state in which the setting value can be changed, and the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds , There is a possibility that has changed to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode (Especially, it is likely that the transition to the setting change mode with RAM clear) and is recognizable in the management device. In this way, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the outside by the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal without assuming the input of the setting change correspondence signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed and the possibility that the RAM has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, so the RAM clear is always executed (step S21TM3050). Or step S21TM3150). As a result, the security signal output period is approximately the period controlled by the setting change mode + 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when the power is turned on, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state and the RAM clear flag is in the 0 state (YES in step S21TM3570). RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal is a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode (more precisely, a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode + about 50 ms).

  Thus, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the output period of the security signal is different, so that each gaming machine changes the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (more precisely, the setting change mode Alternatively, it is turned OFF (at the timing when 50 ms elapses after the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game process is started). Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change support signal. In addition, when the security signal input period is longer than the setting change corresponding signal input period by about 30 seconds, it is recognized that the setting change mode is controlled and the RAM clear is executed accordingly. In the case where the input period of the setting change support signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it can be recognized that the setting check mode without the RAM clear is controlled.

  In this way, when the security signal and the setting change response signal are output from different output terminals, a predetermined event (in this example, RAM clear) occurs in the gaming machine on the external device side to which these signals are input. It is possible to distinguish between the occurrence of the occurrence and the fact that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and it can be specified based on the input period of the security signal whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Next, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the setting is confirmed without RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). The setting confirmation mode is terminated when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in less than 50 ms after the mode confirmation mode is started and the setting confirmation mode is started (for example, after the setting change flag is set in step S21TM3510). Then, it is assumed that the process has shifted to normal game processing.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (5), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal at the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Even when the setting confirmation mode is completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off) and the normal game process is started after the setting confirmation mode is started, the period is at least 50 ms, The setting change response signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, regarding the setting change response signal and the security signal, once turned on, the on state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

  If the period during which the setting change response signal and the security signal are ON is less than a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change mode or setting confirmation on the external device side such as a hall computer. It becomes difficult to recognize that the mode has been changed. As in this embodiment, regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are turned on at least for a predetermined period (50 ms in this example). On the external device side, each pachinko gaming machine 1 can recognize that it has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, regarding the setting change corresponding signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the setting change corresponding signal is output in a special mode having a pulse width of 100 ms. The set value of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is switched to the OFF state in less than 50 ms after the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON. When the number of 100 ms-wide pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the storage area is output, the period during which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms) It is not possible to recognize the setting change corresponding signal corresponding to, and by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width is 100 ms) output after that, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is erroneously recognized. May be recognized. As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, at least a predetermined period (in this example, 50 ms), by turning on the setting change correspondence signal, the external device side Thus, the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately specified.

  10-16 is a figure which shows the other example regarding the production | presentation apparatus with which the production | presentation control board 12 is provided. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 2, in addition to the game effect lamp 9, an off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101, an off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102, and a fourth symbol display are provided on the lamp control board 14. 21TM103 and a setting change state indicator 21TM104 are connected to each other, and each of them is constituted by a light emitting device such as an LED. These light emitting devices are all provided outside the screen frame of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of these light emitting devices via the lamp control board 14. In this example, all of these light emitting devices emit light in a common light emission color.

  The off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101 is composed of two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 changes the first reserved memory number, that is, when a winning to the first start winning opening occurs (when the first reserved memory number increases), and the first special symbol. When the display of the change is finished and the display result is finalized (when the first reserved memory number is decreased), the first reserved memory number for designating the updated first reserved memory number from the game control microcomputer 100 When the designation command is received, the off-screen first on-hold indicator 21TM101 is caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the first on-hold memory number designated by the first on-hold memory number designation command.

  For example, when the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. Further, when the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number designation command is 2, both the light emitting devices are turned on. When the first reserved memory number specified by the first reserved memory number designation command is 3, one light-emitting device is set in a blinking state and the other light-emitting device is turned on. When the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number designation command is 4, both the light emitting devices are set in a blinking state.

  The off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102 is composed of two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 changes the second reserved memory number, that is, when a winning to the second start winning opening occurs (when the second reserved memory number increases), and the second special symbol. When the display of the change is finished and the display result is confirmed (when the second reserved memory number decreases), the game control microcomputer 100 designates the updated second reserved memory number from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designation command is received, the off-screen second on-hold indicator 21TM102 is caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the second on-hold memory number designated by the second on-hold memory number designation command.

  For example, when the second reserved memory number specified by the second reserved memory number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. When the second reserved memory number designated by the second reserved memory number designation command is 2, both the light emitting devices are turned on. When the second reserved memory number designated by the second reserved memory number designation command is 3, one light-emitting device is turned on and the other light-emitting device is turned on. When the second reserved memory number designated by the second reserved memory number designation command is 4, both the light emitting devices are set in a blinking state.

  The fourth symbol display 21TM103 is composed of two light emitting devices. Here, one of the light emitting devices is a variation display device of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is started (that is, (Variable display) is started, and at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the display is turned off or turned on (that is, the variable display is terminated), and the display result is derived. The other light emitting device is a variation display device of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started (that is, variation). Display) is started, and at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed, the display is turned off or turned on (that is, the variation display is terminated), and the display result is derived.

  The production control CPU 120, when the first special symbol variation display is started, a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command for designating that the first reserved memory number is subtracted, a display result designation for designating a display result The variation display of the first special symbol is executed based on the fact that the command and the variation pattern command for designating the variation time of the special symbol are received from the game control microcomputer 100, And the fluctuation | variation time of a 1st special symbol can be specified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the display of the first special symbol variation display is completed and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to specify that the display of the display result is derived after the display of the change is completed.

  Here, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives the one set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, one of the light emitting devices in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (that is, the variable display). When the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed, one of the light emitting devices is turned off or turned on (that is, the display result is confirmed) in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. ). For example, if a display result designation command specifies “out of” display result, one light-emitting device is turned off during the symbol determination period, and a “big hit” display result is specified by the display result designation command. In this case, one of the light emitting devices is turned on during the symbol determination period.

  The production control CPU 120, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command for designating that the second reserved memory number is subtracted, the display result designation for designating the display result The variation display of the second special symbol is executed on the basis of receiving from the game control microcomputer 100 a set of commands, that is, a command and a variation pattern command that specifies the variation time of the special symbol. And the change time of a 2nd special symbol can be specified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to specify that the display of the display result is derived after the display of the change is completed.

  Here, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives the one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the other light emitting device in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (that is, the variation display). When the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed, the other light emitting device is turned off or turned on (ie, the display result is confirmed) in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. ). For example, if the display result designation command specifies a “out of” display result, the other light-emitting device is turned off during the symbol determination period, and the display result designation command specifies a “big hit” display result. In this case, the other light emitting device is turned on during the symbol determination period.

  The emission color of the off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101 may be different from the emission color of the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102. For example, the former emits light in blue and the latter emits in red. You may make it let it. Further, in the fourth symbol display 21TM103, the emission color of one light emitting device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A is different from the emission color of the other light emitting device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, the former emits light in blue (the same emission color as that of the off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101), and the latter emits light in red (the same emission color as that of the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102). You may do it.

  Also, an image indicating the first reserved memory number (for example, an image of blue numbers “0 to 4”) and an image indicating the second reserved memory number (for example, an image of red numbers “0 to 4”) are displayed as images. You may make it display on the display apparatus 5. FIG. In addition, when the image of the 4th symbol corresponding to the 1st special symbol (for example, it is a quadrilateral image and the first special symbol is variably displayed and blinks white (varies), the display result is out of place. Is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol determination period, and is displayed in red when the display result is a big hit, and an image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (for example, a rectangle) The image of the second special symbol is flashing yellow (fluctuating) during the period when the second special symbol is variably displayed, and when the display result is off, it is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol determination period, and the display result is a big hit In this case, an image that is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol determination period) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  The setting change state indicator 21TM104 is composed of one light emitting device. The effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command (see step S21TM3585 in FIG. 10-2) received from the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting change mode. The device 21TM104 is turned on. When the setting command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting change mode is completed (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 10-2) is received, the setting change state indicator 21TM104 is turned off. To do.

  The production control CPU 120 changes the setting at the timing of receiving the setting confirmation mode command (see step S21TM3580 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The status indicator 21TM104 is blinked. When the setting command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting confirmation mode is completed (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 10-2) is received, the setting change state indicator 21TM104 is turned off. To do.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode is controlled (lighting state) and the setting confirmation mode (flashing state) is controlled according to the light emission mode of the setting change state indicator 21TM104. It has become. Here, in comparison with the period from when the power is turned on to when the display control unit 123 enables image display control in the image display device 5, the lamp control board 14 emits light from each light-emitting device. The period until control becomes possible is extremely short. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-17, in the image display device 5, it is not possible to notify that the setting change mode is being controlled and the setting confirmation mode is being controlled (the image by the display control unit 123). Even during the period before display control is possible, the fact that the setting change mode indicator 21TM104 is controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is notified by the light emission mode of the setting change state indicator 21TM104. It becomes possible.

  On the production control board 12 side, not only the setting change state indicator 21TM104 but also the off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101, the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102, and the fourth symbol indicator 21TM103 are played. It is also possible to notify that the setting change mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode is controlled by emitting light with a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern. For example, the setting change mode is controlled by turning on all the LEDs constituting the first off-screen display 21TM101, the second on-screen display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103. The setting confirmation mode is controlled by notifying and setting all the LEDs constituting the first off-screen display 21TM101, the second on-screen display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 to blink. May be notified.

  On the other hand, on the main board 11 side, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 performs the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal hold indicator 25C, and the first special symbol. The display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 are caused to emit light with a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the game is performed (for example, all are turned on simultaneously) Thus, it can be notified that the setting change mode is being controlled. Further, during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the CPU 103 performs the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal hold indicator 25C, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second The special symbol display device 4B and the normal symbol display device 20 are caused to emit light with a light emission pattern different from a normal light emission pattern when the game is being performed (and a light emission pattern different from that when the setting change mode is controlled). (For example, it is possible to notify that the setting check mode is being controlled by making all of them blink simultaneously).

[Explanation regarding the feature 30TM]
Next, the characteristic part 30TM will be described. FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the hold display and the active display. On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display area 30TM101 for displaying a first hold storage number (first hold display 30TM001 of 0 to 4) and a second hold storage number (second hold of 0 to 4). The second hold display area 30TM102 for displaying the display 30TM002) and the active display area 30TM103 for displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the currently executed variable display are provided. The first hold display area 30TM101, the second hold display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the lower part of the screen. The right side is the second hold display area 30TM102.

  When the first reserved memory number is not zero, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first reserved display 30TM001 in the number corresponding to the first reserved memory number in the first reserved display area 30TM101. That is, the first hold display 30TM001 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, although the start condition (for example, the winning to the first start winning opening) is established, but the start condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed). Information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the decorative symbol variable display) in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). It is. When a plurality of first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 in the order close to the active display area 30TM103 (in order from the right as viewed from the player) The start condition for the variable display is satisfied.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second reserved display number 30TM002 in the number corresponding to the second reserved memory number in the second reserved display area 30TM102. That is, the second hold display 30TM002 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, although the start condition (for example, the winning to the second start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed). And the information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (and the decorative symbol variable display) in which the second reserved memory number is not 0). When a plurality of second hold displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second hold display area 30TM102, they correspond to the second hold display 30TM002 in the order close to the active display area 30TM103 (in order from the left as viewed from the player). The start condition for the variable display is satisfied.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM003 in the active display area 30TM103 when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. That is, the active display 30TM003 indicates that the start condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed after the start condition (for example, winning to the first start winning port or the second starting winning port) is established, and the big hit game It is information corresponding to the special symbol variation display (and the decorative symbol variation display) in which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not zero).

  In addition, the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 (left side as viewed from the player) is an area different from the first hold display area 30TM101, and stores the first hold storage number (0-4 sub hold display 30TM004). A sub-hold display area 30TM104 for displaying and a sub-active display area 30TM105 for displaying a sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the currently displayed variable display are provided, which are different from the active display area 30TM103.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the secondary hold display 30TM004 is to be displayed at the time of start winning (when the winning to the first start winning opening occurs), in the secondary hold display area 30TM104. A number of sub-hold displays 30TM004 corresponding to the number of one hold storage are displayed, and a sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. That is, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, although the start condition (for example, winning to the first start winning opening) is established, but the start condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed). And the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0), which corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the secondary active display 30TM005 is controlled to the big hit gaming state because the start condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed) after the start condition (for example, the winning to the first start winning opening) is established. This is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the decorative symbol variable display) in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). When a plurality of sub-holding display areas 30TM004 are displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104, the variation corresponding to the sub-holding display 30TM004 is performed in the order close to the subactive display area 30TM105 (from the right when viewed from the player). The display start condition is satisfied.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11A, the secondary reserved display 30TM004 has a star-shaped outline, which is different from the first reserved display 30TM001 (round display or triangular display). The sub-holding display 30TM004 is less noticeable because it is smaller in size than the first holding display 30TM001, and has low visibility for the player. The sub-active display 30TM005 is also a star-shaped outline, which is different from the active display 30TM003 (round display or triangular display). The sub-active display 30TM005 has a smaller display size than the active display 30TM003, so that it is not noticeable and has low visibility for the player.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and the sub-active is displayed in response to the variable display of the middle left and right decorative symbols being executed in the image display device 5. In the display area 30TM105, a sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed. In this way, as information corresponding to the one variation display (common variation display) being executed, information in different modes of the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the common variable display and the variable display corresponding to the active display 30TM003 are simultaneously displayed on the screen.

  Corresponding to the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, four first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 and four sub-hold displays are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. 30TM004 is displayed. Thus, as information corresponding to each of the four variable displays that have not yet been executed, information in different modes, the first hold display 30TM001 and the sub hold display 30TM004, is displayed. That is, one first hold display 30TM001, a variable display (hold storage) corresponding to the first first hold display 30TM001, and one sub hold display 30TM004 corresponding to a common variable display (hold storage) are simultaneously displayed. It will be displayed on the screen.

  In this way, a plurality of types of hold display (first hold display 30TM001, secondary hold display 30TM004) corresponding to the common change display (change display of the first special symbol) are displayed on the same screen at the same time. It is possible to improve the interest by diversifying the production using the hold display. Similarly, a plurality of types of active displays (active display 30TM003, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the currently running variation display (first special symbol variation display, decorative symbol variation display) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest by diversifying the production using the active display.

  Here, as will be described later, when it is determined not to display the secondary hold display 30TM004 in the determination at the start winning prize, the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, The sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. In addition, while the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the subactive display 30TM005 is not displayed in the subactive display area 30TM105, and the subactive display 30TM005 is an area to be displayed. Information (rectangular frame shown in the upper part of the screen in FIG. 11-1) is not displayed either.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the first change effect and / or the second change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The first change effect is a special mode that is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white round display) of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the start winning prize. (In this example, white triangle display), blue mode (in this example, blue round display), green mode (in this example, green round display), red mode (in this example, red round shape) Display) or a notice effect that is displayed in a golden form (in this example, a golden round display). Further, the second change effect is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white star display), the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning. The notice effect is displayed in a blue mode (in this example, a blue star display) or a red mode (in this example, a red star display).

  FIG. 11B is a flowchart illustrating the change effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect determination process in the prefetch notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in FIG.

  In the change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first sets a command (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first command) at the time of the start winning based on the occurrence of the starting winning at the first starting winning opening. It is confirmed whether or not a new “1 reserved memory number addition designation command” has been received (step S30TM1010).

  The symbol designating command is an effect control command indicating whether or not the winning determination result is a big hit and the determination result of the type of big hit. The CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot will be based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and determines the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot and designates the determination result Outputs the specified command. The variation category command is an effect control command that indicates a variation pattern determination result among the winning determination results. Based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of starting winning, the CPU 103 determines whether or not normal reach, super reach or the like, and outputs a variation category command for designating the determination result To do. The first reserved memory number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first reserved memory number has increased by one.

  Specifically, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set of symbol designation command, variable category command, and first reserved memory number addition designation command) is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. To do. If one set of start winning command is not newly received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process is terminated.

  If one set of commands at the time of start winning is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends as it is. As will be described later, the change prohibition flag is set based on the determination that at least the first change effect is executed. If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends as it is.

  If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first change effect is executed and the final display mode, whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode, which will be described later. It determines based on a display mode determination table (refer FIG. 11-3) (step S30TM1030).

  By executing the processing of step S30TM1010 and step S30TM1020, in this embodiment, only when the first change effect is not executed, the process after step S30TM1030 is executed, and the first change effect is executed. Alternatively, the second change effect can be executed.

  FIG. 11C is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the active display 30TM003, “normal mode”, “special mode”, “blue mode”, “green mode”, “red mode” ”And“ Golden Aspect ”can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005, “no display”, “normal mode”, “blue mode”, and “red mode” Can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes. Of these, “no display” indicates that the secondary hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the secondary hold display area 30TM104 and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105.

  As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out of” (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “out”), the starting winning is concerned. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first reserved memory) becomes a normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 31%, and a special mode (white display) at a rate of 4%. Triangular display), a blue mode (blue round display) at a rate of 18%, a green mode (green round display) at a rate of 21%, and a red mode (red round display at a rate of 16%) ) And a golden aspect (golden round shape display) at a rate of 10%. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the start winning prize is different from the normal mode (white round display) is 69. % Will be executed.

  On the other hand, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “big hit”), it is based on the starting winning (new first hold memory). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 2%, a special mode at a rate of 3%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, a green mode at a rate of 20%, It becomes a red aspect at a ratio of 25% and a golden aspect at a ratio of 35%. That is, the first change effect in which the aspect of the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal aspect is executed at a rate of 98%. It will be.

  Thus, when the 1st change production is performed, the ratio which becomes a big hit is high compared with the case where the 1st change production is not performed. In addition, when the first change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a gold mode, the ratio of the big hit becomes the highest. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), with regard to the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the expectation level that is a big hit is the relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <green mode <red mode <gold color mode. .

  In addition, as shown in the change pattern of the first change effect described later, the display mode is different from the normal mode, the blue mode, or the red mode at the stage of the first hold display 30TM001 before the active display 30TM003. It may become. When the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when it is displayed as the active display 30TM003), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift or a display mode with higher expectation than that. To change. Therefore, regarding the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001, the expectation level that is a big hit has the relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <red mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the ratio at which the special mode is selected as the final display mode of the active display is extremely lower than the ratio at which other modes are selected. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, which will be described later, the ratio in which the special mode is included in the change pattern of the hold display is not so low as compared with the ratio in which the other mode is included. Therefore, when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode, the rate of change in the display mode is higher than when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in another mode. The player cannot expect a big hit when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode as compared with the case where the first display 30TM001 is displayed in a blue mode or a red mode, but the display mode has a higher expectation. It can be expected to change to a display mode (blue mode, red mode).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out of” (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “out”), The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first hold memory) are not displayed at the rate of 70% but are displayed at the rate of 30%. The ratio that the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio that the final display mode becomes the blue mode (blue star display) is 4%, the secondary active display 30TM005 (sub-holding display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). The ratio is 1%. In other words, the information corresponding to the variable display (the hold display or the active display) that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is displayed at a rate of 30%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning. The second change effect in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 5%.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designation command is “big hit”), The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first hold memory) are not displayed at the rate of 40% but are displayed at the rate of 60%. The ratio that the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio at which the final display mode becomes the blue mode (blue star display) is 10%, the secondary active display 30TM005 (sub-holding display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). The ratio is 25%. In other words, the information corresponding to the variable display (the hold display or the active display) that is the determination target at the start winning prize is displayed at a rate of 60%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the determination target at the start winning prize The second change effect in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 50%.

  As described above, when the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are displayed, the ratio of big hits is higher than when the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are not displayed. Moreover, when the 2nd change production is performed, the ratio which becomes a big hit is high compared with the case where a 2nd change production is not performed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is a red mode, the ratio of the big hit becomes the highest. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), with respect to the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, the expectation level that is a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Moreover, as shown in the change pattern of the 2nd change production mentioned later, in the stage of the subpending display 30TM004 before the subactive display 30TM005, when a display mode turns into a blue mode or a red mode different from a normal mode There is. When the secondary hold display 30TM004 is shifted to the secondary active display area 30TM105 (when displayed as the secondary active display 30TM005), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift or a display with higher expectation than that. It changes to the aspect. Therefore, regarding the display mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004, the expectation level that is a big hit has the relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, the CPU 120 for effect control determines (1) to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is set to a mode different from the normal mode), and the second There is a case where it is determined to execute the change effect (the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is different from the normal mode).

  In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control may decide to execute (2-1) the first change effect and not to display the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005. Further, (2-2) it is decided to execute the first change effect, and the secondary change display 30TM004 and the subactive display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the subactive display 30TM005 is normally set). It may be decided to be an aspect.

  In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that (3) the first change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is set to the normal mode), and the second change effect is executed (sub-hold display 30TM004 and The sub-active display 30TM005 may be displayed and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 may be determined to be different from the normal mode.

  In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control may determine (4-1) not to execute the first change effect, and may not display the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005. Also, (4-2) it is decided not to execute the first change effect, and the secondary change display 30TM004 and the subactive display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the subactive display 30TM005 is normally set). It may be decided to be an aspect.

  In the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 determines that neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is to be executed (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (4-1) and ( If any one of the cases 4-2) is applicable, the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold storage) is displayed in the normal mode. The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) does not change from the normal mode to another mode, and after the variable display corresponding to the first hold memory is started, this The active display 30TM003 corresponding to is not changed from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the change patterns 101, 201, when the final display mode is the “normal mode”, 301, 401).

  In addition, when corresponding to said (4-2), although the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to a new start winning (1st hold memory) is displayed, the display mode changes from a normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first reserved storage is started, the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to this does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). And change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is “normal mode”).

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, (1), (2-1) and (2) above. -2) and when it corresponds to either (3), the change pattern of the change effect is determined as shown below.

  When it is decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, in the case of (1) above, in step S30TM1060, the updated first The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined active display 30TM003 ( 11-4 and FIG. 11-5), the updated first reserved memory number (first reserved memory number after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command), and the determined secondary active display 30TM005. The change pattern of the second change effect is determined based on the final display mode (see FIG. 11-6).

  When the CPU 120 for effect control executes the first change effect and decides not to execute the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1110), that is, the above (2-1) and (2-2). In any case, in step S30TM1120, the updated first reserved memory number (first reserved memory number after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the final of the determined active display 30TM003 A change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5). In addition, when it corresponds to the above (2-2), although the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold storage) is displayed, the display mode changes from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first reserved storage is started, the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to this does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). And change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is “normal mode”).

  If the CPU 120 for effect control decides not to execute the first change effect but to execute the second change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, if it corresponds to the above (3), step In S30TM1210, based on the updated first reserved memory number (first reserved memory number after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined secondary active display 30TM005, the second The change pattern of the change effect is determined (see FIG. 11-6).

  When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of (1), (2-1), (2-2), and (3) above) If this is the case, a prefetch counter is set (step S30TM1070, step S30TM1130, step S30TM1220). In addition, although neither notice effect of a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect is performed, when sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to a new start prize (1st holding memory) is displayed (above (4-2)). Also set the prefetch counter if applicable.

  A value corresponding to the first reserved memory number updated based on the start winning prize (a value specified by the first reserved memory number designation command) is set in the prefetch counter, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Each time (every time the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received), the value of the prefetch counter is decremented by one. That is, the value of the prefetch counter is subtracted every time the first hold display 30TM001 or the sub hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the hold storage that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is shifted. Then, when the value of the prefetch counter becomes 0, the variable display (or the secondary change display 30TM004 is displayed although the second change effect is not executed, which is the target of the first change effect and / or the second change effect). (Variable display) is executed.

  Further, when it is determined that the first change effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 sets a change prohibition flag (steps S30TM1080 and S30TM1140). During the period when the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, it is determined as YES in the above-described step S30TM1020, thereby corresponding to the new start prize (new first reserved memory). Neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new start prize (new first hold memory) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the variation display that is the target of the first change effect ends.

  FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5 are explanatory diagrams illustrating a specific example of a change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern of the first change effect. When the first reserved memory number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the nth first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. (Ii) The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start win shifts the change ranking in the first hold display area 30TM101 to a higher position (active display area 30TM103 side). Timing (when n ≧ 2) and (iii) timing at which the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start prize is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (timing at which the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start prize is displayed) ), Display information (pending display or Active display) might be displayed in a different manner from the normal manner.

  11-4 and 11-5, what is the display information (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. The display mode is shown. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white round display, and “special” indicates a special mode that is a white triangular display. “Blue” indicates a blue mode which is a blue round display, and “Red” indicates a red mode which is a red round display.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern for one hold shown in FIG. Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 101 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, being out of place or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning and then the first hold display to be notified is changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

  In the description of FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the active shift means that the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted from the first hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, at the time of starting winning prize) The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display to be determined is displayed).

  Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later). After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, A determination value is assigned to each change pattern 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display subject to notice is displayed in a special manner at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display subject to notice is changed in a special manner at the timing of active shift.

  Here, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the active shift timing (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401, which will be described later). After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the special mode. In addition, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is selected at the timing of active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402) ), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in a special mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and the change pattern 101, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is displayed in a special form at the time of a start winning prize, and then the first hold display to be notified is changed to a blue form at the timing of active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display subject to notice is displayed in blue in the start winning prize, and then the first hold display subject to notice is changed in blue in the active shift timing.

  Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, a change pattern 201, a change pattern 301, and a change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. In addition, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, change pattern 402) ), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change pattern 403) And 404), the active display 30TM003 remains blue after the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively.

  Here, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is in the active shift timing (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the green mode. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402) ) After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the green mode. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the blue color to the green color.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and the change pattern 101, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is displayed in a blue color at the time of winning a start, and then the first hold display to be notified is changed to a red color at an active shift timing. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display subject to advance notice is displayed in a red color at the time of start winning and then the first hold display subject to advance notice remains in the red color at the time of active shift.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402) ), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the blue color to the red color. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405). In the case of ˜412), the active display 30TM003 does not change in red after the active shift.

  As for the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively.

  Here, when the gold color mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401, which will be described later). After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the gold mode. Further, when the gold color mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402) ), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the gold mode. In addition, when the gold color mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue color mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change pattern 403 And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from a blue color to a gold color. In addition, when the gold mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405). In the case of ˜412), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the red color to the gold color.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved data shown in FIG. Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 201 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, being out of place or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). In the change pattern 201, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift is not changed. It is a change pattern which does not change the 1st hold | maintenance display of notice object also in a normal mode also at timing.

  When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203 and the change pattern 204, respectively. In the change pattern 202, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift is not changed. The change pattern 203 changes the first hold display of the notice target in a special manner at the timing, and the change pattern 203 indicates the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal form at the time of starting winning a prize. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the advance notice object is changed to a special mode and the first hold display of the advance notice object is not changed in the special form at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in a special mode, the first hold display to be notified changes in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. Without a change pattern remains unchanged at special embodiment the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, and the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208. The change pattern 205 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then changes the first hold display of the notice target to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 206 is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the advance notice target to a blue mode. The change pattern 206 displays the first hold display of the advance notice target in a special form at the time of winning a start, and then notifies at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 207 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the target is changed to a blue form at the timing of the active shift without changing the first hold display of the target in a special mode. After the 1 hold display is displayed in a special mode, the first hold display to be notified is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the 1st hold shift and The change pattern 208 is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the blue state at the time of the shift shift, and the change pattern 208 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the blue form when starting winning a prize and then holds the first hold display. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in blue at the shift timing, and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in blue at the active shift timing.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the determination result at the time of winning a start (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or jackpot) A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the determination result at the time of winning a start (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or jackpot) A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212. ing. In the change pattern 209, the first hold display subject to notice is displayed in a special manner at the time of winning a start, and then the first hold indication subject to notice is changed to a blue form at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 210 is a change pattern that changes the first hold display to be notified in a red form, and the change pattern 210 displays the first hold display to be notified in blue form at the time of winning a start and then notifies the first hold shift at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 211 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift without changing the first hold display of the target in the blue form. After the first hold display is displayed in blue, the first hold display to be notified is changed to red at the timing of the first hold shift, and The change pattern 212 is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red state at the time of the shift, and the change pattern 212 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the red form at the start winning, and then the first hold display. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in red at the shift timing, and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in red at the active shift timing.

  As for the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, and the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212. ing.

  When the first reserved memory count stored in the first reserved memory count storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three holds shown in FIG. 11-5 (C). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 301 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of date or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). In the change pattern 301, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the normal mode at the hold shift timing, and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the normal mode at the active shift timing.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or big hit). Each determination value is assigned to 302. In the change pattern 302, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special form even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively. In the change pattern 303, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in a special manner at the timing of the change, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display for the advance notice is displayed in the normal mode, the first hold display for the advance notice is changed to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the advance notice is displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display is changed to blue and the first hold display subject to notice is not changed in blue at the active shift timing. In pattern 305, the first hold display subject to notice is displayed in blue when the start prize is received, and then the first hold display subject to notice is not changed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in blue in the timing of the shift, and the first hold display in advance is not changed in the blue in the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 301, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, being out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively. The change pattern 306 shows the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then changes the first hold display of the notice target to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is changed to a blue color at the timing of the change, and the first hold display to be notified is changed to a red color at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in blue, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first notice of the notice is also displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift without changing the hold display in the blue form. The display pattern 308 displays the first hold display of the notice target in blue when the winning prize is received, and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift. A change pattern 309 is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is changed to a red color at a hold shift timing and the first hold display to be notified is not changed to a red color at an active shift timing. Sometimes the first hold display for the advance notice is displayed in blue, and the first hold display for the advance notice is changed to red at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern which does not change the 1 hold display in the red form without changing the 1 hold display in the red form at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 310 does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red form at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the red form at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in red at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in red at the active shift timing.

  As for the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 301, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the off or the big hit) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved objects shown in FIG. 11-5 (D). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 401 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of date or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). In the change pattern 401, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The first hold display subject to advance notice is not changed in the normal mode at the hold shift timing, and the first hold display subject to advance notice is not changed in the normal form at the third hold shift timing. It is a change pattern which does not change the 1st hold | maintenance display of notice object with a normal mode.

  When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of 402. In the change pattern 402, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display subject to notice is not changed in a special manner at the timing of the previous notice, and the first hold display subject to notice is not changed in a special manner even at the timing of the third hold shift, and is subject to notice at the active shift timing. It is a change pattern which does not change the 1st hold display of No. with a special mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively. The change pattern 403 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then changes the first hold display of the notice target to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the advance notice object is changed to a blue color at the timing of the first change, and the first hold display of the advance notice object is not changed in the blue form at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first change display of the advance notice object is also changed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 404 is a change pattern that does not change the blue display in the 1 hold display, and the change pattern 404 displays the first hold display to be notified in the blue form at the time of winning a start, and then displays the first display of the notification target at the timing of the first hold shift. The first hold display is not changed in the blue mode, and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift. Without change from the first hold display blue aspects notice object in the timing of the hold shift, a change pattern remains unchanged blue embodiments the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change patterns 405 to 412, respectively. The change pattern 405 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then changes the first hold display of the notice target to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in a special manner at the timing of the first change, but the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a blue form at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first notice display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 406 is a change pattern that changes the 1-hold display to a red mode, and the change pattern 406 displays the first hold-display subject to be notified in the normal mode at the time of starting winning a prize, and then displays the first target-notify at the timing of the first hold shift. Change the hold display to a special mode, change the first hold display to be notified in blue at the timing of the second hold shift, and change the timing of the third hold shift The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the time of the shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift. After the target first hold display is displayed in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notification target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold of the target is displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. Change the display to blue, change the first hold display to be notified in red at the timing of the third hold shift, and change the first hold display to be notified in red in the active shift timing The change pattern 408 is the first hold, the second hold, and the third hold after the first hold display subject to notice is displayed in blue when the start prize is received. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the shift, and the first hold display of the notification target is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 409 is the start winning prize. Sometimes the first hold display for the advance notice is displayed in blue, and the first hold display for the advance notice remains unchanged in the blue form at the first and second hold shift timings. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a red form and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in a red form at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in blue, the first hold display to be notified is changed in blue in the timing of the first hold shift. Without changing, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red form at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern 411 is a change pattern that does not change. The first hold display of the notice target is displayed in blue when the start winning is received, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 412 is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in red in the second and third hold shift timings and the active shift timing. After displaying the hold display in red, the timing of the 1st, 2nd and 3rd hold shifts, the timing of the active shift Also grayed is without changing the change pattern of the red aspect the first hold display notice object.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 401, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, the change pattern 405, the change pattern 406, the change pattern 407, the change pattern 408, the change pattern 409, the change pattern 410, the change pattern 411, and the change pattern 412. ing.

  FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the second change effect. When the first reserved memory number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning prize and it is decided to display the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005, (i ) The 1st to n-th sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the first hold storage number n at that time is displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is displayed as the sub-hold display 30TM004. Timing displayed in the active display area 30TM105 (timing at the time of starting winning), (ii) the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the starting win is the position where the change rank in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 is higher (sub-active display area 30TM105) Side)) (when n ≧ 2), and (iii) The display corresponding to the variable display based on the start prize at the timing when the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the dynamic prize is shifted to the secondary active display area 30TM105 (the timing when the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the start prize is displayed). Information (holding display or active display) may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

  In FIG. 11-6, the display mode (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to variable display is displayed at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. Is shown. In the change pattern shown in FIG. 11-6, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white star display, and “blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue star display. “Red” indicates a red aspect which is a red star display.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern for one reserved as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 601 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, being out of place or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined by The change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

  In the description of FIG. 11-6, the active shift means that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted from the sub-hold display area 30TM104 to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (as a result, the variation that is the determination target at the start winning prize) The secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display is displayed).

  Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901, which will be described later). After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 remains unchanged in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a blue mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or big hit) A determination value is assigned to each change pattern 603. The change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to advance notice is displayed in a blue color at the time of winning, and then the sub-holding display subject to advance notice is not changed in the blue state at the timing of active shift.

  Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, change patterns 902 described later). In the case of ˜905), after the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in a blue state.

  When the determined final display mode is a red mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 603, the change pattern 604, and the change pattern 605, respectively. The change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is displayed in a blue color at the time of start winning, and then the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to a red color at the timing of active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to advance notice is displayed in red when winning a prize, and then the sub-holding display subject to notice is kept red in the active shift timing.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the secondary active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, change patterns 902 described later). In the case of ˜905), after the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 changes from the blue color to the red color. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708 to be described later, change patterns 805 to 808, and change pattern 906. In the case of ˜912), after the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in a red state.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved data shown in FIG. 11-6 (B). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 701 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, being out of place or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). The change pattern 701 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of the start winning prize, and does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern which does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode.

  When the determined final display mode is a blue mode, a change pattern 701, a change pattern 702, and a change pattern 702, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 703 and the change pattern 704, respectively. The change pattern 702 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, but at the active shift timing. The change pattern 703 is a change pattern that changes the sub-holding display for the notice target to a blue mode. The change pattern 703 displays the sub-hold display for the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning a prize, and then at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 704 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display is changed to a blue mode, and the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After the display, the sub-hold display to be notified is displayed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift and the active shift. A change pattern remains unchanged at like.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, depending on the determination result at the start winning prize (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot), Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 703, the change pattern 704, and the change patterns 705 to 708, respectively. The change pattern 705 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, changes the sub-holding display subject to notice to the blue mode at the timing of the first holding shift, The change pattern 706 is a change pattern that changes the sub-holding display in red to the notice-target sub-hold at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-holding display subject to notice in blue in the start winning prize. The change pattern 707 changes the sub-holding display subject to notice to the red form at the time of active shift without changing the display in the blue form. After the display, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed to red at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift Is a change pattern that does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in the red mode in the ming, and the change pattern 708 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in red when the start prize is received, and the timing of the first hold shift, It is a change pattern which does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in the red mode at the timing of active shift.

  When the first reserved memory count stored in the first reserved memory count storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three holds shown in FIG. 11-6 (C). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 801 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, being out of place or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). The change pattern 801 is the second hold shift without changing the notice sub-hold display in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display for the previous notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the same, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the 802 to the change pattern 804. The change pattern 802 is the second hold shift without changing the notice sub-hold display in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after the sub-hold display for the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. Is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to a blue color at the timing of and the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the blue color at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 803 After the secondary hold display is displayed in the normal mode, the secondary hold display to be notified changes to blue at the timing of the first hold shift, and the secondary hold of the notification target is displayed at the second hold shift timing and active shift timing. The change pattern 804 is a change pattern that does not change in a blue state, and the change pattern 804 is a sub-holding display subject to notice at the time of start winning. After displayed in blue manner, first time, for the second time hold shift, a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display notice object at the timing of the active shift remains blue aspect.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 801, the change pattern 802, and the change pattern 801, the change pattern 802, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or big hit) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 803, the change pattern 804, and the change patterns 805 to 808, respectively. The change pattern 805 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then changes the sub-holding display subject to notice to the blue mode at the timing of the first holding shift, and the timing of the second holding shift Is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to a red form and the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to a red form at the timing of the active shift. Is displayed in blue, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift, but the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to red at the timing of the second hold shift. The change pattern 807 is a change pattern that does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in a red state at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the secondary hold display for the advance notice in blue when the start prize is received, the secondary hold display for the advance notice is changed to the red form at the timing of the first hold shift, the timing of the second hold shift, the active shift The change pattern 808 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in red at the timing, and the change pattern 808 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in red when starting winning a prize, and then the first and second hold shifts. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in a red state at the timing of the active shift.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved data shown in FIG. 11-6 (D). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 901 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). The change pattern 901 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the timing of the first, second, third hold shift, and active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 905 to 902. The change pattern 902 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of the start winning prize, and does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts. The sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to a blue color at the timing of the holding shift, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the blue color at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the secondary hold display for the advance notice in the normal mode, the secondary hold display for the advance notice is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the secondary hold for the advance notice is displayed at the second hold shift timing. The display is changed to blue, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is displayed in blue at the timing of the third hold shift and active shift. The change pattern 904 is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 904 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then changes the sub-holding display subject to notice to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift The change pattern 905 is a change pattern that does not change the secondary hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the blue state at the timing of the first, second, third hold shift, and active shift after being displayed in the mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a red mode, the change pattern 901 to the change pattern 905 are determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or big hit) In addition, determination values are assigned to the change patterns 906 to 912, respectively. The change pattern 906 displays the secondary hold display for the advance notice in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and the secondary hold display for the advance target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The sub-holding display for the notice target is changed to blue at the timing of the change, the sub-hold display for the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-hold display for the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 907 is a change pattern that does not change in the form. The change pattern 907 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal form at the time of the start winning, and then changes the sub-holding display subject to notice to the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift Change the timing of the second hold shift without changing the secondary hold display to be notified in the blue state at the timing of the second hold shift. The change target 908 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display for the advance notice is changed to a red form, and the sub-hold display for the advance notice is not changed in the red form at the timing of the active shift. Is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first holding shift, the sub-holding display subject to notification is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second holding shift, The change pattern 909 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display subject to notice is not changed in red at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift, and the change pattern 909 displays the sub-hold display subject to notice in blue in the start winning prize. After that, the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in blue at the timing of the first and second holding shifts. The sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to red at the timing of the eye-holding shift, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to remain red in the timing of the active shift. Sometimes the sub-holding display subject to notice is displayed in blue, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-display of the subject of notice is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display is changed to red and the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in red at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. After displaying the secondary hold display in blue, the secondary hold display subject to notice is red at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 912 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the red form at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified remains unchanged in the red mode at the first, second, and third hold shift timings and the active shift timing after the sub-hold display is displayed in red.

  As shown in FIG. 11C, the ratio at which the first change effect for displaying the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 in a display mode different from the normal mode is executed is the sub hold display 30TM004 or the sub active display 30TM005. Is higher than the ratio at which the second change effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11C, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of being a big hit is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

  In this way, at the lower part of the screen, the player with respect to the notice effect is executed by frequently executing the first change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 with high visibility. Can sustain interest. On the other hand, regarding the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 having low visibility, since the ratio of the big hit differs depending on whether or not it is displayed at the top of the screen, the player Attention is paid to whether or not the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are displayed. Furthermore, whether or not the display mode changes when the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are displayed because the expectation of jackpot when the second change effect is executed is higher than the first change effect. Will also pay attention to.

  In the present embodiment, a round or triangular icon (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the bottom of the screen and a star icon (second hold display 30TM004 or subactive displayed at the top of the screen). The size and shape of the display 30TM005) are different. That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to the common hold storage and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions on the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) is displayed in a round shape, and the other icon (second hold display 30TM004 or subactive display 30TM005) is displayed in a star shape. Thus, the feature of each icon is clarified so that the player can easily grasp the difference (that is, different types of display information). Moreover, the effect by the icon corresponding to a change display can be diversified, and an interest can be improved.

  In addition, the common display color corresponding to the common variable display, such as the relationship between the red first hold display 30TM001 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red display sub hold display 30TM004 displayed at the top of the screen. Icons may be displayed at the same time (however, the icons are different for round and star shapes). Thereby, the variable display which is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first hold display area 30TM101 and the sub hold display area 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect are displayed. It becomes easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the target variation display.

  Further, a common display color icon corresponding to the variable display being executed, such as the relationship between the red active display 30TM003 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red secondary active display 30TM005 displayed at the top of the screen. (However, the icons are different for round and star shapes). This makes it easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the variable display during execution.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the big hit expectation differs depending on the combination of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub hold display 30TM004 (for example, in the red mode) The combination of the first hold display 30TM001 and the red-type sub-hold display 30TM004 has the highest jackpot expectation), and the player is interested in both of the hold display modes. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production that changes the aspect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11C, the jackpot expectation differs depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub-active display 30TM005 (for example, the gold-colored active display 30TM003 and the red-colored display). (The combination of the secondary active display 30TM005 has the highest expectation level for big hits), and the player is interested in both aspects of the active display, and enhances the interest of the effect of changing the display aspect of the active display. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the first change effect is displayed). When displayed, the display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is taken over during active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. Thereby, the player can be interested in how the first hold display 30TM001 changes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the secondary hold display 30TM004 is shifted to the secondary active display area 30TM105 (when the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the second change effect is displayed). ), The display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is taken over during active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. Thus, the player can be interested in how the secondary hold display 30TM004 changes.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown to FIGS. 11-3, regarding the active display 30TM003 with high visibility, more display modes are provided than the sub-active display 30TM005 with low visibility. As shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the change pattern when changing the aspect of the first hold display 30TM001 with high visibility changes the form of the sub hold display 30TM004 with low visibility. More change patterns are provided. In this way, the first change effect and the second change effect can be prevented while changing the type of the executable effect and the effect pattern depending on the visibility of the active display and the hold display, and preventing the effect from becoming excessively complicated. Appropriately enhance the interest of change production.

(Specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9. FIG. 11-7 is a time chart when both the first change effect and the second change effect are executed. FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9 show both the first change effect and the second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when performing.

  First, in FIG. 11-8 (1), the display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols on the image display device 5 is started at the timing T1 shown in FIG. (Variation display) is being executed. At this time, a normal mode active display 30TM003 (white round display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and a normal mode first hold display 30TM001 (white round display) is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Is displayed. At this time, the secondary hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed. Further, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Then, when the image display device 5 is performing variable display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (2) (timing T2 shown in FIG. 11-7), a new prize is awarded. It is assumed that a start winning for the ball device 6A has occurred and the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start prize that is the determination target (in this example, the gold mode) When the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the second change effect is determined to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning that is the determination target The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the remaining number of variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

  In addition, based on the decision to execute the second change effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal active secondary active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the secondary active display area 30TM105, and the secondary active display 30TM105. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbol (first special symbol) currently being executed. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, four sub-hold displays 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-7 and FIG. 11-8 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning (first reserved memory) that occurs after this is prohibited. During the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, the first hold display 30TM001 that is the target of the first change effect is displayed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 that is the target of the second change effect is displayed. ), The period until the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 (the sub hold display 30TM004) ends (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-7).

  As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the normal first hold display 30TM001 (white round display) corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. The first hold display in the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, the special mode, the blue mode, or the red mode) within the period. In addition, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, the presence / absence of execution of the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020, and the process of step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding secondary hold display 30TM004 and secondary active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  In addition, not only in such a form, when a new start winning occurs within the prohibited period of change effects, the normal mode secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning can be displayed, The display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first reserved memory number is 4 based on the start winning prize, the fourth first reserved display 30TM001 and the secondary reserved display area 30TM104 displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101 are displayed. The displayed fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (3), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side. At the same time, the subactive display 30TM005 displayed in the subactive display area 30TM105 is erased. The secondary hold display 30TM004 displayed in the secondary hold display area 30TM104 is shifted and displayed one by one on the secondary active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the normal first hold display 30TM001 displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 of the normal mode that was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. It will be.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (5), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display region 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display region 30TM103 side, The secondary active display 30TM005 displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the secondary hold display (the normal secondary display 30TM004 (white star display)) displayed in the secondary hold display area 30TM104 is 1 One by one on the side of the secondary active display area 30TM105 It was collected displayed in the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-7), the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first hold display of the notice target is changed from the special form to the blue form (the first hold display 30TM001b which is a blue round display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-holding display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (sub-holding display 30TM004b which is a blue star display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (7), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display region 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display region 30TM103 side, The secondary active display 30TM005 displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the secondary hold display (normal secondary display 30TM004 (white star display) and blue display) displayed in the secondary hold display area 30TM104. Sub-holding display 30TM004b (blue star shape Shown)) shifts the display one by one sub active display area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-7), the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue form to the red form (the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red round display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-holding display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (sub-holding display 30TM004c which is a red star display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (9), the decorative display variable display is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (10) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001c (red round display) in red mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed on the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is erased, and the sub-hold display (red-type sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. In the image display device 5 with a shift display To start the display of the change.

  Then, after the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed), the CPU 120 for effect control is displayed. Within the period from T7 to T8 of 11-7, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display region 30TM103. Note that a change pattern for changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. Further, when changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggesting effect described later may be executed.

  If the secondary active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the secondary active display 30TM005 is finally displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105 within the period from T7 to T8 in FIG. 11-7. Change to aspect. For example, when the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 determined at the time of winning the start is a red mode and the secondary active display 30TM005 is displayed in a blue mode immediately after the shift display, The sub active display 30TM005 is changed from the blue mode to the red mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 11-7), the same decorative design (“7” in this example) is stopped in the left design display area and the right design display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect is displayed in which the characters “reach !!” are displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, in the area where the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103 overlap. Here, since the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, it is prevented that the visibility of the reach effect is lowered and the interest is lowered. can do. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the change display of the advance notice target ends (until the timing indicated by T9 in FIG. 11-7).

  As described above, as the reach effect is executed at the lower part of the screen, the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 that share at least a part of the display area with the area where the reach effect is executed are not displayed. On the other hand, regarding the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display that are displayed in an area different from the area where the reach effect is executed, the period during which the reach effect is being executed can be continuously displayed at the top of the screen. The player can see them. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the number of reserved memories during the execution period of the reach effect, and can grasp the display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display.

(Specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example in the case where it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of starting winning will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-12. 11-10 is a time chart when only the first change effect is executed, and FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an effect image.

  First, FIG. 11-11 (1) is started when the first reserved memory number is 3 and the image display device 5 displays the variation of the left, middle and right decorative symbols (T1 timing shown in FIG. 11-10). (Variation display) is being executed. At this time, a normal mode active display 30TM003 (white round display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and a normal mode first hold display 30TM001 (white round display) is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Is displayed.

  Then, when the image display device 5 is performing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (2) (timing T2 shown in FIG. 11-10), a new prize is awarded. It is assumed that a start winning for the ball device 6A has occurred and the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start prize that is the determination target (in this example, the gold mode) And the change pattern (this example change pattern 407) of the 1st change production is determined. Further, in this example, it is assumed that it is decided not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 (so that the second change effect is not executed). At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the remaining number of variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed based on the determination at the time of starting winning. Also, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning (first reserved memory) generated after this is prohibited. The execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect is from when the first hold display 30TM001 that is the target of the first change effect is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 ends. This is a period (period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-10).

  As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the normal first hold display 30TM001 (white round display) corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. The first hold display in the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, the special mode, the blue mode, or the red mode) within the period. In addition, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, the presence / absence of execution of the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020, and the process of step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding secondary hold display 30TM004 and secondary active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  In addition, not only in such a form, when a new start winning occurs within the prohibited period of change effects, the normal mode secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning can be displayed, The display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first reserved memory number is 4 based on the start winning prize, the fourth first reserved display 30TM001 displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101 is subject to the advance notice by the first change effect. This is a hold display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the normal first hold display 30TM001 displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (first hold display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (5), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display region 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display region 30TM103 side to display the image display device In step 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the special form to the blue form (first hold display 30TM001b which is a blue round display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (7), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display region 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display region 30TM103 side to display the image display device In step 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue form to the red form (first hold display 30TM001c which is a red round display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (9), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (10) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 (the first hold display 30TM001c in red form (red round display)) is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the image display device 5 performs the next change. Start displaying.

  Then, after the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed), the CPU 120 for effect control is displayed. Within the period from T7 to T8 of 11-10, in the active display region 30TM103, the red-colored active display 30TM003c is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 11-10), the same decorative design (“7” in this example) is stopped in the left design display area and the right design display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect is displayed in which the characters “reach !!” are displayed at the bottom of the screen, that is, in the area overlapping the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the change display of the notice target is completed (until the timing indicated by T9 in FIG. 11-10).

  As described above, when it is determined that only the first change effect is to be performed at the time of the start winning prize, the period until the variable display that is the target of the first change effect ends is a new start prize. The first change effect based on is not executed, and the second change effect based on a new start prize is not executed. Thus, after changing the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 in the first hold display area 30TM101 with high visibility (after changing to a mode different from the normal mode), a new start prize is subsequently generated. Even in this case, by not performing the second change effect based on the new start prize in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 with low visibility, the player is made to pay attention to the first change effect with high visibility. Complicated effects due to the execution of the second change effect for the variable display that is different from the variable display that is the target of the one change effect is prevented.

  In the present embodiment, if a new start prize occurs after the first change effect is executed (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although the example which prohibits execution of the 1st change effect and 2nd change effect corresponding to a start winning prize was shown, not only in such a form but after execution of the 1st change effect (the 1st hold display 30TM001 is a normal mode. If a new start prize is generated during a period displayed in a different manner, the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the new start prize can be executed, but at that time The execution ratio of the first change effect and the second change effect may be lowered than before the first change effect is executed (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

  In addition, when a new start winning occurs after the execution of the first change effect (period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), not only the second change effect but also other notices You may make it restrict | limit execution of production. For example, the number of remaining fluctuation displays until the fluctuation display based on the new start winning is executed is displayed on the image display device 5 every time the fluctuation display is executed (for example, the first reserved storage number is changed from 3 to 0). (With “1” subtraction, “3”, “2”, “1”, “0” are displayed) The countdown effect may not be executed. Further, the background change effect for changing the background image to the special mode may not be executed until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new start prize is generated after execution of the first change effect (a period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although the example which prohibits execution of both the 1st change effect and 2nd change effect corresponding to a start winning prize was shown, not only in this form but after execution of a 1st change effect (1st hold display 30TM001 is normal. When a new start prize is generated during a period displayed in a mode different from the mode), the first change effect corresponding to the new start prize can be executed, but the new start prize is supported. The second change effect is not executed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start prize is not displayed, or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start prize is displayed. As the display mode remains unchanged at the normal mode) as may be.

(Modification regarding first change effect and second change effect)
In the above embodiment, the aspect is changed at the timing when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted in the first change effect, and the aspect is changed at the timing when the sub hold display 30TM004 is shifted in the second change effect. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed according to the execution of the first hold action effect acting on the first hold display 30TM001, and the second hold display 30TM004 is acted on. The mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may be changed according to the execution of the sub-hold action effect.

  11-13, FIG. 11-14, and FIG. 11-15 are specific examples in the case where the first holding action effect is executed in the first change effect and the sub-holding action effect is executed in the second change effect.

  First, FIG. 11-13 (1) shows a state in which the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is being executed on the image display device 5 with the first reserved memory number being three. At this time, a normal mode active display 30TM003 (white round display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and a normal mode first hold display 30TM001 (white round display) is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Is displayed. At this time, the secondary hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed. Further, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  When the image display device 5 performs the variable display of the left middle right decorative design, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (2), a new start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start prize that is the determination target (in this example, the gold mode) When the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the second change effect is determined to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning that is the determination target The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the remaining number of variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

  In addition, based on the decision to execute the second change effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal active secondary active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the secondary active display area 30TM105, and the secondary active display 30TM105. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, four sub-hold displays 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

  In this example, since the first reserved memory number is 4 based on the start winning prize, the fourth first reserved display 30TM001 and the secondary reserved display area 30TM104 displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101 are displayed. The displayed fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (3), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (4), the production control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and also displays the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold display 30TM001 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side. At the same time, the subactive display 30TM005 displayed in the subactive display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the subhold display area 30TM104. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted and displayed one by one on the side of the sub-active display area 30TM105, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the normal first hold display 30TM001 displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 of the normal mode that was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. It will be.

  Here, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display to be notified from the normal mode to the special mode (during the execution of the variable display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect). In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001a) which is a white triangle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first holding action effect and determines the type of the first holding action effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the first holding action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the first holding action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13 (4), the character A appears, and the effect of throwing the ball toward the first hold display 30TM001 to be notified is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the target first hold display 30TM001, the player can expect the aspect of the first hold display 30TM001 to change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (5), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display of the notice target from the normal mode in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect A). The mode is changed to the first hold display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display in this example. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (6), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and the first display displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 as shown in FIG. 11-13 (7). The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub display displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The active display 30TM005 is erased, and the sub-hold display (normal-type sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side by one. In the image display device 5 To start the next variable display.

  Here, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display to be notified from the special mode to the blue mode (during the execution of the variable display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001b) which is a blue round display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first holding action effect and determines the type of the first holding action effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears.

  Further, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the sub-holding display to be notified from the normal mode to the blue mode (this example) during execution of the variable display based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect. Then, it is recognized that the sub-hold display 30TM004b), which is a blue star display, is changed. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-hold action effect and the type of sub-hold action effect (character type) to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) in which the character a appears is decided to be executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect B) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13 (7), the character B appears and an effect is performed in which the ball is thrown toward the first hold display 30TM001a to be notified. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first hold display 30TM001a to be notified, the player can expect the aspect of the first hold display 30TM001a to change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (8), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display to be notified from the special mode to the blue color according to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect B). The mode is changed to the first hold display 30TM001b which is a blue round display in this example.

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-hold action effect (action effect a) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14 (9), the character a appears, and the effect of flying the balloon toward the sub-holding display 30TM004 to be notified is executed. As shown in FIG. 11-14 (10) and FIG. 11-15 (11), the balloon that the character a flew flies toward the sub-holding display 30TM004 to be notified and reaches the position of the sub-holding display 30TM004. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the aspect of the secondary hold display 30TM004.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (11) and (12), when a balloon arrives at the position of the secondary hold display 30TM004 to be notified, the secondary hold display 30TM004 has a balloon shape (second hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image (sub-holding display 30TM004G) in which the balloon is broken is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (13) and (14), the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-holding display subject to the notice in the normal mode in response to the execution of the sub-holding action effect (action effect a). To a blue mode (sub-holding display 30TM004b which is a blue star display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-14 (15), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and also displays the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display region 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub display displayed in the sub active display region 30TM105 is displayed. The active display 30TM005 is erased, and the subpending display (the subpending display 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode) and the subpending display 30TM004b (blue star display in the blue mode) displayed in the subpending display area 30TM104 )) One by one secondary active table Shifted displayed in the area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display to be notified from the blue mode to the red mode (during the execution of the variable display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect). In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001c) which is a red round display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first holding action effect and determines the type of the first holding action effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that the first holding action effect (action effect C) in which the character C appears is decided to be executed.

  In addition, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the sub-holding display subject to notice during the execution of the variable display from the blue color to the red color (this example) based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect. Then, it is recognized that the sub-hold display 30TM004c), which is a red star display, is changed. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-hold action effect and the type of sub-hold action effect (character type) to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) in which the character b appears is decided to be executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first holding action effect (action effect C) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 11-15 (17), the character C appears and an effect is performed in which the ball is thrown toward the first hold display 30TM001b to be notified. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first hold display 30TM001b to be notified, the player can expect the aspect of the first hold display 30TM001b to change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display to be notified from the blue mode to the red color in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect C). The mode (first hold display 30TM001c which is a red round display in this example) is changed.

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-hold action effect (action effect b) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-15 (19), the character b appears, and the effect of flying the balloon toward the sub-holding display 30TM004b to be notified is executed. As shown in FIG. 11-15 (20) and FIG. 11-15 (21), the balloon blew by the character b flies toward the sub-holding display 30TM004b to be notified and reaches the position of the sub-holding display 30TM004b. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the aspect of the secondary hold display 30TM004b.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (21) and (22), when the balloon arrives at the position of the secondary hold display 30TM004b to be notified, the form of the secondary hold display 30TM004b is balloon-shaped (second hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image (sub-holding display 30TM004G) in which the balloon is broken is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (23) and (24), the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in a blue mode in response to the execution of the sub-holding action effect (action effect b). To a red color (sub-holding display 30TM004c which is a red star display in this example). .

  In this way, the production mode is different between the first holding action effect executed when the mode of the first hold display is changed and the sub-holding action effect executed when the mode of the sub-hold display is changed. Thus, it is possible to further enhance the interest by the presence of a plurality of types of hold correspondence display (first hold display and sub hold display).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-13 to 11-15, the effect that the character appears and performs an action on the icon may be executed when the display mode of the active display is changed. Further, it may be executed when the display mode of the sub-active display is changed. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode, the display of the active display 30TM003 is performed in response to the execution of the active action effect in which the character A appears and throws the ball toward the active display 30TM003. The mode may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (special mode, blue mode, green mode, red mode, gold mode). Further, when the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-active action effect that performs the action of flying the balloon toward the sub-active display 30TM005 when the character a appears is executed. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). As described above, the active action effect executed when changing the aspect of the active display and the sub-active action effect executed when changing the aspect of the sub-active display are different from each other in the effect form. It is possible to further enhance the interest by the presence of the fluctuation corresponding display (active display and sub-active display).

  In said embodiment, according to the present setting value (1-6) regarding the pachinko machine 1, you may make it the execution rate of a 1st change effect, and the execution rate of a 2nd change effect differ. For example, compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the ratio where the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher when the set value is high (4 to 6). In addition, the ratio at which the secondary hold display 30TM004 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (or the ratio at which the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 itself are displayed) may be high. In addition, when the set value is high (4 to 6) compared to the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the number of changes in the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 is larger (for example, 3 times). ) A change pattern may be selected at a high rate, and a change rate at which a change pattern of the display color of the secondary hold display 30TM004 is large (for example, 2 times) may be selected at a high rate.

(Active change effect and change suggestion effect)
In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning is generated. However, as described above, the display mode of the active display during the active shift is the final display mode. If they are different, an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is executed.

  Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed), and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. A change suggestion effect suggesting that there is a possibility of change can be executed. In this change suggestion effect, there are a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the change mode suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to change the failure mode. When the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed.

  When performing an active shift accompanying the start of variable display, the effect control CPU 120 has a different display mode of active display at the time of active shift and a final display mode of active display determined when a start winning is generated. In this case, by executing the active change effect and the change suggestion effect during the execution of the variable display, the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode within the variable display period.

  In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern for changing the active display from the display mode at the time of the active shift to the final display mode when the variable display is started. FIGS. 11-16 is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the table for determining the change pattern of active display. In this embodiment, determination values are assigned to the special mode, the blue mode, the green mode, the red mode, and the gold mode as the final display mode of the active display. In addition, the display of “◯” in FIG. 11-16 indicates that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the display of “?” Indicates that the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. ing.

  When the active display during the active shift is in the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal mode active display change pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), in the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode, when the final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 100%. Judgment value is assigned. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 011 is 2 times, of which the success mode is 1 and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 011, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the active mode is changed to the special mode by executing the change mode suggestion effect of the success mode, and then the change mode of the failure mode is executed and executed. It is a change pattern which does not change a display with a special mode.

  When the final display mode is a blue mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 40%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 012 and the change pattern 013 is 3 times, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 012, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the active mode is changed to the special mode by executing the change mode of the successful mode, and then the change mode of the successful mode is executed and the active mode is executed. The change pattern 013 is a change pattern in which the active display is not changed in the blue mode by changing the display to the blue mode and then executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, and the change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift. After that, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the failure mode change indication effect is executed to keep the active display in the special mode, and then the success mode change. It is a change pattern in which the suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a blue mode.

  When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015 is 4 times, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 014, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the active mode is changed to the special mode by executing the change mode of the successful mode, and then the change mode of the successful mode is executed and executed. Change the display to the blue color, then execute the change suggestion effect of the successful mode to change the active display to the green color, and then execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to keep the active display in the green color The change pattern 015 is the change pattern 015, in which the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, and then the change mode of the successful mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the change mode of the successful mode is suggested. To change the active display to blue, and then execute the change suggestion effect of failure The active display without change from blue aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display in green mode.

  When the final display mode is a red mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 017 with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 016 and the change pattern 017 is 5 times, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 016, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to execute the active mode. Change the display to the blue aspect, then execute the change suggestion effect of the success aspect to change the active display to the green aspect, then execute the change suggestion effect of the success aspect to change the active display to the red aspect, After that, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to change the active display in the red mode, and the change pattern 017 displays the active display in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode. To change the active display to a special mode, and then execute a change mode suggestion for the successful mode The active display is changed to the green mode by changing the active display to the blue mode, and then the active mode is changed to the green mode. It is a change pattern that changes the active display to the red mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the successful mode after that.

  In addition, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 018 is 5 times, of which the success mode is 5 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 018, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication effect of the successful mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the change indication effect of the successful mode is executed and activated. Change the display to the blue aspect, then execute the change suggestion effect of the success aspect to change the active display to the green aspect, then execute the change suggestion effect of the success aspect to change the active display to the red aspect, It is a change pattern that changes the active display to the golden mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the successful mode after that.

  When the active display during the active shift is in a special mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the special mode active display change pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 11-16 (B). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), in the active display change pattern determination table for the special mode, when the final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a probability of 100%. Judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 021 is executed twice, of which the success mode is 1 and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 021, after the active display is displayed in a special mode at the time of the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change indication effect of the failure mode is executed to activate It is a change pattern which does not change a display with a blue mode.

  When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 022 and the change pattern 023 is 3 times, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 022, after the active display is displayed in a special mode at the time of active shift, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change indication effect of the success mode is executed and activated. The change pattern is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed in the green mode. The change pattern 023 displays the active display in a special mode at the time of active shift. After that, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change indication effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display in the blue mode, and then the change of the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern in which the suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a green mode.

  When the final display mode is a red mode, determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 20%. In the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025, the change suggestion effect is executed four times, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 024, the active display is displayed in a special manner at the time of active shift, and then the success indication change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a blue appearance, and then the success indication change indication effect is executed to execute the active indication. Change the display to the green mode, then execute the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the red mode, and then execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to keep the active display unchanged in the red mode The change pattern 025 displays the active display in a special manner at the time of the active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the blue mode, and then changes the suggestion of the success mode. To change the active display to green, and then execute the change suggestion effect of failure Without changing the active display stays green aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display red manner.

  In addition, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 026 is four times, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 026, after the active display is displayed in a special manner at the time of the active shift, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to execute the change. Change the display to the green mode, then change the active display to the golden mode by executing the change mode of the successful mode and the active mode to the red mode It is a pattern.

  When the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue color, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the blue color as shown in FIG. 11-16 (C). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (C), in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the green mode. Judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 031 is executed twice, of which the success mode is 1 and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 031, after the active display is displayed in a blue mode at the time of the active shift, the active mode is changed to the green mode by executing the change mode indicating the success mode, and then the change mode indicating effect of the failure mode is executed. It is a change pattern which does not change a display with a green mode.

  When the final display mode is a red mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 032 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 033 is selected with a probability of 20%. In the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033, the number of executions of the change suggestion effect is three times, of which the success mode is two times and the failure mode is one time. In the change pattern 032, the active display is displayed in a blue mode at the time of the active shift, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a green mode, and then the success mode change indication effect is executed to execute the active mode. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed in the red mode. The change pattern 033 displays the active display in a blue mode during active shift. Thereafter, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change indication effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display in the green mode, and then the change of the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern in which the suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a red mode.

  In addition, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 034 is selected with a probability of 100%. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 034 is executed three times, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 034, after the active display is displayed in a blue mode at the time of active shift, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to execute the active mode. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a red color and the active display is changed to a gold color by executing a change suggestion effect of a successful mode.

  When the active display at the time of active shift is in a red color, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the red color as shown in FIG. 11-16 (D). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (D), in the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode, the change pattern 041 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the gold mode. Judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 041 is executed once, of which the success mode is 1 and the failure mode is 0. The change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which an active display is displayed in a red color during an active shift, and then a change suggestion effect in a successful mode is executed to change the active display to a gold color.

  As shown in FIG. 11-16, within one fluctuation display period (in this example, since the display mode of active display changes to the final display mode before the reach state is established, the reach display is started after the fluctuation display is started. In the period until the state is established), the more the change suggestion effect is executed, in particular, the more the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the more the display color is changed to a high hit expectation degree. The ratio is high.

  Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage where the n-th change suggestion effect is executed, the higher the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode so far, the higher the ratio at which the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect is executed. It is configured as follows. For example, in the stage where the second change suggestion effect is executed (in the case of n = 2), the third change suggestion effect is always executed when both are successful. If one of the two times is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed. The same applies when n = 3 and n = 4. As described above, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the more the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the successful mode executed within the period from the start of the change display until the reach state is established, the more the same change occurs. Since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed within the display period (within the period from when the variable display is started to when the reach state is established) is high, the player can perform the change suggestion effect execution number, particularly the success mode. Attention will be paid to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect, thereby improving the interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the larger the ratio of [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode has been executed] to [the number of times the change suggestion effect has been executed] within the one variable display period, the higher the jackpot expectation. The rate of change to a higher display mode is higher. Specifically, [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode / the number of executions of the change display effect] is 1/2 when the final display mode is a special mode, and the final display mode is a blue mode. 2/3 in the case, 3/4 when the final display mode is the green mode, 4/5 when the final display mode is the red mode, and the final display mode is the gold mode. In this case, it is 5/5. As described above, the larger the [number of executions of success suggestion effect / the number of executions of change suggestion effect] is, the higher the ratio that the active display changes to the display mode with a high expectation degree of big hits. Will also pay attention to the relationship between the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, thereby improving the interest.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the ratio which changes to a display mode with a high jackpot expectation degree is so high that the frequency | count that a change suggestion effect of a success mode is performed continuously increases. Specifically, the number of success mode change suggestion effects is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is blue, and when the final display mode is green. 2 or 3, 3 or 4 when the final display mode is a red mode, and 5 when the final display mode is a gold mode. Thereby, the player is interested in whether or not the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed and how many times it is continuously executed.

  Further, in this example, when the final display mode is the same display color, a change pattern with a larger number of success mode change suggestive effects is easily selected. For example, in the case of the blue color, the change pattern 012 (2 continuous) is selected more than the change pattern 013 (not continuous). In the green color, the change pattern is higher than the change pattern 015 (2 continuous). 014 (3 continuous) is selected at a higher rate, and in the case of a red color, the change pattern 016 (4 continuous) is selected at a higher rate than the change pattern 017 (3 continuous). Thus, even when the same display color is finally obtained, the player's expectation can be further enhanced by making the change suggestion effect of the success mode easy to continue.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and the change suggestion effect mode (success mode or failure mode) based on the change pattern shown in FIG. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of change suggestion effect based on whether the change suggestion effect is a success mode or a failure mode and whether or not the next change suggestion effect is executed. decide. As the type of change suggestion effect, change suggestion effect A in which character A appears, change suggestion effect B in which character B appears, change suggestion effect C in which character C appears, change suggestion effect D in which character D appears, and character There is a change suggestion effect E in which E appears.

  When the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a successful mode and the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect is executed in the change pattern determined at the start winning prize, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Select the table of “Success Mode, Next Direction Execution”. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, next effect is executed], character A is 10%, character B is 20%, character C is 30%, character D is 40%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned to be selected by probability.

  When the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a successful mode and the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect is not executed in the change pattern determined at the start winning prize, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Select the table of “Success mode, no next execution”. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, no next effect execution], character A is 5%, character B is 15%, character C is 30%, character D is 45%, and character E is 5%. Judgment values are assigned to be selected by probability.

  When the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a failure mode and the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect is executed in the change pattern determined at the start winning prize, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Select the table of “Failure mode, next execution”. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, next effect is executed], character A is 37%, character B is 32%, character C is 30%, character D is 1%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned to be selected by probability.

  When the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a failure mode and the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect is not executed in the change pattern determined at the start winning prize, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Select the table of failure mode, no next production execution. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, no next effect execution], character A is 35%, character B is 30%, character C is 30%, character D is 5%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned to be selected by probability.

  For each change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect based on the change suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. Therefore, when the nth and n + 1th change suggestion effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the nth change suggestion effect, and all the characters A to E in the n + 1th change suggestion effects are selected. May be selected. That is, when the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears at the nth time is executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears at the n + 1th time may be executed, while the n + 1 There is a possibility that a change suggestion effect A in which the same character A appears in the nth time is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify change suggestion effects.

  As shown in FIG. 11-17, the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears has a low probability of becoming a success mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, and the change suggestion effect in which the character D appears. D has a high probability of becoming a success mode, but has a low probability of executing the next change suggestion effect. Further, the change suggestion effect E in which the character E appears has a probability of 100% as a success mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is 0%. Therefore, for the player, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is low, but the expectation that the next change suggesting effect will be executed is high. When the character D is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is high, but the expectation that the next change suggesting effect will be executed is low, and the character E is displayed on the screen. In this case, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the next change suggestion effect is not executed (the current change suggestion effect is the last).

  In this way, since the rate of change of the display mode of active display to a mode with a high expectation degree of jackpots varies depending on the type of character appearing in the production, the player pays attention to which type of character appears Will do. Further, since the rate at which the next change suggesting effect is executed differs depending on the type of character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears.

  It should be noted that the production type is not limited to the production type shown in FIG. 11-17. For example, an production type may be provided in which the rate of change of the display mode of the active display is low and the rate of execution of the next change suggesting production is low. An effect type with a high rate of change of the display mode of display and a high rate of execution of the next change suggesting effect may be provided.

(Specific examples of active change effects and change suggestion effects)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-18 to 11-20. 11-18, FIGS. 11-19 (9) to (12), and the example of presentation shown in FIG. 11-20, the presentation control CPU 120 decides that the final display mode is set to the golden mode at the start winning prize. In addition, when the active shift mode is determined to be the normal mode, and the variable display based on the start winning is started, the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 018. . Further, in the effects shown in FIGS. 11-18 and FIGS. 11-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the final display mode is green when the effect control CPU 120 is at the start winning prize. Example of determining that the mode at the time of active shift is to be the normal mode and determining that the change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 014 when starting the variable display based on the start winning It is.

  In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears with respect to the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is determined to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on what is performed, and it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the execution of the change suggestion effect of the character D. The change suggestion effect D is determined to be executed, and the change suggestion effect D of the success mode is determined to be executed based on the execution of the fifth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect E of the success mode in which the character E appears with respect to the effect.

  In FIG. 11-18 (1), the active display 30TM003 (white round display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the left, right and right decorative symbols are displayed on the image display device 5 in a variable manner. It shows the state.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect A of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the first change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1), the character A appears from the right side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character A performs the action of throwing the ball toward the active display 30TM003 is displayed. As shown in -18 (2), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character A has hit the active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the explosion of the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (3), in response to the end of the first change suggestion effect, the active display 30TM003a (white triangle display) in a special mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. .

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect B of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the second change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), the character B appears from the left side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character B performs the action of throwing the ball toward the active display 30TM003a is displayed. As shown in -18 (5), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character B has hit the active display 30TM003a is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003a in the special mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (6), in response to the end of the second change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the blue-type active display 30TM003b (blue round display). The

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect C of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the third change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (7), a character C appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image is displayed in which the character C performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003b. As shown in FIG. 11-18 (8), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character C has hit the active display 30TM003b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the blue-colored active display 30TM003b is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (9), in response to the end of the third change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the green active display 30TM003d (green round display). The

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect D of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image is displayed in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (11), the effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D hits the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (12), in response to the end of the fourth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the red active display 30TM003c (red round display). The

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect E of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the fifth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which cracks are formed on the transparent member (glass plate or the like) constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. . Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in a form in which the crack range is enlarged is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (15), an image (screen split image 30TM210) in a mode in which the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is broken is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen. An effect image in which the character E performs an action of throwing the ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003c is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (16), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character E has hit the active display 30TM003c is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the red-colored active display 30TM003c is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (17), in response to the end of the fifth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays an active display 30TM003e (golden circular display) in a golden manner. The

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (18), the screen split image 30TM210 displayed on the image display device 5 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 11-20 (19), the left symbol display area and the right symbol are displayed. The reach state where the same decorative design (in this example, “7”) is stopped is established in the display area, and the reach “Leach!” Is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). Production is performed. Here, as described above, at the timing when reach is established, the gold-colored active display 30TM003e is not displayed, and the square frame indicating the active display region 30TM103 is also not displayed. The information that has not been displayed is not displayed until the variable display of the notice subject is completed.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 11-18 and FIGS. 11-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the production control CPU 120 determines the final display mode to be the green mode at the start winning prize. In addition, when the active shift mode is determined to be the normal mode, and the variable display based on the start winning is started, the active display change pattern is determined to be the change pattern 014. .

  In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears with respect to the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears in relation to the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the fact that the character C appears in relation to the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the execution of the change suggestion effect of the character D. Changes suggested effect decided to run a D, and it is assumed that the fifth variation suggest effect is decided to execute the changes suggested effect D failure mode based on the not executed for.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 11-18 (1) to 11-19 (9) (the first change suggestion production to the third change suggestion production) are the same as the production examples of the change pattern 018 described above. Will be described, and examples of effects shown in FIGS. 11-19 (10) and (20) to (22) will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the failure suggestion change suggestion effect D in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image is displayed in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (20), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D has not hit the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 is continuously displayed with the active display 30TM003d in the green mode, and the above-described effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed. An effect image in which the ball rolls toward the lower right of the screen is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (21), when the fourth change suggestion effect is completed, the active display 30TM003d in green mode is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change before the execution of the fourth change suggestion effect (after the end of the third change suggestion effect).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (22), the reach state in which the same decorative symbol (in this example, “4”) is stopped is established in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach effect is displayed in which the characters "" are displayed at the bottom of the screen (an area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). Here, as described above, since the active display area 30TM103 is not displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, the green-colored active display 30TM003d is not displayed until the fluctuating display of the notice target ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-18 (1) to 11-20 (19), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the variable display of the left middle right decorative symbol on the image display device 5. The change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) according to the change pattern. Then, when the execution of the change suggestion effect for a predetermined number of times is completed, the same decorative design is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area, and the reach state is established. In other words, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect a predetermined number of times, the image display device 5 temporarily stops the left, middle and right decorative symbols, changes the direction of the variable display, and changes the reach state. Do not establish. According to such a configuration, during the period when the change suggestion effect of a predetermined number of times according to the change pattern is executed, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol does not change, so that the change suggestion effect can be paid more attention.

  In addition, although FIG. 11-16 shows the change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode does not continue, the change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode continues may be provided without being limited to such a form. . Further, a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed more than the change suggestion effect of the success mode may be provided. For example, after a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed three times in succession, a change pattern in which a success mode change indication effect is executed twice may be provided. Moreover, although the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed at least once, an effect pattern that does not change the display mode of the active display by not executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode once may be provided.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11-16 and the like, the display mode of the active display does not change when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, and the active display always changes when the success mode change indication effect is executed. Although an example in which the display mode changes has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a successful mode change suggestion effect is executed, it is active at a higher rate than when a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed. The display mode may change as long as the display mode is changed. For example, even if a successful mode change suggestion stage is executed, an effect pattern that does not change the active mode display mode may be provided. Even if the suggestion effect is executed, an effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes may be provided.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11-16 and the like, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is a display mode with a high degree of jackpot expectation (from the normal mode to the special mode, from the special mode) In this example, the blue mode, the blue mode is changed to the green mode, the green mode is changed to the red mode, and the red mode is changed to the golden mode). May be provided with a change pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the green mode, from the blue mode to the gold mode, etc., in which the expected degree of jackpot is higher by two or more stages. Further, the rate of change of the display mode in two or more stages may be different depending on the type of change suggestion effect to be executed (for example, the type of character that appears). When the display mode is executed, the rate of change of the display mode is two or more levels is low. When the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed, the rate of change of the display mode is set to two or more levels. Also good. Further, when a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears is executed, the display mode may be changed in three stages.

  In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect may be executed at a timing before the decorative symbol temporarily stops. Specifically, when the decorative symbol display is performed based on a variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation to be re-varied after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped is executed one or more times, before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. You may make it perform the change suggestion effect of a success mode. For example, when n temporary stops are executed, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed before each temporary stop (the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed n times), and thereafter By executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, it may be suggested that the n + 1-th temporary stop is not executed. An effect pattern in which only the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed when the change display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the change pattern in which the pseudo continuous change is not executed even once. May be provided. Further, when the decorative symbol variation display is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation is performed for a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, n + 1 times), the change suggestion effect of the success mode of n + 1 times is continuously performed. An effect pattern that is executed and does not execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode may be provided.

  In such a configuration, the change suggestion effect is started in a state where the decorative design is not temporarily stopped (a character appears), and the change suggestion effect is ended before the decorative design is temporarily stopped (character It is preferable to perform an action to change the display mode of the active display. For example, immediately after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started, the character A appears and performs an action to change the display mode of the active display from the normal mode to the special mode, and then the first temporary stop is performed. After the re-variation starts, the character B appears and takes action to change the display mode of the active display from the special mode to the blue mode. Thereafter, the second temporary stop is performed and the second re-variation occurs. After the start, the character C may appear and perform an action so that the display mode of the active display changes from the blue mode to the green mode. In this way, it is possible to focus attention on the change suggestion effect by ensuring that the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol (that is, the period during which the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is changed) do not overlap. In addition, it is possible to prevent the effect of rendering when the decorative design temporarily stops.

  In addition, when executing the effect of changing the decorative display variation display direction from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, the change suggestion effect is started in a state where the decorative design is displayed in the vertical direction (a character appears). It is preferable to end the change suggestion effect (change the display mode of the active display by performing the action of the character) before changing the decorative symbol change display direction to the horizontal direction. For example, the first character appears and actions are performed immediately after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started, and the display mode of the active display is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then the variable display direction of the decorative pattern is changed from the vertical direction. After changing in the horizontal direction, the next character may appear and perform an action so that the display mode of the active display changes from the blue mode to the red mode. In this way, by not overlapping the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the timing at which the change display direction of the decorative pattern changes, it is possible to focus attention on the change suggestion effect and to display the decorative pattern change display. It is possible to prevent the production effect when the direction changes from being lowered.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the change suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes is shown, but the change suggestion effect is not limited to such a form, It may be an effect suggesting that changes. For example, the change pattern shown in FIG. 11-16 may be a change pattern when the display mode of the hold display is changed. When the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed. When the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not be changed.

  In the above embodiment, in both cases of the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the appearing character is the same action (the effect that acts on the active display or the hold display, for example, the ball However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, but in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, while the character that has appeared performs an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display In the failure mode change suggestion effect, the appearing character may not perform an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. It should be noted that the action performed by the appearing character may be different between the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode. For example, in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, the active display or the hold display to be changed is changed. The action of throwing the ball in the direction (effect that acts on the active display or hold display) is performed. In the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the action of throwing the ball in a direction different from the active display or hold display (active display or hold display) You may make it perform the production which does not act.

  In the above embodiment, as the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode executed within a predetermined period from when the variable display is started until the reach state is established, the next change suggestion effect within the predetermined period is increased. The ratio of execution is high, and the higher the ratio of the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect executed within the predetermined period, the higher the jackpot expectation degree is shown . However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and from the start of the change of the decorative pattern to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (a combination of decorative patterns or a pseudo continuous pattern that will be re-variable (pseudo-continuous) after temporary stop). It may be a period, or may be a period from when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped to when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped again after the decorative symbol is changed again (that is, a period between pseudo-continuations). Note that the predetermined period may be a period from the start of decorative pattern variation until the first left middle right decorative symbol first stops. It may be a period until the final stop.

  In the above embodiment, when a plurality of change suggestion effects are executed, there may be a plurality of patterns of periods from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect. For example, when the interval from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect is long, the rate of success of the next change suggestion effect is higher than that when the interval is short, and the jackpot expectation May be high. Further, in the case where a large number of change suggestion effects are executed, the interval may be gradually shortened, and the jackpot expectation may be gradually increased accordingly. According to such a form, when the player has finished one change suggestion effect, whether or not the next change suggestion effect is executed and the interval until the next change suggestion effect is started. Become interested and improve interest.

  In said embodiment, according to the present setting value (1-6) regarding the pachinko game machine 1, you may make it the ratio which changes the display mode of an active display differ. For example, compared to the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the case where the set value is high (4 to 6) has a higher ratio of the display mode of the active display being different from the normal mode. You may do it. Further, when the set value is high (4 to 6) compared to the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the number of changes in the display color of the active display is larger (for example, 3 times or more). The ratio at which the pattern is selected is high, that is, the ratio at which the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, or the ratio at which the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous may be high. Further, when the set value is higher (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3), a change suggestion effect of a specific type (for example, an effect in which a character X having a low appearance frequency appears). The rate at which is executed may be increased.

[Other examples of power-on processing]
Next, another example regarding power-on processing will be described.
FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3 are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 and FIG. -11 and FIGS. 9-43 to 9-44 and processes corresponding to the processes shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2. However, some of the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like (for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11) are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1330 in FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 in FIG. 9-43, and a parity check is performed as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value, for example, any one of 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are regular values, and six setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like. The setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like. The setting value 5 in this example corresponds to the setting value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

  Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine manufacturer (before being installed in the game hall), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is stored in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is broken, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether a setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode is changed to a setting changing mode described later (step S21TM4580) and cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not the RAM clear (game state initialization) is determined to be executed. When the value is 1, the RAM clear is determined to be executed. It has been shown. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be.

  The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. For this reason, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag when the power is restored is 0 (initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the gaming state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  On the other hand, if clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opened. A detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and a detection signal indicating that the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects a detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected for the gaming control microcomputer 100, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a. When the detection signal indicating that this is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 By inputting the detection signal, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. The setting value can be confirmed and changed when the setting change mode is entered, and the setting value can be confirmed when the setting confirmation mode is entered.

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change ( If the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), Or confirmation is possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is selected? Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later.

  In the present embodiment, in order to obtain a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed although the change of the setting value is not permitted, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2 ) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state are necessary. The CPU 103 can check the set value when it is confirmed that both of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070 (setting check) Mode). In addition to the conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). On the condition that this is done, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, as will be described later.

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated in order to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and is operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has an abnormality or some illegal The setting value may be confirmed or changed by the means. In such a state, since it is inappropriate to allow the setting value to be confirmed or changed, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. In addition, neither the setting change mode nor the setting change mode is controlled.

  In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is possible to control, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Even if the glass door frame 3a is in an open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in an open state, a setting confirmation mode and a setting change mode Any of these may be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), step S21TM4760, which will be described later, is controlled without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Move to (Send Setting Command).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120. In the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. In the setting change flag check (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

  Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, NO is determined in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. In addition, in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. If the setting change mode was controlled when the previous power failure occurred, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that a setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

  In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). .

  If lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). And the process after step S21TM4510 relevant to setting change mode shown to FIGS. 12-2 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned on at step S21TM4130 (NO at step S21TM4130), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not turned on at step S21TM4140 (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. Setting value error To send over command to effect control for the CPU120.

  When receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message “Setting value may be abnormal” is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to switch to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power supply is temporarily turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off). To notify the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (to confirm the set value). For example, a message “Please turn on the power after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode” is displayed. Note that similar notification may be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) until the power is cut off.

  In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character “E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, etc., “the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5). Although there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (all being judged as YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not established and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. Notification is made (step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit provided corresponding to the gaming machine, or a calling lamp device). Is done.

  During the loop processing, the letter “E” is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a 4 ms weight, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the mode has not been changed to the setting change mode.

  The loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change ( That is, when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on, and when it is determined as YES in step S21TM4030), the game should not be performed in this state, Before moving to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing and special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 9-14), the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to a normal value. It is necessary to let Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to make the setting value changeable (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are necessary. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the setting value can be changed ( It is possible to shift to the setting change mode.

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value in the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if it is determined NO in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process described above (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).

  If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), it is not possible to shift to the normal game process. Don't be. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Thus, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value in the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

  The CPU 103 determines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance when any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied. You may make it prompt to make a power supply OFF state by making it light-emit in a power-off instruction | indication mode.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value change is not permitted but the setting value can be checked (setting check mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

  However, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state. Even if the two conditions are satisfied (YES in step S21TM4130), the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO) The game is controlled to be in a game stop state (loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) without being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3. In the process of FIG. 12B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value (any one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). When a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 sets “0” having the lowest jackpot probability as the regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, control goes to a step S21TM4530.

  Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530), and then executes a power-off process (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power outage is input, and if a power-off signal is input, Immediately before it becomes impossible to operate due to the stop, the power supply stop process is executed. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

  Thereby, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the repetition process of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or the repetition process of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is performed) When the disconnection occurs, the data check is appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after the power supply is restored.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display a value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1-6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0-5) stored in the set value storage area. The game shop clerk normally recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, so if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as it is, the game shop clerk actually There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is not executed after completion of the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode), the CPU 103 designates that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (in this case, the setting change mode), the CPU 103 changes the set value. A setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility of being present is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. For this reason, if a power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting changing flag is set to 1 (set state) at the next power-on.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that control has been performed in the setting change mode (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting switch information indicating whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

  If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

  Every time the game shop clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the control is changed to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on or when the previous power cut occurs) is 3. If there is a setting change, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 and the display monitor 21TM029 is updated accordingly. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

  Here, it is possible to execute display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650), but transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) And the update of the setting value (step S21TM4620) are equivalent to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes in steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (determined as NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag) Is controlled to be 0).

  In addition, the current setting value display (step S21TM4550) and security signal output (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the setting change mode command transmission (step S21TM4590) and the setting value update (step S21TM4620) can be executed. This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed.

  In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). The RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is cut off. When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can set the setting change mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. When the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  In step S21TM4680, CPU 103 confirms whether lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state or not. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the process after step S21TM4540 is repeated after waiting for 4 ms again (step S21TM4530). That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control in the setting confirmation mode is continued. If the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control in the setting change mode is continued.

  If lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). When the predetermined time is set as the value of the security signal timer, the value of the security signal timer is changed from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output processing (step S21TM1670 in FIG. 9-14) when the normal game processing is subsequently performed. Until then, the security signal is continuously output. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and when the game signal reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode is ended or the setting confirmation mode is ended.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (1), in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, output of a security signal is started (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and setting confirmation are started. In response to the end of any control in the mode, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed since the end of any control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

  Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is executed as a common process. In addition, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also performed regardless of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is executed as a common process. In this way, security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control when controlled in the setting change mode and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. , The control burden can be reduced.

  Also, security signal output is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may be controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, a common value (1000 ms) is used for the security signal when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The timer is set. However, if both security signal output start control and output end control are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, any mode is set on the external device side. It will be difficult to know if it has been controlled.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once set in step S21TM4710. After 1000 ms is set as the timer value, 30000 ms is reset (overwritten) as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after the RAM is cleared based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. Yes. That is, the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, and then the remaining output period of the security signal is reset to 30 sec (overwritten).

  When the signal output control described above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is the end of the setting check mode when the setting check mode is controlled as shown in FIG. 12-4 (2). 1 sec has elapsed, and when the setting change mode is controlled, 30 sec has elapsed since the setting change mode was completed.

  Specifically, when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interruption after the interruption is permitted. In the processing (for example, the information output processing in step S21TM1670 shown in FIG. 9-14), when the security signal output is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled ( In the case where the RAM is cleared and the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), a game control timer interrupt process after interrupt permission (for example, in FIG. 9-14) In the indicated step S21TM1670 information output process), the security signal timer value is changed to security from 30000 ms to 0 ms. It will be to continue the output of the I signal. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode or when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set to a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before the transition to the game control timer interrupt processing. The output of the security signal may be continued until 0 ms until the game control timer interrupt processing is completed after the output of the security signal.

  As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec when the setting confirmation mode control is finished and when the setting change mode control is finished, and the setting change mode is controlled. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the setting change mode control is completed. With such a configuration, the security signal output period can be made different between the case where the setting check mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled while sharing the security signal output control.

  As a result, in the external device, it is also possible to grasp whether the initialization check process has been executed and the setting check mode has been controlled, or the initialization process has been executed and the control mode has been changed to the setting change mode. . For example, if the security signal output period is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to specify that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the security signal output period is 30 seconds or more, the initial state It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that control processing has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

  Note that a security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. A security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

  Here, when the setting check mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 is not executed), so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is initialized in the signal output process. The security signal can be continuously output for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to limit the security signal output period to a period until one second elapses from the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 is executed). The anomaly detection flag is cleared (it is unknown whether an anomaly was detected at the time of power failure), and as a result, the security signal output period ends the setting change mode Is a period until 30 seconds elapse (period corresponding to execution of RAM clear).

  In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 12-2, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. The value of the security signal timer to be set to suffices to be at least a period in which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, the common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

  After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power change occurs after the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any one of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if the mode is not controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed, and the setting command is transmitted.

  Here, the player normally recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and the value specified by the set command (value stored in the set value storage area) is directly displayed on the effect control CPU 120 side as an image. If displayed on the display device 5, the player may erroneously understand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the setting value (1 to 6), An effect that suggests a set value is executed in a range.

  Not only in such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1-6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0-5) stored in the setting value storage area in the setting command, and effects control It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. Thereby, the range of the setting value designated by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the setting values (1 to 6) designated by the setting command are displayed on the image display device 5 as they are, or an effect suggesting the setting values (1 to 6) designated by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be notified or suggested appropriately. Further, it is not necessary to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command on the effect control CPU 120 side, and the control burden on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

  As described above, the production control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

  If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step In step S21TM4020, it is determined that the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). Therefore, it is only necessary to execute processing at the time of power-off recovery without clearing the RAM.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the same processing as that after step S21TM1340 shown in FIG. 9-13. Specifically, the processing of step S21TM1340 to step S21TM1370 and step S21TM1480 to step S21TM1540, that is, the processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal at power-on is executed, and after interrupt permission, FIG. The game control timer interrupt processing (including special symbol process processing and the like) shown in FIG. That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is 0 based on the value of the RAM clear flag. Without executing the clear, a backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power-off recovery (step S21TM1370), and the process proceeds to the normal game process.

  Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 has recovered from the power-off based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed) )). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9, recovery from the power interruption is performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. (RAM clear is not performed) can be notified.

  On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute processing at the time of power-on accompanied by RAM clear.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes processing similar to that after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear processing) shown in FIG. 9-13. Specifically, steps S21TM1410 (RAM clear process) to step S21TM1460, the process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer described above (step S21TM1465), and the process of steps S21TM1480 to step S21TM1540, that is, the backup RAM at power-on. The processing when the area data check result is abnormal may be executed, and after interruption permission, the game control timer interruption processing (including special symbol process processing, etc.) shown in FIG. .

  As illustrated in FIG. 12C, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, hold memory, etc.) is cleared to the initial value. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clearing process. In addition, for each set value, an area in which each aggregate value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a linkage ratio, a role ratio, and a base is stored is not cleared. The value is not changed from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of a counter value for generating a random number for determination per normal symbol) may be left as it is.

  The reason for not clearing the setting value stored in the setting value storage area in this RAM clearing process is as follows. (A) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a normal value is stored in the setting value storage area when the power is turned on. (B) When controlled to the setting change mode, the value in the setting value storage area has been set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or in the setting change mode. This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear process, it is impossible to control the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the set value storage area.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random symbol counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and the like are flags that are selectively processed according to the control state. The initial value is set.

  After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In a game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the big hit determination in the special symbol process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or at the end of the setting change mode) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 performs the initialization process based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM is cleared without being recovered from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9, the game state has been initialized (when power supply is stopped). Based on the data, it is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without being recovered from the power interruption.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). Thereby, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. become. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). The security signal timer value is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting check mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is equal to the one second set in step S21TM4710. It remains.

  When the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, a security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (see FIG. 9-14). After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed with the permission of interrupt, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. The security signal output is stopped at the timing.

  Then, CPU 103 executes setting processing of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21 described above). In addition, communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). For example, the CPU 103 performs processing according to a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt permitted state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interruption process (FIGS. 9-14) shifts to a normal game process that can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit. The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this example, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is switched to the power-off recovery process (the process after step S21TM1340), but not limited to such a form. If it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or glass Depending on the state of the door frame 3a, the process may be shifted to the process at the time of power-off restoration (the process after step S21TM1340).

  In this example, if the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is shifted to the process at power-on (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process when the power is turned on (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

  As described above, a game clerk or the like turns the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the gaming state and the like (to execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the game state and the like. Can not be initialized (NO in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the game shop clerk can select whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is to be controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state and the like. Yes.

  As described above, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, the setting value is unstable because it was controlled to the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the setting value to be determined on the game hall side is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process (step S21 TM4030: YES) based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 (loop processing) can be controlled, and a security signal is output corresponding to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (game control timer interrupt processing is executed), and when the power is turned on, It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when disconnection occurred.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, the CPU 103 determines the condition for shifting to the setting change mode (YES in step S21TM4030) based on the setting changing flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030). When all of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES), a setting value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) and the display monitor is in a game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the letter “E” on 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM4210).

  In the example shown in FIG. 12-5, by displaying the letter “E” on each of the 7-segment display devices 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the game store clerk (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power supply has been cut off in the controlled state). The presentation control CPU 120 that has received the set value abnormality error command displays a message “Please turn on the power again and shift to the setting change mode after power is turned off” on the image display device 5, thereby To change the set value by switching to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off). Notification to urge the user to perform (set the set value) is performed.

  In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“turn the power on again after power off”) Please change to the setting change mode ").

  Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has been controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ) Can be notified that the set value can be changed. For example, a message “Setting change mode is in progress” and a message “Please change the setting value by performing setting change operation” can be displayed on the image display device 5. Thereby, the clerk of the game hall can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and the set value stored in the set value storage area by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed to the scheduled setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, so that the setting value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii) If any of the above conditions is not satisfied, the control is not performed in the setting change mode, but is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after the setting value abnormality error command transmission (step S21TM4190). . As a result, error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power is turned off”). To change to the setting change mode ").

  In this way, error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and message display on the effect control board 12 side (“turn on power again after power off”) ”) Is also performed, the game machine status is set to the setting change mode after the power is restored even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the game shop clerk, etc. are not controlled in the setting change mode, and know that the game is stopped (the power must be turned on again to control the setting change mode). Is possible. Accordingly, after turning off the power supply once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the scheduled setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game process.

  Thus, when a power interruption occurs in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

  Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed. Thus, the mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode, and an unnecessary error display can be avoided to promptly change the set value.

  On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the power cannot be changed to the setting changing mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting changing mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) Will be done. Thereby, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

  When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i ) To (iii) may not be established, and a different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

  For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the setting value may be abnormal and has been shifted to the setting change mode (or the condition for shifting is satisfied). When the CPU 120 for effect control receives the command, the message “Setting value may be abnormal” and the message “Automatically controlled in the setting change mode” are displayed as images. It may be displayed on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process proceeds to the normal game processing, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. In response to the change (from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting switch (clear switch) ) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) sets based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Although it is not controlled in either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “The operation of the lock switch has been detected.” Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “Setting changeover switch operation detected” is executed. As a result, the game shop clerk clearly understands that the operation for changing the setting value was performed even though it was not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Can be confirmed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process proceeds to the normal game process. The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for checking the set value is not checked. As a result, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

(Modification of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 12A, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the RAM has been cleared, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

  Not only in such a form, but as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the setting changing flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without confirming whether it is established or not (step S21TM4570, NO).

  In the processing shown in FIG. 12-6, if the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If it is determined (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether or not the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied (step S21TM4150). The part controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled by the game stop state (the process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the process shown in FIG. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3.

  Even in this case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power interruption occurs during the change.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12-6, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. And (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, and is controlled to the setting change mode (determined NO in step S21TM4570). If the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting values in the setting value storage area can be changed (YES in step S21TM4030). Regardless of whether the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

  As described above, when the power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. Regardless of whether or not is established, the setting change mode is automatically controlled, so that the workability for determining the set value can be improved.

  If the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is performed even if the condition that (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. (Step S21TM4610 to Step S21TM4620 in FIG. 12-2).

  As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is that the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the store clerk who has performed the setting value changing operation once confirms the set value and ends the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

  As described above, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) and when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode is set. The conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (operation for switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode, Appropriately shift to normal game processing.

  Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), a notification for urging the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned on may be issued. good. For example, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a set value abnormality error command (to the above-described step S21TM4190). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, “Turn on the lock switch once and switch it off after changing the set value”. The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In the processes shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3 and FIG. 12-6, it is impossible to shift to the normal game process when the setting change flag is set. Therefore, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, it is impossible to play a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to make sure that the setting value is changed to the setting change mode and the setting change operation is performed and the setting value is confirmed.

(Set value storage control when power failure occurs while changing set values)
Next, the setting value storage control when the power interruption occurs during the setting value change will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 12-2 and FIG. 10-2 described above, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. It will change itself.

  First, regarding the control in the case where the power is turned off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by changing the setting value during the setting change mode, FIG. Explanation will be made using -7 (1).

  As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to be controlled in the setting change mode. In this example, when the power is turned on, “0” is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value “0” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and the read setting value is set to 1. “1” is added to the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “0” based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from “1” to “1”, and “2” obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state. Furthermore, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “1” based on the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from “2” to “2”, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed, the power is cut off. At this time, the setting value storage area is in a state where the setting value “2” after the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated is stored. In the power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to be controlled in the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as a setting value. This set value “2” is a value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the occurrence of power interruption during the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in the order 7, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and the read setting value is set to 1. "3" is added to the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 12-6 is applied, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

  In this way, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power switch is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored. The setting value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, there may be a setting value that has already been scheduled. Thus, the workability can be improved because the gaming machine may be shifted to the normal game processing.

  Next, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode is finished) during the setting change mode, the setting value is changed. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  Order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting change mode ends. Accordingly, the setting value “2” after the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated is determined as the final setting value. At this time, “2” is stored as a setting value in the setting value storage area, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the determined setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  Thereafter, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that an operation for turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) and controlled to the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as a setting value. This set value “2” is a value that is finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in order 8, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1. "3" is added to the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  As shown in FIGS. 12-7 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode is finished. In any case, when the power supply is restored, the setting value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area immediately before the power is turned off is The set value is valid (the set value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

  The setting value storage control shown in FIG. 9-37 described above may be applied instead of the setting value storage control shown in FIG. 12-7. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting change switch (clear switch) is controlled when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area (overwritten) to confirm the setting value based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state). May be. In this case, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1-6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0-5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes in accordance with the change of the setting value stored in.

  With such a configuration, even when the setting change mode is controlled by turning on the power and a setting changing operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. When the operation for ending the change mode is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state) and the power is cut off, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is It has not been changed since the time of input (before the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned on last time is continuously held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the previous power-on. It becomes a value according to the set value.

  In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine a set value when a power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode. In addition, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

  The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment is provided with a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5), and for game machines having different jackpot probabilities according to the setting values. Although it is applicable, the present invention is not limited to this, and although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting value (for example, all of the setting values 0 to 5) It can also be applied to a gaming machine whose jackpot probability is 1/300.

[Explanation regarding the feature 35TM]
Next, a gaming machine provided with the characteristic portion 35TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-20. The gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1 includes one image display device, but the gaming machine may include a plurality of image display devices. In the example of FIG. 13A, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as a first image display device and a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a second image display device. Further, the movable body 32 described above includes a first logo panel 35TM410 and a second logo panel 35TM420, which are decorative bodies having optical transparency.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having two image display devices shown in FIG. 13A, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 that is the first image display device corresponds to the image display device 5 shown in FIG. It is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. That is, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays information that can be displayed on the image display device 5 described above. For example, a background image of a decorative design is displayed and variable display of the decorative design is executed. Further, an effect image such as a notice effect accompanying variable display of the decorative design is displayed. The main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays a hold display and an active display (variable display compatible display).

  In addition, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the second image display device is provided below the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. On the front side (player side) of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the downward movement end are arranged. The sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays an image for changing the mode (for example, emission color) of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 having light transparency, an image imitating a 7-segment display, and the like. It is possible.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the remaining time until the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) is executed by the image imitating the 7-segment display, the jackpot expectation (for example, the victory expectation in the battle effect) It is possible to notify the player of the numerical value indicating the degree, the suggestion effect (for example, the elapsed time from the start of the music reach effect that reproduces the music when the reach state is established), and the like. The numerical values shown by images imitating these 7-segment displays are images related to effects (including variable display of decorative symbols) executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and are executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is an image related to the production time.

  The first logo panel 35TM410 is driven in the vertical direction by the first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510, and the second logo panel 35TM420 is driven in the vertical direction by the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520. Hereinafter, a logo panel including a main liquid crystal display 35TM200, a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a first logo panel 35TM410, a first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510, a second logo panel 35TM420, a second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520, and the like. The drive mechanism 35TM001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-2 to 13-4.

(Logo panel drive mechanism)
13-2 shows the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001, FIG. 13-2 (a) is a front view of the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001, and FIG. 13-2 (b) is a diagram of P in FIG. It is an arrow view. FIG. 13C is a view on arrow Q in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-3, the logo panel drive mechanism 35 TM 001 is arranged near the center of the game area on the game board 2. FIG. 13-2 (a) shows a state in which both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the lower moving end and overlap with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction. ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 13-2 (b) and 13-3, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is below the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and on the front side (player side) of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. Has been placed. The main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are both rectangular in front view, and the width and height of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are larger than the width and height of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  When the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the downward movement end, they are spaced apart from the front surface of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by the same distance and arranged in parallel on the left and right. The first logo panel 35TM410 is disposed on the left side of the front surface of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the second logo panel 35TM420 is disposed on the right side of the front surface of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. That is, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged at positions overlapping the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300 in the front-rear direction.

  The width and height when the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged in parallel are substantially the same as the width and height of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Therefore, when viewed from the player, when the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the downward movement end, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is covered with the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. Looks like you are.

  The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate. On the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, the contour of the character information “FEV” and the contour of the character information “ER!” Are formed by forming the unevenness, respectively. For example, in a transparent synthetic resin plate, the character portion (the portion surrounded by the outline of the character) is formed thin, and the other portions are formed thick, so that the translucency of the character portion is improved. It is comprised so that it may become higher than light nature.

  In addition, instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, a transparent synthetic resin plate made of a material such as a colored and opaque synthetic resin and formed in accordance with the contour of the character You may make it attach. In addition, the first logo panel is made of a plurality of materials having different translucency so that the translucency of the material of the character part (the part surrounded by the outline of the character) is higher than the translucency of the material of the other part. 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 may be formed.

  Thus, by making the translucency of the character part higher than the translucency of the other parts, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (the first logo) located behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. When the panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are moved to the upper production position, among the information displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200) located behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, Positions corresponding to the character portions of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 (area surrounded by the outline of “FEV”, area surrounded by the outline of “ER!”) The information displayed in is more visible than the information displayed at the position corresponding to the other part.

  The first logo panel 35TM410 can be moved in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a) by the first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510. Further, the second logo panel 35TM420 is movable in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a) by the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520. The first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510 and the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520 have the same structure and are arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of FIG. 13-2 (a).

  The first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510 includes a first rack 35TM511, a first pinion 35TM512, a first motor 35TM513, a first support plate 35TM514, and the like. The second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520 includes a second rack 35TM521, a second pinion 35TM522, a second motor 35TM523, a second support plate 35TM524, and the like. The first rack 35TM511 is fixed to the left side surface of the first logo panel 35TM410, and the second rack 35TM521 is fixed to the right side surface of the second logo panel 35TM420. The first rack 35TM511 and the second rack 35TM521 are formed in a rectangular column shape elongated in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a).

  The first support plate 35TM514 and the second support plate 35TM524 are formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the vertical direction of FIG. Guided by a first guide 35TM515 integrally formed on the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514, the first rack 35TM511 is movable in the vertical direction of FIG. Similarly, the second rack 35TM521 is movable in the vertical direction in FIG. 13A by being guided by a second guide 35TM525 integrally formed on the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524.

  A first motor 35TM513 and a second motor 35TM523 are attached to the back surfaces of the first support plate 35TM514 and the second support plate 35TM524, respectively. The first pinion 35TM512 fixed to the output shaft of the first motor 35TM513 meshes with the first rack teeth 35TM511A formed on the left side surface of the first rack 35TM511. Similarly, the second pinion 35TM522 fixed to the output shaft of the second motor 35TM523 meshes with the second rack teeth 35TM521A formed on the right side surface of the second rack 35TM521.

  As described above, the production control board 12 is connected to the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 as movable bodies, and the operations of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are the production control board. 12 (production control CPU 120).

  Specifically, a first motor 35TM513 for driving the first logo panel 35TM410, an origin detection sensor 35TM519 for detecting whether or not the first logo panel 35TM410 is positioned at the downward movement end, that is, the origin position. (Photo sensor), a second motor 35 TM 523 for driving the second logo panel 35 TM 420, and an origin detection sensor 35 TM 529 for detecting whether the second logo panel 35 TM 420 is positioned at the downward movement end, that is, the origin position. (Photo sensor) is connected, and the operations of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are controlled by controlling the operations of the first motor 35TM513 and the second motor 35TM523. CPU 120) can be individually controlled Together, the first logo panel 35TM410, second logo panel 35TM420 is whether positioned at the origin position (initial position), the performance control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) can be sensed.

  When the production control CPU 120 rotates the first motor 35TM513, the first logo panel 35TM410 fixed to the first rack 35TM511 moves in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a). Similarly, when the production control CPU 120 rotates the second motor 35TM523, the second logo panel 35TM420 fixed to the second rack 35TM521 moves in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a).

  The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 can be moved independently in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a), and both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 can be moved simultaneously. It is possible to move upward or downward in FIG.

  A plate-like first contact member 35TM516 and second contact member 35TM526 are fixed to the lower ends of the first rack 35TM511 and the second rack 35TM521, respectively. A first lower end stopper 35TM517 is fixed to the lower end of the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514, and a first upper end stopper 35TM518 is fixed to the upper end side of the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514. Similarly, a second lower end stopper 35TM527 is fixed to the lower end of the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524, and a second upper end stopper 35TM528 is fixed to the upper end side of the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524.

  When the first logo panel 35TM410 moves upward in FIG. 13-2 (a), the first contact member 35TM516 comes into contact with the first upper end stopper 35TM518 at the upward movement end of the first logo panel 35TM410, The logo panel 35TM410 stops at an accurate performance position at the upward movement end. When the first logo panel 35TM410 moves downward in FIG. 13-2 (a), the first contact member 35TM516 comes into contact with the first lower end stopper 35TM517 at the downward movement end of the first logo panel 35TM410. The logo panel 35TM410 stops at an accurate origin position (also referred to as an initial position or a retracted position) at the downward movement end. Whether or not the first logo panel 35TM410 is at the origin position is detected by an origin detection sensor 35TM519 (photo sensor).

  Similarly, when the second logo panel 35TM420 moves upward in FIG. 13-2 (a), the second contact member 35TM526 abuts on the second upper end stopper 35TM528 at the upward movement end of the second logo panel 35TM420. The second logo panel 35TM420 stops at an accurate performance position at the upward movement end. When the second logo panel 35TM420 moves downward in FIG. 13-2 (a), the second contact member 35TM526 comes into contact with the second lower end stopper 35TM527 at the lower movement end of the second logo panel 35TM420, and the second The logo panel 35TM420 stops at an accurate origin position (also referred to as an initial position or a retracted position) at the downward movement end. Whether or not second logo panel 35TM420 is at the origin position is detected by origin detection sensor 35TM529 (photo sensor).

  In the state of FIG. 13-2 (a), both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged at the origin position overlapping the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. On the other hand, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is in a state where the player can visually recognize the whole. However, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are formed of a light-transmitting material, the player can display the sub liquid crystal display via the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. It is possible to visually recognize the information of the device 35TM300.

  That is, the mode of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position changes according to the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. At this time, the character portion of “FEV” and “ER!”, That is, the portion where the outline for production is formed has higher visibility than the other portions, so that the player can clearly display the sub liquid crystal display. The display image of the device 35TM300 can be visually recognized, and the change of the image displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300 can be grasped more clearly.

  FIG. 13-4 is a front view showing a state in which both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are simultaneously moved to a position where the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the front and back overlap with each other. That is, in FIG. 13-4, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are simultaneously moved to the effect position, which is the upward movement end of FIG. 13-4, and the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel The panel 35TM420 is arranged at a position overlapping with the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction. At this time, the visibility of the lower portion of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is lowered, and the overall visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. The player can clearly see the information displayed on the entire sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Moreover, in this state, both aspects of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the production position change according to the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (particularly, the portion displayed at the bottom). become. At this time, regarding the character portion of “FEV” in the first logo panel 35TM410 and the character portion of “ER!” In the second logo panel 35TM420, the player is more clear in comparison with the other portions. The display image of the liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be visually recognized, and the change in the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be grasped more clearly.

  Although not shown, the first logo panel 35TM410 may be moved independently to a position overlapping the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction. That is, the first logo panel 35TM410 is moved to the effect position that is the upward movement end, and the first logo panel 35TM410 is arranged at a position overlapping the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front and rear. At this time, regarding the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the visibility of the lower left portion is lowered, and regarding the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the visibility of the left half is improved while the right side is improved. The visibility is reduced by half. While the player can clearly see the information displayed on the left half of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is difficult to clearly see the information displayed on the right half.

  In this state, the mode of the first logo panel 35TM410 at the effect position changes according to the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (particularly, the portion displayed at the lower left). Moreover, the aspect of the 2nd logo panel 35TM420 in an origin position changes according to the display image (particularly the part displayed on the right half) of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. At this time, regarding the character portion of “FEV” in the first logo panel 35TM410, the player can visually recognize the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 more clearly than other portions. It is possible to clearly grasp the change in the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. Regarding the character part of “ER!” In the second logo panel 35TM420, the player can more clearly see the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and more clearly compared to other parts. The change of the image displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be grasped.

  Similarly, although not shown, the second logo panel 35TM420 may be independently moved to a position overlapping the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction. That is, the second logo panel 35TM420 is moved to the effect position which is the upward movement end, and the second logo panel 35TM420 is arranged at a position overlapping the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front and rear. At this time, the visibility of the lower right portion of the main liquid crystal display device 35TM200 is lowered, and the visibility of the right half of the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300 is improved, while the left side is improved. The visibility is reduced by half. While the player can clearly see the information displayed on the right half of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is difficult to clearly see the information displayed on the left half.

  In this state, the mode of the second logo panel 35TM420 at the effect position changes according to the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (particularly, the portion displayed at the lower right). Further, the aspect of the first logo panel 35TM410 at the origin position changes according to the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (particularly, the portion displayed on the left half). At this time, regarding the character part of “ER!” In the second logo panel 35TM420, the player can visually recognize the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 more clearly compared to the other parts. The change of the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be grasped more clearly. As for the character portion of “FEV” in the first logo panel 35TM410, the player can visually recognize the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 more clearly than other portions, and more clearly The change of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be grasped.

  As shown in FIGS. 13-2 to 13-4, the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001 includes both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 between the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It can move at the same time or independently. That is, a plurality of patterns for moving the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 can be provided, and a plurality of patterns for changing the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be provided. Since it is possible, it becomes possible to diversify the production and improve the interest.

  Further, as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move from the origin position to the effect position, the screen visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved and the screen visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is lowered. To do. On the other hand, as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move from the effect position to the origin position (return to the origin position), the screen visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved, and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. The screen visibility is reduced.

  Thus, since the visibility of the different display means of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 changes in accordance with the displacement of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, which are decorative bodies, the decorative body And the visibility of each display means can be related, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Pseudo-continuous production)
As described above, the variation pattern is determined when the variation display of the special symbol is started by the game control microcomputer 100 (variation pattern setting process shown in S111 in FIG. 5). Here, when the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed one or more times is determined, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern command for designating the variation pattern displays the decoration based on the variation pattern in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. The pseudo-continuous effect is executed once or more during the symbol variable display period.

  Pseudo-continuous production is the display of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol within the period from when the decorative symbol variation display is started until the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped and the display result is derived and displayed. This is an effect in which the decorative design is temporarily stopped after being temporarily stopped. By executing the pseudo-continuous effect, it is as if the special symbol variation display is executed once, that is, within the decorative symbol variation display period based on one variation pattern command corresponding to one reserved memory. It is possible to make it appear as if the decorative pattern is displayed multiple times.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect shown in the present embodiment, a decorative design consisting of numerals is temporarily stopped in the left design display area and the right design display area, respectively, and then the character “NEXT” is displayed in the middle design display area. After the pseudo continuous symbol (in this example, the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 displayed as “NEXT” shown in FIGS. 13-9 (5) and 13-10 (10)) is temporarily stopped, The variation display of the decorative symbol in the display areas of the symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol is resumed (so-called re-variation is performed). Here, the “state in which the decorative design is temporarily stopped” is a state in which the decorative design does not stop completely and moves slightly up and down. There may be a state in which the decorative symbol is repeatedly enlarged or reduced, a state in which the decorative symbol is in a different form (deformed) from the last stop (when the symbol is determined), or the like.

(Countdown production)
In the present embodiment, when the decorative display is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 based on the change pattern accompanied with the pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous design is temporarily stopped in the display area of the middle design (re-change is performed). The sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 can execute a countdown effect informing the remaining time (until it is notified). Here, as will be described later, the pseudo-continuous effect is always executed when the countdown effect is executed, but the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed without executing the countdown effect.

  In the countdown effect in the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the sub liquid crystal is displayed at a timing when the remaining time until the pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area is 3 seconds. "3" is displayed on the display 35TM300, "2" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the remaining time is 2 seconds, and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is displayed when the remaining time is 1 second. “1” is displayed, and “0” is displayed at the timing when the remaining time becomes 0 seconds (the timing at which the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area). The remaining time until the decorative symbol temporary stop in the countdown effect is displayed as an image simulating a 7-segment display.

  Thus, as the time (seconds) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the countdown effect, first, “3” defined as the initial value is displayed. After that, the countdown operation is performed, so that the time (seconds) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 decreases by 1 every 1 second and reaches the final value of “0”. The pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area. That is, it is notified that re-variation is executed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the variable display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern with a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects and it is determined to execute the countdown effect, the count-down effects corresponding to the respective pseudo-continuous effects are performed. Will be executed. That is, the same number of countdown effects as the quasi-continuous effects are executed within one decorative pattern change display period based on one change pattern (holding storage).

  In this example, the initial value of the countdown effect is “3” regardless of the variation pattern and the display result. As a result, when “3” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the player immediately starts a countdown until a suggestion effect (in this example, a pseudo-continuous effect) with a high expectation degree of jackpot is executed. It is possible to grasp that.

(Expectation of expectation)
In this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined when variation display of the special symbol is started by the game control microcomputer 100 (variation pattern setting process shown in S111 in FIG. 5). At that time, there is a case where it is determined to be a fluctuation pattern with super reach. For example, in the variation pattern with super reach, after the reach state is established in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, a battle effect is performed in which a teammate character and an enemy character battle (FIGS. 13-11 (13) and (18)). When the final display result is a big hit (when the big hit symbol is confirmed and stopped), the teammate character performs a victory effect that wins the enemy character, and the final display result is lost (the lost symbol is fixed) In the case of stopping, a defeat effect is performed in which the teammate character loses to the enemy character.

  The expectation degree notice effect in the present embodiment is an effect of notifying the victory expectation degree (that is, the jackpot expectation degree) that the teammate character wins the enemy character in the battle effect. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), the numerical bar 35TM610 is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 after the reach state is established (after the start of the battle effect), and the entire width of the numerical bar 35TM610 is displayed. The ratio of the range of the colored portion to 0 (0 to 100%) suggests the degree of expectation of winning (expected degree of jackpot). The winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 is updated by 10 every 5 seconds after the initial value is indicated, and finally reaches the final value. When the winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 reaches the final value, the winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 is not updated even if 5 seconds have elapsed from that timing.

(Count-up production)
In the present embodiment, a count-up effect that displays a winning expectation degree as a numerical value (numerical value) can be executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in correspondence with an expectation notice effect that is executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. . Here, as will be described later, when the count-up effect is executed, the expectation notice effect is always executed, but when the expectation notice effect is executed without the count-up effect being executed There is also.

  In the count-up effect, the winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a two-digit numerical value (number). Therefore, the winning expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is updated by 10 every 5 seconds after the initial value is shown, and finally reaches the final value. When the expected win level (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value, the expected win level (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is not updated even if 5 seconds have elapsed from that timing. .

  Thus, the winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the winning expectation indicated by the numerical value in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 coincide with each other, and the winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 is Corresponding to the change from the initial value to the final value, the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 also changes from the initial value to the final value.

  The numerical value as the winning expectation displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is displayed as an image imitating a 7-segment display as in the case of the countdown effect. However, unlike the case of the countdown effect described above, there are a plurality of initial values and final values for the countup effect. Depending on the combination of these initial values and final values (ie, the change pattern), the jackpot expectation can be increased. It is different. Further, the display mode is made different depending on the expected win level (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. In this example, the expected win level (numerical value) is in the range of “50” to “70”. Is displayed in blue, and red is displayed in the range of “80” to “100”. Furthermore, when the winning expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value, the player is notified that the winning expectation has reached the final value by blinking the numerical value. I am doing so.

  In this way, as the winning expectation displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the count-up effect, first, values set as initial values (50 to 90 in this example) are displayed. Thereafter, a count-up operation is performed based on the determined change pattern (number of changes), whereby the winning expectation displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 increases by 10 every 5 seconds, and finally The final display mode is reached when the value (60 to 100 in this example) is reached. In other words, the final winning expectation (big hit expectation) is notified by the blinking numerical value.

(Direction decision processing at the start of fluctuation)
As shown in FIG. 5, in the special symbol normal process (step S110) of the special symbol process (step S25), the CPU 103 displays the display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol based on the random number value for determining the display result. The jackpot type in the case of “big hit” or “out of” and “big hit” is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the display result predetermined result.

  In the present embodiment, when the display result determined in advance is “displacement”, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern determination table for deviation shown in FIG. 13-6 (A). In this example, the decorative pattern variation display mode is not the reach mode, and the non-reach variation pattern and the decorative pattern variation display mode is the reach mode and the super reach effect (battle effect). ) Is executed, and a fluctuation pattern of deviation from the super-reach is provided. As the fluctuation pattern of the super-reaching deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super-reaching deviation (no pseudo-rendition) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed and the fluctuation of the super-reaching deviation (one pseudo-rendition) in which the pseudo-rendition effect is executed only once. There are provided a pattern and a fluctuation pattern in which the super-reaching effect is executed twice (pseudo-continuous twice).

  In the example of FIG. 13-6 (A), the non-reach shift pattern is determined at a rate of 90%, and the super-reach shift pattern (without pseudo-continuity) is determined at a rate of 5%. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined to be a deviation pattern (one pseudo-continuous), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined to be a deviation (two pseudo-continuous).

  In the present embodiment, when the display result determined in advance is “big hit”, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-6 (B). In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative design is the reach mode, and the super reach jackpot variation pattern where the super reach effect (battle effect) is executed is the super reach jackpot (no pseudo run) where the pseudo run effect is not executed. A fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern of a super reach big hit (pseudo-running once) in which a pseudo-continuous presentation is executed only once, and a fluctuation pattern of a super reach big hit (pseudo-running twice) in which a pseudo-continuous presentation is executed twice , Is provided.

  In the example of FIG. 13-6 (B), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach big hit (no pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 10%, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach big hit (one pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 40%. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a super reach big hit (2 pseudo-continuous runs) at a rate of 50%.

  As described above, when the super reach variation pattern is selected, the ratio of occurrence of big hits is higher than when the super reach variation pattern is not selected. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the percentage of occurrence of the big hit is higher than when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed only once. The ratio of occurrence of big hits is higher when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed twice. That is, the big hit expectation degree in the variation pattern of the super reach has a relationship of super reach (no pseudo-ream) <super reach (one pseudo-ream) <super reach (two pseudo-reams).

  In this example, an example in which the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed up to two times has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three or more times. May be. Further, the number of pseudo-continuous effects that can be selected only when a big hit occurs may be provided. For example, when the pseudo-continuous effects are executed four times, a big hit always occurs, that is, a super reach big hit (pseudo It is also possible to provide a variation pattern of four consecutive times, but no variation pattern of super-reach (four pseudo-reams).

  The CPU 103, when starting the variation display of the special symbol, displays a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation). Command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

  The CPU 120 for effect control uses a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first hold symbol) to specify that the reserved memory number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started. Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating a display result (a jackpot type in the case of a big hit or disappointment or a big jackpot), a special symbol change time, and a production content ( The special symbol variation display is executed based on the fact that a set of commands, such as a reach pattern and a pseudo-ream), which are designated from the game control microcomputer 100, is received. It is possible to specify the fluctuating time and production contents (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.). The effect control CPU 120 receives the special symbol (first special symbol) based on the fact that the special symbol designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100 when the special symbol variation display is finished and the display result is finalized. It is possible to specify that the display result is derived after the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is terminated.

  FIG. 13-5 is a flowchart of the change start time effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives the one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the display control of the display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is specified. An effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern designation command is set, and the decorative design based on the designated variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the change display is determined by the change start effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-5.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the expectation notice effect is to be executed based on the expectation notice effect execution ratio determination table (see FIGS. 13-6 (C) and (D)) (step S35TM1010). .

  FIG. 13-6 (C) shows an execution ratio of the expectation notice effect when the display result is out of order, and a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation notice effect is executed for each of the deviation variation patterns. Is allocated. When the variation pattern is “non-reach”, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation degree notice effect at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “out of super reach (no quasi-ream)”, it is determined not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 90%, and to execute at a rate of 10%. Further, when the variation pattern is “out of super reach (one pseudo-ream)”, it is determined not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 80% and to be executed at a rate of 20%. . Further, when the fluctuation pattern is “super-reaching out (2 pseudo-continuations)”, it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 70% and to execute at a rate of 30%. .

  FIG. 13-6 (D) shows an execution ratio of the expectation notice effect when the display result is a big hit, and a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation notice effect is executed for each of the big hit variation patterns. Is allocated. When the variation pattern is “super reach big hit (no pseudo-ream)”, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 40%, and executes it at a rate of 60%. To decide. Further, when the variation pattern is “super reach big hit (one pseudo-ream)”, it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 30% and to execute at a rate of 70%. . Further, when the fluctuation pattern is “super reach big hit (two pseudo-runs)”, it is determined not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 20% and to be executed at a rate of 80%. .

  In this way, in the case of super reach, the ratio of expectation announcement execution is higher than in the case of not becoming super reach, and in addition, in the case of super reach, the more the number of executions of pseudo-continuous production, The rate at which the expectation notice effect is executed increases. As described above, the greater the number of executions of the pseudo-rendition effect, the higher the jackpot expectation degree. Therefore, when the expectation degree notice effect is executed, the big hit expectation degree is greater than when the expectation notice effect is not executed. Is expensive.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation notice effect (YES in step S35TM1020), the final display mode (final value) of the expectation notice effect is displayed as the final display of the expectation notice effect. It determines based on the mode determination table (refer FIG. 13-6 (E)) (step S35TM1030). On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the expectation notice effect (NO in step S35TM1020), the process proceeds to step S35TM1090 described later.

  FIG. 13-6 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode of the expectation notice effect. As shown in FIG. 13-6 (E), in this embodiment, “60”, “70”, “80”, “90”, and “90” Any numerical value of “100” can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these numerical values.

  As shown in FIG. 13-6 (E), when the display result is “out of” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “out”), the final expectation effect is displayed. The display mode is “60” at a rate of 40%, “70” at a rate of 30%, “80” at a rate of 20%, “90” at a rate of 10%, and “90” at a rate of 0%. 100 ". On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the final display mode of the expectation notice effect is “9%”. 60, 15% at “70”, 30% at “80”, 45% at “90”, 1% at “100”.

  Thus, the final display mode of the expectation degree notice effect becomes a big hit as the victory expectation degree (the ratio of the range of the colored portion to the entire width of the value bar 35TM610) indicated by the value bar 35TM610 increases. The ratio is high, and the jackpot expectation degree has a relationship of “60” <“70” <“80” <“90” <“100”. Further, when the final display mode of the expectation notice effect is “100”, it is determined that a big hit will be made.

  Next, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the display mode change pattern and the initial value of the expectation notice effect based on the display form change pattern determination table of the expectation notice effect (see FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G)). (Step S35TM1040).

  FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G) are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of a change pattern determination table for determining a display mode change pattern of an expectation notice effect. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the expectation notice effect is to be executed, and the final display form of the expectation notice effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs the final display form thus determined. Any initial value (first display mode) is determined. In this example, any one of “50”, “60”, “70”, “80”, and “90” can be determined as the initial value of the expectation notice effect. On the other hand, a judgment value is assigned to each.

  As shown in FIG. 13-6 (F), when the display result is “out of” (that is, when the determination result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), the determined expectation notice effect is displayed. When the final display mode is “60”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at a rate of 100% (the number of changes is once). That is, when the final display mode is “60”, there is no change pattern other than the change pattern that changes from the minimum initial value “50” to the final value “60”. The initial value is determined to be “50”.

  In addition, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is “70”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at a rate of 40% (2 times of change), and the initial value is set at a rate of 60%. The value is determined to be “60” (one change). In addition, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is “80”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at a rate of 20% (3 times of change), and the initial value is set at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be “60” (2 times of change), and the initial value is determined to be “70” at a rate of 50% (1 time of change). Further, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is “90”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at a rate of 10% (4 times of change), and the initial value is set at a rate of 20%. The value is determined to be “60” (3 times of change), the initial value is determined to be “70” at a rate of 30% (2 times of change), and the initial value is determined to be “80” at a rate of 40%. (Changes once).

  As shown in FIG. 13-6 (G), when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), When the final display mode is “60”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at a rate of 100% (the number of changes is once). That is, when the final display mode is “60”, there is no change pattern other than the change pattern that changes from the minimum initial value “50” to the final value “60”. The initial value is determined to be “50”.

  In addition, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is “70”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at a rate of 60% (2 times of change), and the initial value is set at a rate of 40%. The value is determined to be “60” (one change). In addition, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is “80”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at the rate of 50% (3 times of change), and the initial value is set at the rate of 30%. The value is determined to be “60” (2 times of change), and the initial value is determined to be “70” at a rate of 20% (1 time of change). In addition, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is “90”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at a rate of 40% (4 changes), and the initial value is set at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be “60” (3 times of change), the initial value is determined to be “70” at a rate of 20% (2 times of change), and the initial value is determined to be “80” at a rate of 10%. (Changes once). When the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is “100”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at a rate of 35% (5 changes), and the initial value is set at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be “60” (4 changes), the initial value is determined to be “70” at a rate of 20% (3 changes), and the initial value is determined to be “80” at a rate of 10%. The initial value is determined to be “90” at a rate of 5% (2 times of change) (1 time of change).

  When the display mode change pattern and the initial value of the expectation degree notice effect are determined in this way, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the count-up effect corresponding to the execution of the expectation degree notice effect (step S35TM1050). ). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the count-up effect based on a table for determining whether or not to execute the count-up effect shown in FIG. 13-7 (H).

  As shown in FIG. 13-7 (H), in this embodiment, the determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the count-up effect varies depending on the display result. When the display result is “out of” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), it is determined that the count-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. Decide to run at the rate of%. On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), it is decided not to execute the count-up effect at a rate of 25%. , And decide to run at a rate of 75%.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the expectation notice effect is executed, there are cases where the count-up effect is executed and when the count-up effect is not executed, and when the count-up effect is executed. The percentage of big hits is higher than when the count-up effect is not executed. On the other hand, when a count-up effect is executed, an expectation notice effect is always executed.

  Next, when it is determined that the count-up effect is to be executed (YES in step S35TM1060), the CPU 120 for effect control determines the final display mode of the count-up effect (step S35TM1070), and further changes in the display mode of the count-up effect A pattern and an initial value are determined (step S35TM1080). Then, control goes to a step S35TM1090. On the other hand, when CPU 120 for effect control determines not to execute the count-up effect (NO in step S35TM1060), the process proceeds to step S35TM1090 as it is.

  Here, as described above, the winning expectation degree indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 (the ratio of the range of the colored portion to the entire width (100%) (0 % To 100%)) and the winning expectation indicated by the numerical value in the count-up effect executed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are in a state of being in agreement. Therefore, the final value in the count-up effect is determined to be the same value as the expected victory degree finally indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 in the expectation notice effect, that is, the value determined in step S35TM1030 (step S35TM1070). In addition, the winning expectation change pattern indicated as a numerical value in the count-up effect is determined to be the same pattern as the winning expectation change pattern indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 in the expectation notice effect, that is, the pattern determined in step S35TM1040. (Step S35TM1080). In addition, the initial value in the count-up effect is determined to be the same value as the expected victory degree indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 first in the expectation notice effect, that is, the value determined in step S35TM1040 (step S35TM1080).

  In this embodiment, the display mode of the expectation notice effect and the display mode of the count-up effect corresponding to this increase by 10 from the first display mode (initial value) to the final display mode (final value). Assuming that the initial value is “n”, it changes in stages to the final value, such as “n + 10”, “n + 20”, “n + 30”,. The change pattern of the expectation notice effect and the change pattern of the count-up effect corresponding to this change at least once (10) from the initial display mode (initial value). When the display mode (initial value) is “n”, the minimum value of the final display mode (final value) is “n + 10”.

  As shown in FIG. 13-6 (E), regarding the expectation degree notice effect and the count-up effect corresponding to this, the higher the final value of the expectation level of victory, the higher the expectation value of jackpot. Here, the degree of jackpot expectation differs according to the initial value determined based on the final value of the expected degree of victory, that is, according to the change pattern and the number of changes. For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G), when the final value of the expectation of victory is “90”, the expected value of jackpot is when the initial value is “50” (the number of changes is 4). Is the highest, when the initial value is “60” (3 changes), the big hit expectation is the second highest, and when the initial value is “70” (2 changes), the big hit expectation is 3 The highest hit expectation is the lowest when the initial value is “80” (one change). As described above, when the final value of the winning expectation is “N (70 ≦ N)”, when the initial value is “50”, the big hit expectation is the highest, and when the initial value is “N−10”. Has the lowest expectation level. In other words, the greater the range of change from the initial value of the winning expectation level (the greater the number of changes), the higher the jackpot expectation level.

  As described above, the expectation notice effect and the count-up effect corresponding to the expectation notice effect differ depending on the initial value and the change pattern (number of changes), so the expectation notice effect is provided on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. The player is assigned the initial value and change pattern (number of changes) when executed, and the initial value and change pattern (number of changes) when the count-up effect is executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 correspondingly. It can be noticed.

  In step S35TM1090, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuous effect. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at least once during the fluctuating display period of the decorative symbols to be started. If the variation pattern does not involve a pseudo-continuous effect (YES in step S35TM1090), the variation start time effect determination process ends. If the variation pattern is accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect (NO in step S35TM1090), whether or not to execute the countdown effect is determined (step S35TM1100), and the variation start effect determining process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 13-7 (I), in this embodiment, the determination value is assigned so that the execution ratio of the countdown effect varies depending on the display result. When the display result is “out of” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is “out of”), it is determined that the countdown effect is not executed at a rate of 55%, and 45% Decide to run at a rate of. On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), it is decided not to execute the countdown effect at a rate of 40%. Decide to run at a rate of 60%.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, even when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, there are cases where the countdown effect is executed and when the countdown effect is not executed, and when the countdown effect is executed, the countdown effect is displayed. The percentage of big hits is higher than when it is not executed. On the other hand, when the countdown effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect is always executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, when the count-up effect corresponding to the expectation notice effect is executed, the count-down effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. The big hit expectation is higher than the case. As a result, the player pays attention to which effect of the count-up effect and the count-down effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the effect of updating the numerical value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. Can be made.

  As for the jackpot expectation, the highest hit expectation is highest when both the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed, and the countdown effect is not executed but the countup effect is executed second. Expectation is high, countdown effect is executed, but countup effect is not executed, the third highest hit expectation is the highest, and when neither the countdown effect or countup effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is the lowest It has become.

(Specific examples of countdown production and countup production)
Next, specific examples of the countdown effect and the countup effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-8 to 13-11. FIG. 13-8 is a time chart when executing both the countdown effect and the countup effect. FIGS. 13-9 to 13-11 illustrate the main liquid crystal when executing both the countdown effect and the countup effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on display 35TM200 and sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  In the example shown below, the pseudo-ream effect is determined to be a super reach variation pattern that is executed twice, the expectation notice effect is determined to be executed, and both the countdown effect and the countup effect are determined. It is assumed that the production is decided to be executed.

  First, FIG. 13-9 (1) shows a state in which a variation display of the left middle right decorative design (variation display started at the timing of T 1 shown in FIG. 13-8) is executed on the main liquid crystal display 35 TM 200. Show. At this time, nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, but a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of the character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, so that the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are displayed. The whole of the character is displayed. And the 1st logo panel 35TM410 and the 2nd logo panel 35TM420 are in the origin position which overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front view.

  At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 disposed behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is lowered, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the screen of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes decorative display variation display in the symbol display area 5 L, symbol display area 5 C, and symbol display area 5 R of the main liquid crystal display 35 TM 200. When the timing is 3 seconds before the temporary stop timing of the first pseudo-continuous symbol determined based on the fluctuation pattern (at the timing of T2A shown in FIG. 13-8) Then, the initial value of the countdown effect (in this example, “3” in white) is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 to start the first countdown effect.

  Then, both decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position are simultaneously moved to the effect position (T2A to T2B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion “FEV” and the character portion “ER!” Are integrally separated from the origin position to the effect position without being separated. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to a production position that overlaps with the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in front and back, thereby lowering the visibility of the lower part of the screen in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is in a state.

  Next, at the timing when one second has elapsed from the timing T2A in FIG. 13-8 (timing T3 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (3), the main liquid crystal display In the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area 5R of 35TM200, a countdown operation is performed to decrease the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 when the decorative symbol variation display is executed. The updated value (in this example, “2” in the white mode) is displayed.

  Next, at the timing when 1 second has elapsed from the timing T3 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T4 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (4), the main liquid crystal display In the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area 5R of 35TM200, a countdown operation is performed to decrease the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 when the decorative symbol variation display is executed. The updated value (in this example, “1” in the white mode) is displayed.

  Next, at the timing one second has elapsed from the timing T4 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T5 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (5), the main liquid crystal display The decorative symbol (in this example, the numeral symbol “2”) is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5L of 35TM200, and the decorative symbol (in this example, the numeral symbol “4”) is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5R. Then, the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C. In addition, in accordance with the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 temporarily stops in the symbol display area 5C, a countdown operation for reducing the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed, and the updated final value (in this example, “0” in white mode) is displayed.

  Then, both decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the production position are simultaneously moved to the origin position (T6A to T6B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion “FEV” and the character portion “ER!” Are integrally separated from the effect position to the origin position without being separated. As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, since both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position where they overlap with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front view, the visibility in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (6), at the timing when one second has elapsed from the timing T5 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T6B in FIG. 13-8), the symbol display area 5L of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 In the symbol display area 5C and the symbol display area 5R, the first re-variation display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the first countdown effect is ended. In this example, the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (in this example, “0” in the white mode) is erased, and the state relating to the countdown effect is not displayed. At this time, the 1st logo panel 35TM410 and the 2nd logo panel 35TM420 are in the origin position which overlaps with sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front view.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (7), the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5 L, symbol display area 5 C, and symbol display area 5 R of the main liquid crystal display 35 TM 200. When the timing is 3 seconds before the temporary stop timing of the first pseudo-continuous pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern (at the timing of T7A shown in FIG. 13-8) Then, the initial value of the countdown effect (in this example, “3” in white) is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 to start the second countdown effect.

  Then, both decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position are simultaneously moved to the effect position (T7A to T7B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion “FEV” and the character portion “ER!” Are integrally separated from the origin position to the effect position without being separated. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to a production position that overlaps with the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in front and back, thereby lowering the visibility of the lower part of the screen in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is in a state.

  Next, at the timing when one second has elapsed from the timing T7A in FIG. 13-8 (timing T8 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (8), the main liquid crystal display In the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area 5R of 35TM200, a countdown operation is performed to decrease the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 when the decorative symbol variation display is executed. The updated value (in this example, “2” in the white mode) is displayed.

  Next, at the timing when one second has elapsed from the timing T8 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T9 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (9), the main liquid crystal display In the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area 5R of 35TM200, a countdown operation is performed to decrease the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 when variable display of ornamental symbols is being executed. The updated value (in this example, “1” in the white mode) is displayed.

  Next, at the timing one second has elapsed from the timing T9 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T10 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (10), the main liquid crystal display The decorative symbol (in this example, the numeric symbol “3”) is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5L of 35TM200, and the decorative symbol (in this example, the numeric symbol “5”) is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5R. Then, the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C. In addition, in accordance with the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 temporarily stops in the symbol display area 5C, a countdown operation for reducing the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed, and the updated final value (in this example, “0” in white mode) is displayed.

  Then, both decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the production position are simultaneously moved to the origin position (T11A to T11B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion “FEV” and the character portion “ER!” Are integrally separated from the effect position to the origin position without being separated. As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, since both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position where they overlap with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front view, the visibility in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. ing.

  Next, at the timing when 1 second has elapsed from the timing of T10 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T11B in FIG. 13-8), FIG. 13-10 (11) shows the symbol display area 5L of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, symbol display. In the area 5C and the symbol display area 5R, the second re-variable display of the decorative symbol is executed and the second countdown effect is ended. In this example, the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (in this example, “0” in the white mode) is erased, and the state relating to the countdown effect is not displayed. At this time, the 1st logo panel 35TM410 and the 2nd logo panel 35TM420 are in the origin position which overlaps with sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front view.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (12), the effect control CPU 120 sets “7” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. ”Is displayed by stopping display, and the character“ Leach! ”Is displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing T12 in FIG. 13-8).

  Then, after the reach state is established, the effect control CPU 120 executes a battle effect according to the change pattern of the super reach as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (13). Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the ally character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606 (timing T13 in FIG. 13-8).

  Next, the CPU 120 for effect control, at the timing immediately after the battle effect is started based on the variation pattern (timing T14A in FIG. 13-8), as shown in FIG. And a count-up effect. That is, with the start of the anticipation notice effect, the battle effect is temporarily interrupted to hide the ally character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606, and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 has a character “Expected Victory”, and The numerical value bar 35TM610 is displayed, and with the start of the count-up effect, the determined initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  In this example, it is assumed that the initial value of the expectation notice effect and the count-up effect is determined to be 70, and the final value is determined to be 90 (that is, a change pattern with two changes is determined). Based on this, initially, the ratio of the colored portion in the numerical bar 35TM610 is “70”% of the entire bar, and “70” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. In addition, according to the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 being in the range of “50” to “70”, the numerical value “70” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in blue.

  The effect control CPU 120 starts the count-up effect and simultaneously moves the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 from the origin position to the effect position (T14A to T14B). Accordingly, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and attention is paid to the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 and the change pattern from the initial value to the final value when the count-up effect is executed. Can be made. The timing for improving the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by moving the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 from the origin position to the effect position is before the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It may be after the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Next, at the timing when five seconds have elapsed from the timing of T14A in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T15 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 uses a numerical bar 35TM610 as shown in FIG. 13-11 (15). Count-up operation to update the percentage occupied by the colored part from “70”% to “80”% of the entire bar and to increase the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 10 from “70” to “80” (The first change). Incidentally, in response to the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 being in the range of “80” to “100”, the numerical value “80” is displayed in red on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. .

  Next, at the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the timing of T15 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T16 in FIG. 13-8), the production control CPU 120 uses the numerical bar 35TM610 as shown in FIG. 13-11 (16). Count-up operation to update the percentage occupied by the colored part from “80”% to “90”% of the entire bar and to increase the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 10 from “80” to “90” (2nd change). Incidentally, in response to the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 being in the range of “80” to “100”, the numerical value “90” is displayed in red on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. .

  Next, at the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the timing of T16 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T17 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 uses the numerical bar 35TM610 as shown in FIG. 13-11 (17). The numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is changed to the final value (“90” without changing the display mode in accordance with the proportion of the colored portion reaching the final value (“90”% of the entire bar). ")", The numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is flashed in response to reaching ("90" flashes in red). As a result, the player is informed that the display mode of the expectation notice effect and the count-up effect has reached the final display mode, and no further update is performed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, at the timing when the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value (“90”), the fact that the final value has been reached is not immediately notified (FIG. 13). -8 (T16) and FIGS. 13-11 (16) are not immediately flashing), and a certain time (for example, 5 seconds) is a mode (non-flashing mode) suggesting that there is a possibility of change. After that, it is notified that the final value has been reached (change to the blinking mode at the timings of (T17) and FIGS. 13-11 (17) in FIG. 13-8). By doing so, the player cannot immediately know whether the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is the final value, that is, whether there is room for further change. The interest in the numerical values displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be maintained.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the effect position to the origin position (T18A to T18B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion “FEV” and the character portion “ER!” Are integrally separated from the effect position to the origin position without being separated. As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, since both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position where they overlap with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front view, the visibility in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. ing.

  Next, at the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the timing T17 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T18B in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. In addition to ending the count-up effect, the battle effect is resumed and the teammate character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606 are displayed again. With the end of the anticipation notice effect, the “Living Expectation” character and the numerical value bar 35TM610 are not displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the numerical value indicating the win expectation is also not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Here, as described above, since the decorations of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position at T18A to T18B of FIG. 13-8, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 Visibility is improved and the player can be concentrated on the battle performance.

  Thus, the countdown effect accompanied by the subtraction operation of the displayed numerical values shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5) and FIGS. 13-10 (7) to (10), and FIGS. 13-11 (14) The count update effect accompanied by the operation of adding the displayed numerical values shown in (17) can be executed in the common sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, whereby the numerical value updating operation executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is performed. The accompanying effects can be diversified to improve the interest of the effects executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  In addition, countdown effects and countup effects are provided as effects accompanied by different types of update operations (subtraction, addition). Each type of effects is indicated by an image simulating a 7-segment display. By executing such an effect on the common sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to provide consistency as an effect, and to effectively use a common display area to produce multiple types of effects. Can be executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, in response to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 executes the countdown effect from 3 seconds before the pseudo continuous effect is executed. Corresponding to the expectation degree notice effect being executed in the liquid crystal display 35TM200, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 executes the count-up effect simultaneously with the expectation degree notice effect. In this way, a countdown effect is provided corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect as one effect that suggests the degree of jackpot expectation, and a count-up effect corresponding to the expectation notice effect as the other effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree Is provided to clarify the correspondence between the performances.

  In the present embodiment, as the operations executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect and a countup operation corresponding to the expectation notice effect are provided. The former action causes the numerical value to decrease, and the latter action causes the numerical value to increase. The corresponding production can be clearly distinguished.

  In addition, the countdown effect is an update format in which “3” is displayed as an initial value 3 seconds before the pseudo-continuous pattern 35TM600 temporarily stops, and 1 is subtracted every 1 second, while in the countup effect. This is an update method in which any one of “50” to “90” is displayed as an initial value immediately after the start of the battle effect, and 10 is added every 5 seconds. In this way, by making the initial value and change pattern of each effect executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 different, the player can easily grasp which effect is being executed. Furthermore, the player can execute any effect by making the subtraction cycle of the countdown effect (1 second in this example) different from the addition cycle of the countup effect (5 seconds in this example). It is possible to easily grasp whether it is.

  The sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the countdown effect is executed may be different from the sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the countup effect is executed. The light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 when the countdown effect is executed may be different from the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 when the countup effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the numerical range “0 to 3” in the countdown effect is not overlapped with the numerical range “50 to 100” in the countup effect, so the effect being executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding about. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the numerical range in the countdown effect and the numerical range in the countup effect may partially overlap. For example, the countdown effect is subtracted from the initial value “10”. Alternatively, the count-up effect may be added from the initial value “10”. According to this, when the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it can be noted which effect is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the countdown effect, the numerical value is displayed in a white manner regardless of the numerical value range. On the other hand, in the count-up effect, the numerical value is displayed in blue (“50” to “70”) or red (“80” to “100”) according to the numerical value range, and the final value is set to blink. . Thus, the difference between the countdown effect and the countup effect can be clarified by making the display mode of the numerical value during the execution of the countdown effect different from the display mode of the numerical value during the execution of the countup effect.

  In this embodiment, the countdown effect is executed in the period T2A to T6B and T7A to T11B in FIG. 13-8 within one fluctuation display period, and the period from T14A to T18B in FIG. 13-8. Then, the count-up production is executed. In this way, the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed at different timings so that the execution period of the countdown effect and the execution period of the countup effect do not overlap (if one effect is being executed, the other By preventing the production from being performed, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated, and to perform both the countdown production and the count-up production in the common area (in this example, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).

  In this embodiment, the numerical bar 35TM610 is displayed in a manner that matches the numerical value displayed in the count-up effect on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 different from the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in which the count-up effect is executed. Will be. That is, the numerical value displayed in the count-up effect matches the ratio of the colored portion in the numerical value bar 35TM610. In this way, by displaying the winning expectation level, which is common production information, using different displays such as the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the production effect can be further enhanced. it can.

(1) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a countdown effect and a countup effect are executed as effects related to the display result of the variable display being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. A countdown effect or a countup effect may be executed as a pre-reading notice effect related to the display result of no variable display. Specifically, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 indicates the remaining number of times of variation display until the variation display (target variation) based on the starting winning is performed. You may make it perform the production which counts down. In addition, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 indicates the expected big hit expectation of target variation until the variation display (target variation) based on the starting winning is performed. You may make it perform the production which counts up. As in these examples, the countdown effect and the countup effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the example of temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol which is a decorative symbol suggesting that the decorative symbol is re-variable is shown. Not only in such a form, but when a pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a predetermined pattern constituted by a decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern made up of numbers) that can appear or stop when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. A combination of decorative symbols (for example, a combination in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol become “2”, “4”, and “6”) may be temporarily stopped.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when temporarily suspending a decorative symbol, an example in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and then the middle symbol is temporarily stopped is shown. Not limited to this, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol may be temporarily stopped simultaneously.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example in which the initial value of the countdown effect is always “3” (the countdown effect is started 3 seconds before the pseudo-continuous symbol 35TM600 temporarily stops) is shown. Not only the form but also a plurality of initial values may be selectable at different ratios depending on the variation pattern or the display result. For example, when the number of executions of the quasi-run is 1, the ratio of “3” to the initial value in the first countdown effect is 80%, and the ratio of “5” to the initial value is 20%. When the number of executions of the quasi-continuation is 2, the ratio that “3” is the initial value in the first countdown effect is 20%, and the ratio that “5” is the initial value is 80%. May be. Further, when the display result is off, the ratio of “3” to the initial value in the countdown effect is 80%, and the ratio of “5” to the initial value is 20%. In the countdown effect, the ratio at which “3” is the initial value may be 20%, and the ratio at which “5” is the initial value may be 80%.

(4) In the above embodiment, when it is determined to be a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo-continuous effects and when it is determined to execute a countdown effect, two pseudo-continuous effects Although the example in which the countdown effect corresponding to each is executed (the countdown effect is executed the same number of times as the pseudo-continuous effect) is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the super reach with two pseudo-continuous effects is shown. When the variation pattern is determined, there is an effect pattern in which the countdown effect is executed for one pseudo-continuous effect, while the countdown effect is not executed for the other pseudo-continuous effect. Anyway.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example in which a pseudo-continuous effect is always executed when the countdown effect is executed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed even when the countdown effect is executed. There may be a case where the performance is not executed. Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the expectation notice effect is always executed when the count-up effect is executed is shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and even when the count-up effect is executed. The expectation notice effect may not be executed.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control has shown an example in which the numerical value of the countdown effect and the value of the countup effect are displayed by an image imitating a 7-segment display on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Not only in such a form, but instead of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, an actual 7-segment display is provided, and by controlling the light emission of the 7-segment display, the numerical value of the countdown effect and the numerical value of the countup effect May be displayed (emitted).

(7) In the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the effect control CPU 120 has the remaining number of fluctuations that can be controlled in the short-time state (number of time reductions) and the remaining number of fluctuations that can be controlled in the probability-change state (ST (special time) times). The number of rounds in the big hit gaming state can be displayed. The period during which the information (numerical values) relating to these gaming states is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is a countdown effect or count-up than the period during which these information (numerical values) relating to the gaming states are not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. You may make it the ratio with which an effect is performed become low. According to such a configuration, in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the numerical value of the countdown effect or the numerical value of the countup effect and the information (numerical value) regarding the gaming state are limited to be displayed at the same time. An important latter can be preferentially notified.

(8) In the above embodiment, a countdown effect is executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the pseudo continuous notice effect as the first suggestion effect executed in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 An example is shown in which the count-up effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the expectation notice effect as the second suggestion effect to be executed. Not only in such a form, a countdown effect is executed in response to the first suggestion effect, and a countdown effect is executed in response to the second suggestion effect (for example, the remaining time until the expectation notice effect is counted down) You may do it. On the contrary, the count-up effect may be executed in response to the second suggestion effect, and the count-up effect may be executed in response to the first suggestion effect. As described above, the numerical value updating operation corresponding to the first suggestion effect and the numerical value updating operation corresponding to the second suggestion effect may be common operations.

  Moreover, there are a case where a countdown effect is executed in response to the first suggestion effect, a case in which a countup effect is executed, a case in which the countup effect is executed in response to the second suggestion effect, and a countdown There may be a case where an effect is executed. As described above, it is possible to execute an effect accompanied by a different type of operation corresponding to a common suggestion effect.

(9) In the above embodiment, both the countdown effect and the countup effect are display devices that are different from the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in which the pseudo-continuous effect and the expectation notice effect as the suggestive effect are executed. Although the example performed in liquid crystal display 35TM300 was shown, it is not restricted to such a form, either the countdown effect or the countup effect, or both are the pseudo-continuous effect and the expectation degree notice effect that the suggestion effect is executed It may be executed in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200.

(10) In the above embodiment, in the countdown effect, the example of subtracting and updating the remaining time until the pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops is shown. However, the remaining time until another effect is executed is subtracted and updated. For example, the remaining time until the movable combination such as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 operates may be subtracted and updated. In the above embodiment, in the count-up effect, an example in which the numerical value related to the jackpot expectation is added and updated has been shown. However, the numerical value related to other indicators may be added and updated. You may make it add and update the elapsed time after movable movable objects, such as 1 logo panel 35TM410 and 2nd logo panel 35TM420, moved to an effect position.

(Example of slot machine)
In the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a countdown effect that subtracts a numerical value and a countup effect that adds a numerical value, and it is possible to execute a countdown effect and a countup effect on a sub liquid crystal display that is a common area. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of such a gaming machine, but the gaming machine having such a configuration is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and may be a slot machine.

  The slot machine includes a variable display device having a plurality of reels (for example, three of a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery. When the player sets the number of bets (1 to 3 medals) and operates the start lever, each reel starts rotating, and the player operates the stop button provided for each reel. Thus, the rotation is stopped within a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. Then, a winning occurs according to the display result derived when the rotation of all the reels is stopped (or according to the internal lottery result regardless of the display result).

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, special roles, and replaying roles. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the special role winning, the player can obtain a profit that the game is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player such as a regular bonus (RB) or a big bonus (BB) from the next game. In the winning of the re-gamer, it is possible to obtain a profit that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the number of bets.

  In such a slot machine, after the bonus is over, as a state advantageous to the player, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease in the value for gaming by increasing the winning probability of the re-gamer than usual. There is a technique that controls RT to a possible replay time (referred to as RT) and terminates RT when an end condition including winning a predetermined falling winning combination is satisfied. In addition, there are cases in which the effect state can be controlled during an assist time (referred to as AT) that is a notification period in which a navigation effect (for example, guiding the push order) for notifying the internal lottery result can be executed. A state in which the gaming state is RT and the effect state is controlled by AT is also referred to as assist replay time (ART). When the main control unit sets a flag corresponding to each gaming state, the winning combination, etc., and executes processing corresponding to the set flag (including transmission of an effect control command to the sub-control unit) The game is controlled.

  Role lottery, AT lottery, RT lottery, ART lottery, and AT, RT, and ART times extra lottery are stored in RAM, for example, at the start of the game (just after the start switch is operated) The winning flag of the winning combination is stored based on the gaming state indicated by the current gaming state flag. Whether or not the winning combination is actually established is determined by the winning flag stored in the RAM, the operation timing of the stop button, or the like.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment includes a main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as a first display device and a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a second display device, and a movable body 32. The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, which are decorative bodies having optical transparency, are provided, but in the slot machine as well, the main liquid crystal display as the first display device, A sub liquid crystal display as a display device may be provided, and a first logo panel and a second logo panel, which are decorative bodies having optical transparency, may be provided as movable bodies.

  In such a slot machine, the sub-control unit can control the remaining number of times that can be controlled to the AT state (AT number), the remaining number of times that can be controlled to the RT state (RT number), and the ART state in the sub liquid crystal display. The remaining number of times (ART number) can be displayed. The period during which the information (numerical values) relating to the gaming state is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display is more likely to have a countdown effect or a count up effect than the period during which the information (numerical values) relating to the gaming state is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. The rate of execution may be lowered. According to such a configuration, in the sub liquid crystal display, it is more important for the player by restricting that the numerical value of the countdown effect or the numerical value of the countup effect and the information (numerical value) regarding the gaming state are simultaneously displayed. The latter can be preferentially notified.

(Examples of related effects related to the execution status of suggestion effects)
Next, an example of executing a related effect related to the execution state of the suggestive effect that suggests being controlled to the big hit gaming state will be described. In the example shown below, a music reach effect and a cut-in notice effect can be executed as the suggestion effect. In addition, a count display effect can be executed as a related effect related to the execution situation of the music reach effect. In addition, a timer effect can be executed as an effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect. Hereinafter, each of these effects will be specifically described.

(Music reach production)
The music reach effect is an effect that can be executed when a change pattern of super reach is selected as the change pattern, and is a suggestion effect that can be executed as one type of super reach effect after the reach state is established. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) to (6) and FIGS. 13-19 (3) to 13-20 (12) described later, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the same time, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays an image in a mode corresponding to the reproduction time of the music.

  In the present embodiment, on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, an image of a character (A to C) corresponding to the music reproduction time and an image of a musical note (35TM700 to 35TM720) corresponding to the music reproduction time are displayed. In the first stage of the music reach production (period in which the music playback time is 1 to 15 seconds), one character (character A) and one type of note (note 35TM700) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. In the second stage of the music reach production (a period in which the music playback time is 16 seconds to 30 seconds), two characters (character A and character B) and two types of notes (note 35TM700, note) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. 35TM710) is displayed, and in the third stage of the music reach production (music playback time period of 31 to 60 seconds), the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 has three characters (character A, character B, character C) and Display three types of notes (note 35TM700, note 35TM710, note 35TM720) That.

  As shown in FIG. 13-13, which will be described later, the music reach production is finished in the first stage, finished in the second stage, and finished in the third stage (when the music is output to the end). ), And to which stage the process proceeds is determined in advance according to the display result and the variation pattern. When the music reach production progresses to the second stage, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it ends at the first stage, and when the music reach production progresses to the third stage, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it finishes at the second stage. Is expensive. As the relationship between the final number of stages of music reach production and the jackpot expectation, the relationship of the first stage <the second stage <the third stage is established.

  The timing at which the reproduction of the music related to the music reach effect is started is the timing before the decorative symbol final stop timing by the music reproduction time. Therefore, when the music reach production is finished in the first stage, the music starts to be played 15 seconds before the decorative design is confirmed and stopped, and the decorative design is confirmed and stopped when the music is reproduced for 15 seconds. Will do. In addition, when the music reach production ends in the second stage, the music starts to be played 30 seconds before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped at the timing when the musical piece is played for 30 seconds. Will do. In addition, when the music reach production is finished in the third stage (when the music is played to the end), the music starts to be played 60 seconds before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. The decorative symbol is fixed and stopped at the timing of reproduction (timing when the music is reproduced to the end).

  With such an effect configuration, when the player starts playing the music related to the music reach effect, the player expects the music to be played for as long as possible before the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped.

(Counting display effect)
The count display effect is an effect related to the execution state of the music reach effect, and is shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) to (6) and FIGS. 13-19 (4) to 13-20 (12) described later. As shown in the drawing, the reproduction time of music in the music reach production is an effect displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Specifically, this is an effect of displaying the elapsed time (seconds) from the start of music playback on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and displaying the playback seconds (1-60) with an image simulating a 7-segment display. I am doing so.

  In the count display effect, the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is “1”, and the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is incremented and updated by 1 every time 1 second elapses. Thus, in the count display effect, an operation of adding and updating the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 every second is performed. Thereby, the player is notified of the reproduction time of the music in the music reach production. Therefore, the final value of the count display effect when the music reach effect ends in the first stage is “15”, and the final value of the count display effect when the music reach effect ends in the second stage is “30”. The final value of the count display effect when the music reach effect has progressed to the third stage is “60”.

  With such an effect configuration, the player can clearly grasp the reproduction period after the music is started. By understanding that the longer the music playback period is, the higher the expectation of the big hit is, the expectation is that the numerical value (music playback time) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 will increase as much as possible. .

  Note that the display mode of the numerical value (reproduction time) may be varied according to the range of the numerical value (reproduction time) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. The numerical value may be displayed in red in the range of 16 to 30, and the numerical value displayed in red in the range of 31 to 60 may be further blinked.

(Cut-in notice effect)
The cut-in notice effect is an effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. As shown in FIG. 13-20 (10), which will be described later, when other effects such as a super reach effect (music reach effect) are being executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, it is more effective than the other effects being executed. This is a notice effect executed in a display mode with high priority. There are a plurality of effect modes (“CHANCE” and “hot heat”) with different displayed characters as the effect modes of the cut-in notice effect, and the ratio of selecting each effect mode differs according to the display result (FIG. 13-13 (F)).

  From the viewpoint of the player, when an image related to another suggestion effect is displayed, suddenly, a display mode with a higher priority than an image related to the other suggestion effect (the display layer is higher) Since the cut-in image (which appears to be displayed on the near side of the image related to the suggestion effect or the like) is displayed, it is attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice effect is executed. Moreover, it will be interested also in which effect aspect a cut-in notice effect is performed among several effect aspects.

(Timer production)
The timer effect is an effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and is an effect of displaying the remaining time (seconds) until the cut-in notice effect is executed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. As shown in FIGS. 13-19 (6) to 13-20 (9), which will be described later, the timer effect is executed as a cut-in notice effect (a “CHANCE” or “hot” cut-in image is displayed). First, “3” is displayed as an initial value in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. The numerical value displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is subtracted and updated by 1 every 1 second, and the cut-in image is displayed at the timing when it becomes “0”.

  Thus, the timer effect is an effect executed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, which is different from the display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300) in which the count display effect is executed, and is different from the count display effect. The operation is an effect of performing a subtraction operation for the remaining time until the suggestion effect starts (countdown operation until the cut-in notice effect is executed). In this embodiment, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the timer effect is always executed.

(Direction decision processing at the start of fluctuation)
As shown in FIG. 5, in the special symbol normal process (step S110) of the special symbol process (step S25), the CPU 103 displays the display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol based on the random number value for determining the display result. The jackpot type in the case of “big hit” or “out of” and “big hit” is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the display result predetermined result.

  In the present embodiment, when the display result determined in advance is “out of”, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-13 (A). In this example, the non-reach fluctuation pattern in which the display variation of the decorative pattern is not the reach pattern and the display result is non-reachable, and the normal reach in which the variation display pattern of the decorative pattern is the reach pattern and the display result is deviated. There are provided a variation pattern of detachment and a variation pattern of superreach detachment in which the display pattern variation display mode is a reach mode and the super reach effect is executed and the display result is deviated.

  In the example of FIG. 13-13 (A), the non-reach shift pattern is determined at a rate of 90%, the normal reach is determined as a shift pattern at a rate of 8%, and the super reach shift is changed at a rate of 2%. The pattern will be determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the display result determined in advance is “big hit”, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-13 (B). In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative design is the reach mode and the display result is the big hit variation pattern of the normal reach, and the variation display mode of the decorative design is the reach mode and the super reach effect is executed. And a variation pattern of super reach big hit that is a big hit.

  In the example of FIG. 13-13 (B), the fluctuation pattern for the normal reach jackpot is determined at a rate of 5%, and the fluctuation pattern for the super reach jackpot is determined at a ratio of 95%.

  As described above, when the super reach variation pattern is selected, the ratio of occurrence of big hits is higher than when the super reach variation pattern is not selected. That is, the big hit expectation degree in the variation pattern of the present embodiment has a relationship of normal reach <super reach.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (A) and 13 (B), non-reach, normal reach, and super reach are provided as the variation patterns, but FIGS. 13-6 (A) and 13 As shown in (B), as a variation pattern of super reach, a super reach without pseudo continuous effect (no pseudo continuous), a super reach with one pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous once), a plurality of times And a super reach with a pseudo-continuous production (two times of pseudo-continuous).

  As described above, the CPU 103, when starting the variation display of the special symbol, displays the display result designation command for designating the display result, the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern, and the reserved memory count subtraction designation command (first command). The reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

  The CPU 120 for effect control uses a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first hold symbol) to specify that the reserved memory number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started. Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating a display result (a jackpot type in the case of a big hit or disappointment or a big jackpot), a special symbol change time, and a production content ( The special symbol variation display is executed based on the fact that a set of commands, such as a reach pattern and a pseudo-ream), which are designated from the game control microcomputer 100, is received. It is possible to specify the fluctuating time and production contents (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.). The effect control CPU 120 receives the special symbol (first special symbol) based on the fact that the special symbol designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100 when the special symbol variation display is finished and the display result is finalized. It is possible to specify that the display result is derived after the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is terminated.

  FIG. 13-12 is a flowchart of the change start time effect determination process. Unlike the process shown in FIG. 13-5, this variation start time effect determination process determines whether or not to execute a music reach effect, a count display effect, a cut-in notice effect, and a timer effect.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the change start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives the one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the display control of the display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is specified. An effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern designation command is set, and the decorative design based on the designated variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the change display is determined by the change start effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-12.

  First, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the music reach production and the final stage when the music reach production is executed, by using the music reach production final stage determination tables (FIGS. 13-13 (C) and (D)). (See step S35TM2010).

  FIG. 13C is the execution ratio of the music reach effect when the display result is out of order, and the determination for determining whether or not to execute the music reach effect and the final stage for each of the variation patterns for loss. A value has been allocated. The effect control CPU 120 determines that the music reach effect is not executed at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is “out of reach”. Further, when the variation pattern is “out of normal reach”, it is determined not to execute the music reach effect at a rate of 100%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is “out of super reach”, it is decided not to execute the music reach effect at a rate of 40%, and to execute the music reach effect at the first stage at a rate of 30%. Then, it is decided to execute up to the second stage of the music reach production at a rate of 20%, and to execute up to the third stage of the music reach production at a rate of 10%.

  FIG. 13-13 (D) shows the execution ratio of the music reach effect when the display result is a big hit, and the determination for determining whether or not the music reach effect is executed and the final stage for each of the big hit variation patterns. A value has been allocated. When the variation pattern is “normal reach jackpot”, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the music reach effect at a rate of 100%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is “super reach big hit”, it is decided not to execute the music reach production at a rate of 20%, and decides to execute up to the first stage of the music reach production at a rate of 10%. Then, it is decided to execute up to the second stage of the music reach production at a rate of 30% and to execute up to the third stage of the music reach production at a rate of 40%.

  In this way, when the final stage of the music reach production is the second stage (when the music reproduction period is up to 15 seconds) than when the final stage of the music reach production is the first stage (when the music reproduction period is up to 15 seconds). Is higher than 30 seconds). In addition, when the final stage of the music reach production is the third stage (when the music reproduction period is 60 seconds) than when the final stage of the music reach production is the second stage (when the music reproduction period is up to 30 seconds). Is the second and the song is played to the end), the jackpot expectation is higher. That is, the relationship of the first stage <second stage <third stage is established with respect to the reliability (expected degree of jackpot) of the music reach production.

  Next, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the music reach effect (YES in step S35TM2020), it determines to execute the count display effect (step S35TM2030). On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the music reach effect (NO in step S35TM2020), it is determined not to execute the count display effect (step S35TM2040).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the count display effect at a rate of 100% when the music reach effect is executed, and 100 when the music reach effect is not executed. The percentage display effect is not executed at the rate of%.

  Here, the numerical value update period in the count display effect coincides with the music reproduction period in the music reach effect. Therefore, when it is decided to end the music reach production in the first stage, the final value in the count display production is decided to be “15”, and the music reach production is decided to be finished in the second stage. When the final value in the count display effect is determined to be “30” and the music reach effect is determined to be terminated in the third stage, the final value in the count display effect is determined to be “60”. Thus, the final value of the count display effect is determined based on the final stage of the music reach effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the cut-in notice effect execution ratio determination table (see FIG. 13-13 (E)) (step S35TM2050).

  FIG. 13-13 (E) is a table showing the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect, and a determination value for deciding whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect is assigned in correspondence with the presence or absence of the count display effect. Yes. When the count display effect is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 45% but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 55%. When the count display effect is executed, it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is not executed at a rate of 98% and the cut-in notice effect is executed at a rate of 2%.

  Next, when it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (YES in step S35TM2060), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect form of the cut-in notice effect as the effect form determination table for the cut-in notice effect (FIG. 13). -13 (F) reference) (step S35TM2070). On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the cut-in notice effect (NO in step S35TM2060), the process is ended as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 13-13 (F), in this embodiment, the determination value is assigned so that the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect varies depending on the display result. When the display result is “out of” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), the effect of the cut-in notice effect (the character of the cut-in image) is 80%. The first aspect “CHANCE” is obtained at a ratio of 20% and the second aspect “extreme heat” is obtained at a ratio of 20%. On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the production mode of the cut-in notice effect (the character of the cut-in image) is The first mode “CHANCE” is formed at a rate of 20%, and the second mode “extreme heat” is formed at a rate of 80%.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the timer effect in response to the cut-in notice effect (step S35TM2080), and ends the process as it is.

  In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect, since it is decided to execute the timer effect at a rate of 100%, the execution rate of the timer effect is shown in FIG. 13-13 (E). It matches the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect shown. As shown in FIG. 13-13 (E), when the count display effect is executed, the rate at which the cut-in notice effect is executed is lower than when the count display effect is not executed. That is, when the count display effect is executed, the rate at which the timer effect is executed is lower than when the count display effect is not executed.

  In this embodiment, when both the count display effect and the timer effect are executed, the count display effect execution period and the timer effect execution period overlap (the timer effect is displayed while the count display effect is being executed). Therefore, a plurality of types of operations, that is, an operation for adding and updating the playback time of the music and an operation for subtracting and updating the remaining time until the cut-in image display are performed simultaneously in parallel. As a result, the production may be complicated and the player may be confused. In the present embodiment, when the count display effect is being executed, the effect ratio of the timer effect is made lower than when the count display effect is not being executed, so that both effects can be achieved while diversifying the effect. By limiting the simultaneous execution, the complexity of the production is suppressed.

(Specific example of counting display effect corresponding to music reach effect)
Next, a specific example of the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-14 and 13-15. FIG. 13-14 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect is executed and the timer effect is not executed, and FIG. 13-15 corresponds to the music reach effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, when not performing a timer effect by performing a count display effect.

  In the example shown below, the production control CPU 120 determines the final stage of the music reach production as the third stage based on the change pattern of the super reach, and correspondingly sets the numerical value of the music playback time. Assume that it is determined that the count display effect to be updated up to 60 is executed, while the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect are not executed.

  First, FIG. 13-15 (1) shows a state in which a variation display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols (variation display started at the timing of T 1 shown in FIG. 13-14) is executed on the main liquid crystal display 35 TM 200. Show. At this time, nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, but a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of the character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, so that the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are displayed. The whole of the character is displayed. And the 1st logo panel 35TM410 and the 2nd logo panel 35TM420 are in the origin position which overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front view.

  At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 disposed behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is lowered, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the screen of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (2), the effect control CPU 120 sets “7” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern is to be established. The display is stopped by displaying the decorative symbol "", and the character "Leach!" Is displayed on the upper portion of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing T2 in FIGS. 13-14).

  Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the music reach production in response to the reach state being established. FIG. 13-15 (3) shows a state in which the first stage of the music reach effect (the music reach effect started at the timing T3 in FIG. 13-14) is being executed. The production control CPU 120 starts playing the music at the start timing of the music reach production, and as the first stage production, the character A, the note 35TM700, and the characters “music reach START !!” are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. Display. With the start of the music reach effect, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  The effect control CPU 120 starts the count display effect at the timing when the music reproduction is started, and displays “1” as the initial value of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. During reproduction of the music, the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is incremented by 1 every time 1 second elapses. Here, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (on the player side) at the timing when the music reach effect is started, the player It is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the music playback time displayed on the display 35TM300.

  During the period when the music reach production is in the first stage (period in which the music playback time is 1 to 15 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (to the player side). The player remains in a state where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the music playback time displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. However, although the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 disposed behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is in a lowered state, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. It is possible to visually recognize the music playback time displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (3), since it is possible to visually recognize that the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is “8”, the player can play the music playback time (see FIG. 13-14). It is possible to grasp that the elapsed time from the timing of T3 shown is 8 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 16 seconds (the timing of T4A shown in FIG. 13-14), the effect control CPU 120 performs the second stage of the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-15 (4). Migrate to In the second stage, the reproduction of the music is continued (reproduction of the music after 16 seconds is performed), and the character A and the character B, and the note 35TM700 and the note 35TM710 are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. In other words, with the transition from the first stage to the second stage, the type of character and the type of note to be displayed are increased while reproducing the same music piece.

  In addition, when the music reach production has reached the second stage, the production control CPU 120 moves both decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position to the production position at the same time. (T4A to T4B shown in FIGS. 13-14). That is, the character portion “FEV” and the character portion “ER!” Are integrally separated from the origin position to the effect position without being separated. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and the visibility of the count display effect is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to a production position that overlaps with the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in front and back, thereby lowering the visibility of the lower part of the screen in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is in a state.

  During the period in which the music reach production is in the second stage (the music playback time is 16 to 30 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are not present in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the count display production is performed. Is in a state where the visibility is improved compared to the first stage. Therefore, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the numerical value (music reproduction time) of the count display effect, and the music reproduction time can be grasped more clearly. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (4), “16” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music playback time reaching 16 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the second stage (16 to 30 seconds) of the music effect.

  Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 31 seconds (timing T5 shown in FIG. 13-14), the effect control CPU 120 performs the third stage of the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-15 (5). Migrate to In the third stage, the music continues to be played back (the part after 31 seconds of the music is played back), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 has the characters A, B, and C, and the notes 35TM700, 35TM710, And the note 35TM720 is displayed. That is, with the transition from the second stage to the third stage, the type of character to be displayed and the type of note are increased while continuing the same piece of music.

  In the period in which the music reach production is in the third stage (the music playback time is 31 to 60 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are not present in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the count display production is performed. Is in a state where the visibility is improved compared to the first stage. Therefore, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the numerical value (music reproduction time) of the count display effect, and the music reproduction time can be grasped more clearly. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (5), “31” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music playback time reaching 31 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the third stage (31 to 60 seconds) of the music effect.

  Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 60 seconds (timing T6 shown in FIGS. 13-14), the music is played back to the end, and the decorative design is confirmed and stopped when the playback of the music is completed. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (6), the CPU 120 for effect control has a combination of decorative symbols (in this example, the display result is a big hit in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R). “777”) is stopped. Further, the occurrence of a big hit is informed by displaying the letters “big hit !!” on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays “60” as the final value of the count display effect (the final reproduction time of the music in the music reach effect) in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  With the end of the music reach effect and the count display effect, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the effect position to the origin position (FIG. 13-). 18 T7A-T7B). Thereby, the final value (“60” in this example) of the count display effect remains displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the visibility of the final value is the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel. It will be lowered by 35TM420. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 erases the final value (“60” in this example) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  As described above, during the period in which the production control CPU 120 executes the first stage of music reach production (1 to 15 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 Since it is in the origin position which overlaps with the display device 35TM300 in the front-and-rear direction, the visibility of the count display effect (the period from 1 to 15) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300 is lowered. On the other hand, during the period in which the production control CPU 120 executes the second stage (from 16 seconds to 30 seconds) and the third stage (from 31 seconds to 60 seconds) of the music reach production, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second The logo panel 35TM420 is in an effect position that does not overlap with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front view, and the visibility of the count display effect (the value is 16 to 60) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. is doing.

  Thus, the visibility of the counting display effect can be switched by improving or decreasing the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in accordance with the displacement of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. Yes. As a result, regarding the count display effect executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to easily change only the visibility while performing a constant addition operation according to the music playback time.

  When the music reach production shifts from the first stage to the second stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move to the production position, and the visibility of the count display production on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. Therefore, it is emphasized that the music reach production has shifted from the first stage to the second stage, that is, has entered a period with a higher expectation degree of big hits, and the interest can be improved.

  On the other hand, if the music reach production is in the first stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the production position, and the visibility of the count display production in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. Then, the numerical value (1 to 15) of the counting display effect is clearly recognized by the player even though the big hit expectation level is still low. As a result, the interest of the music reach effect and the count display effect is also reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the period in which the first stage of the music reach effect is being executed, regardless of whether the music reach effect ends in the first step. By being in the origin position, the visibility of the count display effect in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered, and the decrease in interest is suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is executed at a rate of 100%. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and is finally executed in the music reach effect. Depending on the number, the execution ratio of the count display effect may be varied. For example, when the music reach effect ends at the first stage, the count display effect is not executed at a rate of 100%, and when the music reach effect is executed until the second stage or the third stage, 100% The count display effect may be executed at the rate of. Here, when the music reach production is executed up to the second stage or the third stage, the count display production is started at the timing when the music reach has shifted to the second stage (that is, addition from the initial value “16”). Update operation). By adopting such a configuration, during the period in which the second stage or the third stage of the music reach effect is executed, the music displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reproduced by executing the count display effect. Although it is possible to visually recognize the time (16-), the music playback time is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 because the count display effect is not executed during the first stage of the music reach effect. Since it is not done, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G) described later, when the music reach effect is executed up to the second stage, the corresponding count display effect starts from the first stage (initial value “1”). It may be possible to start from the second stage (initial value “16”). When the music reach effect is executed up to the third stage, the corresponding count display effect starts from the first stage (initial value “1”) and the second stage (initial value “16”). )) And the third stage (initial value “31”). By setting it as such a structure, the timing which a count display effect is started can be diversified, and an interest can be improved.

  Note that, as described above, the super reach variation pattern includes a super reach without a pseudo continuous effect, a super reach with one pseudo continuous effect, and a super reach with two pseudo continuous effects. You may do it. In this case, the big hit expectation is preferably superreach (no quasi-continuous) <superreach (one quasi-continuous) <superreach (two quasi-continuous). In the case of such an effect configuration, when a pseudo-continuous effect is executed (when a super-reach of one or two pseudo-continuous is selected), when a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed (pseudo continuous effect). It is preferable that the rate at which the music reach effect and the count display effect are executed up to the second stage or the third stage is higher than that when no super-reach is selected.

  In addition, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed a plurality of times (when the super-ream 2 times super-reach is selected), when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed only once (the pseudo-ream 1 super-reach is selected). The ratio at which the music reach effect and the count display effect are executed up to the second stage or the third stage may be made higher than that in the case where it is performed. With such an effect configuration, the player is interested in whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is executed a plurality of times, and the interest is improved. be able to.

(Other examples related to the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation)
FIGS. 13-16 is a flowchart which shows the other example regarding the production determination process at the time of a change start. In this variation start time effect determination process, unlike the process shown in FIG. 13-12, when the music reach effect is executed, the timing for starting the counting display effect according to the final stage number of the determined music reach effect. Can be made different.

  Specifically, in the process shown in FIG. 13-12, when the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is always executed from the first stage of the music reach effect (the initial value of the count display effect is In the process shown in FIG. 13-16, when the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is started from the second stage (sub liquid crystal display). When the initial value displayed on the 35TM300 is “16”) and the count display effect starts from the third stage (when the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is “31”). (See Figure 13-17 (G)).

  The execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect is set to be higher when the count display effect is executed than when the count display effect is not executed (FIG. 13-17 (H )). Therefore, the countdown operation until the start of the cut-in notice effect in the timer effect and the update operation of the music reproduction time in the count display effect are performed in parallel at a high rate.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the change start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a set of commands accompanying the start of variable display of a special symbol, a display result designation command displays a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the variable symbol display of the special symbol. And an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) to be executed based on the change pattern designation command, and a decorative pattern change based on the specified change pattern The effect to be executed during the display is determined by the change start time effect determining process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the music reach effect and the final stage based on the final stage determination table for the music reach effect (see FIGS. 13-13C and 13D) (step S35TM3010). ).

  Next, if the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the music reach effect (YES in step S35TM3020), the execution start stage determination table for the count display effect (FIG. 13-17) determines whether or not the count display effect is executed. (See (G)) (step S35TM2030). On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the music reach effect (NO in step S35TM3020), it is determined not to execute the count display effect (step S35TM3040).

  FIG. 13-17 (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the count display effect execution start stage determination table, and the count display effect execution start stage for each of the determined final stages of the music reach effect. Judgment values for deciding are assigned. When the final stage of the music reach effect is the first stage, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the count display effect from the first stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 1% (sub liquid crystal display device). 35TM300 is determined to display “1” as an initial value), and it is determined not to execute the count display effect at a rate of 99%.

  Further, when the final stage of the music reach production is the second stage, it is decided to execute the count display production from the first stage of the music reach production at a rate of 3% (the initial value is set in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300). "1" is determined to be displayed) and a count display effect is determined from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 25% ("16" is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300). And decide not to execute the count display effect at a rate of 72%.

  Further, when the final stage of the music reach production is the third stage, it is decided to execute the count display production from the first stage of the music reach production at a rate of 5% (the initial value is set in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300). "1" is determined to be displayed as the first value), and the count display effect is determined to be executed from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 30% ("16" is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300). Decided to display a count display effect from the third stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 60% (decided to display “31” as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300) And decide not to execute the count display effect at a rate of 5%.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the count display effect is started from the first stage of the music reach effect, “1” is displayed as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and then the music reach effect is displayed. The addition operation according to the music playback time is continued until the final value corresponding to the final stage (“15” for the first stage, “30” for the second stage, “60” for the third stage). Will be. Further, when it is determined that the count display effect is started from the second stage of the music reach effect, “16” is displayed as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and then according to the final stage of the music reach effect. The adding operation corresponding to the music playback time is continued until the final value (“30” in the second stage, “60” in the third stage). Further, when it is determined that the count display effect is started from the third stage of the music reach effect, “31” is displayed as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and then according to the final stage of the music reach effect. The addition operation according to the music playback time is continued until the final value (“60” in the third stage).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), when the final stage of the music reach production is the second stage, the count display production is not executed at a rate of 72%, and (i) at a rate of 3%. The count display effect is executed from the first stage of the music reach effect, and (ii) the count display effect is executed from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 25%. That is, the ratio that the count display effect is executed in the first stage of the music reach effect is 3% of (i), whereas the ratio that the count display effect is executed in the second stage of the music reach effect. Is 28% of (i) + (ii). If the final stage of the music reach production is the third stage, the count display effect is not executed at a rate of 5%, and (iii) the count display effect is executed from the first stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 5%. (IV) The count display effect is executed from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 30%, and the count display effect is executed from the third stage of the music reach effect at a rate of (V) 60%. That is, the ratio that the count display effect is executed in the first stage of the music reach effect is 5% of (iii), whereas the ratio that the count display effect is executed in the second stage of the music reach effect. Is 35% of (iii) + (iV), and the ratio that the count display effect is executed in the third stage of the music reach effect is 95% of (iii) + (iV) + (V).

  According to the ratio shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the ratio of executing the count display effect is the lowest when the music reach effect is in the first stage, and the count display is performed when the music reach effect is in the second stage. The ratio of executing the effect is the next lowest, and the ratio of executing the count display effect is the highest when the music reach effect is in the third stage.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the cut-in notice effect execution ratio determination table (see FIG. 13-17 (H)) (step S35TM3050).

  FIG. 13-17 (H) is a table showing the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect, and a determination value for deciding whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect is assigned in accordance with whether or not the count display effect is executed. Yes. When the count display effect is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 95% but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 5%. Further, when executing the count display effect, it is determined not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40%, but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 60%.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the cut-in notice effect (YES in step S35TM3060), the effect form of the cut-in notice effect is selected as the effect form of the cut-in notice effect (FIG. 13). -13 (F)) (step S35TM3070), it is determined to execute the timer effect (step S35TM3080), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the cut-in notice effect (NO in step S35TM3060), the process is ended as it is.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (C) and (D), the relationship between the final stage of music reach production and the jackpot expectation is “first stage” <“second stage” <“ Therefore, the player expects the music playback time to be as long as possible, that is, the numerical value of the music playback time displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 to be as large as possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the ratio of the count display effect is executed when the music reach effect is the second stage than when the music reach effect is the first stage. The ratio of the count display effect is higher in the case where the music reach effect is in the third stage than in the case where the music reach effect is in the second stage. Therefore, the player is also interested in the timing at which the count display effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect, since the timer effect is executed at a rate of 100%, the execution ratio of the timer effect matches the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect. . And as shown in FIG. 13-17 (H), the ratio in which the cut-in notice effect is executed is higher when the count display effect is executed than when the count display effect is not executed. . That is, when the count display effect is executed, the rate at which the timer effect is executed is higher than when the count display effect is not executed. As described above, when the count display effect is being executed, by increasing the execution ratio of the timer effect, the count display effect and the timer effect can be related to each other and the interest can be improved.

(Modification of count display effect and timer effect)
Next, modified examples of the count display effect and the timer effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-18, 13-19, and 13-20. FIG. 13-18 is a time chart in the case where the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect is executed and the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is executed. FIG. 13-19 and FIG. An example of the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect is executed and the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is executed is shown. It is explanatory drawing.

  In the example shown below, the production control CPU 120 determines the final stage of the music reach production as the third stage based on the change pattern of the super reach, and the count display production in the first stage of the music reach production. Is determined to execute the count display effect in the second and third stages of the music reach effect, and the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect of the first mode during the execution of the third stage of the music reach effect. It is assumed that it is decided to execute.

  First, FIG. 13-19 (1) shows a state in which a variation display of the left middle right decorative design (variation display started at the timing of T 1 shown in FIG. 13-18) is being executed on the main liquid crystal display 35 TM 200. Show. At this time, nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, but a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of the character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, so that the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are displayed. The whole of the character is displayed. And the 1st logo panel 35TM410 and the 2nd logo panel 35TM420 are in the origin position which overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front view.

  At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 disposed behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is lowered, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the screen of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. However, since the count display effect has not yet been executed at this point, no numerical value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (2), the effect control CPU 120 sets “7” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The display is stopped by displaying the decorative symbol "", and the character "Leach!" Is displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing T2 in FIG. 13-18).

  Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the music reach production in response to the reach state being established. FIG. 13-19 (3) shows a state in which the first stage of the music reach effect (the music reach effect started at the timing T3 in FIG. 13-18) is being executed. The production control CPU 120 starts playing the music at the start timing of the music reach production, and as the first stage production, the character A, the note 35TM700, and the characters “music reach START !!” are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. Display. With the start of the music reach effect, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  The effect control CPU 120 does not execute the count display effect in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 during the period in which the first stage of the music reach effect is executed (T3 to T4A in FIG. 13-18). The music playback time is not displayed on the display 35TM300, and the update operation is not performed.

  Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 16 seconds (the timing of T4A shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 performs the second stage of the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (4). Migrate to In the second stage, the reproduction of the music is continued (reproduction of the music after 16 seconds is performed), and the character A and the character B, and the note 35TM700 and the note 35TM710 are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. In other words, with the transition from the first stage to the second stage, the type of character and the type of note to be displayed are increased while reproducing the same music piece.

  The effect control CPU 120 starts the count display effect at the timing when the music reach effect is in the second stage (the timing at which the portion of the music that has shifted to 16 seconds has been played), and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 performs the count display effect. “16” is displayed as the initial value of. During reproduction of the music, the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is incremented by 1 every time 1 second elapses. Here, as described later, at the timing when the second stage of the music reach production is started, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (to the player side). Therefore, the player can easily see the music playback time displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  In addition, when the music reach production has reached the second stage, the production control CPU 120 moves both decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position to the production position at the same time. (T4A-T4B shown in FIGS. 13-18). That is, the character portion “FEV” and the character portion “ER!” Are integrally separated from the origin position to the effect position without being separated. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and the visibility of the count display effect is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to a production position that overlaps with the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in front and back, thereby lowering the visibility of the lower part of the screen in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is in a state.

  Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 31 seconds (timing T5 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (5), performs the third stage of the music reach effect. Migrate to In the third stage, the music continues to be played back (the part after 31 seconds of the music is played back), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 has the characters A, B, and C, and the notes 35TM700, 35TM710, And the note 35TM720 is displayed. That is, with the transition from the second stage to the third stage, the type of character to be displayed and the type of note are increased while continuing the same piece of music.

  In the period in which the music reach production is in the third stage (the music playback time is 31 to 60 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are not present in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the count display production is performed. Is in a state where the visibility is improved compared to the first stage. Therefore, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the numerical value (music reproduction time) of the count display effect, and the music reproduction time can be grasped more clearly. In the example shown in FIG. 13-19 (5), “31” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music playback time reaching 31 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the third stage (31 to 60 seconds) of the music effect.

  Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 42 seconds (timing T6 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (6). Based on the fact that the remaining time (seconds) becomes 3 seconds, a timer effect is executed, and a timer image 35TM620 (in this example, “3” which is an initial value) is displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. Numerical images). At this time, “42” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the count display effect in response to the music playback time reaching 42 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 43 seconds (timing T7 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (7). Based on the remaining time (seconds) until 2 seconds, the timer effect is continued and the timer image 35TM620 updated in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (in this example, a numerical value of “2”) Image). At this time, “43” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the count display effect in response to the music playback time reaching 43 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 44 seconds (timing T8 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (8). Timer image 35TM620 (in this example, a numerical value of “1”) is updated in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 based on the remaining time (seconds) until 1 sec. Image). At this time, “44” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the count display effect in response to the music playback time reaching 44 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 45 seconds (timing T9 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (9). Based on the fact that the remaining time (seconds) until 0 seconds is 0 seconds, the timer effect is continued and the timer image 35TM620 updated in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (in this example, the final value “ 0 ") is displayed. At this time, “45” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the count display effect in response to the music playback time reaching 45 seconds.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the cut-in notice effect in accordance with the execution timing of the cut-in notice effect (timing when the numerical value of the timer image in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is updated from “1” to “0”). To display the cut-in image 35TM800 having a display mode with higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect (in this example, the cut-in image “CHANCE” in the first mode) on the upper portion of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. .

  Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 46 seconds (timing T10 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 ends the timer effect in response to the execution of the cut-in notice effect, The display of the timer image 35TM620 displayed in the lower left area of the liquid crystal display 35TM200 (in this example, a numerical image of “0” as the final value) is terminated. At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control continues to execute the cut-in notice effect, and the cut-in image 35TM800 (in the display mode having a higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect is displayed above the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. In this example, the cut-in image “CHANCE” of the first aspect is continuously displayed. As the numerical value of the count display effect, “46” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music playback time reaching 46 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 47 seconds (timing T11 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 continues the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (10). The cut-in image 35TM800 (in this example, the cut-in image “CHANCE” of the first aspect) having a display mode with higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect is displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is displayed continuously. At this time, “47” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the count display effect in response to the music playback time reaching 47 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 48 seconds (the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 ends the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (11). Display of cut-in image 35TM800 (in this example, cut-in image “CHANCE” in the first mode) displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect on the upper part of main liquid crystal display 35TM200 End. Thereby, the character A, the character B, and the character C displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the note 35TM700, the note 35TM710, and the note 35TM720 become visible again. At this time, “48” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the count display effect in response to the music playback time reaching 48 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 60 seconds (the timing of T13 shown in FIG. 13-18), the music is played back to the end, and the decorative design is confirmed and stopped when the playback of the music is completed. In the example shown in FIG. 13-20 (12), the CPU 120 for effect control has a combination of decorative symbols (in this example, the display result is a big hit in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R). “777”) is stopped. Further, the occurrence of a big hit is informed by displaying the letters “big hit !!” on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays “60” as the final value of the count display effect (the final reproduction time of the music in the music reach effect) in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  With the end of the music reach effect and the count display effect, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the effect position to the origin position (FIG. 13-). T14A-T14B shown in FIG. Thereby, the final value (“60” in this example) of the count display effect remains displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the visibility of the final value is the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel. It will be lowered by 35TM420. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 erases the final value (“60” in this example) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  The production control CPU 120 executes the second stage of the music reach production by displacing the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 to the origin position during the period of executing the first stage of the music reach production. During the period, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the effect position. In addition, while the performance control CPU 120 performs the first stage of the music reach effect while reducing the execution ratio of the count display effect, the period of executing the second stage of the music reach effect is: The execution ratio of the count display effect is set higher than the period during which the first stage of the music reach effect is being executed.

  Therefore, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved during the period in which the second stage of the music reach effect is being executed, and the ratio at which the effect information of the count display effect is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is also improved. is doing. Therefore, it is emphasized that the music reach production has shifted to the second stage, and the interest can be improved. On the other hand, regardless of whether or not the music reach production ends in the first stage, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced during the period in which the first stage of the music reach production is executed. The ratio at which the effect information of the count display effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 is also reduced. For this reason, although the counting display effect is being executed, it is not emphasized that the first stage (from 1 second to 15 seconds) with a low expectation degree of jackpot is not emphasized, and a decrease in interest can be prevented.

(1) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a count display effect and a timer effect are executed as effects related to the display result of the variable display being executed. A count display effect or a timer effect may be executed as a pre-reading notice effect related to the display result of no variable display. Specifically, a special background image that is different from a normal background image over a plurality of variation displays until the variation display (target variation) based on the start winning is performed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. It is also possible to execute a zone effect that displays. Then, a count display effect in which the execution period of the zone effect (the number of fluctuations in a special background image) is added and updated in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 may be executed. Further, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, a timer effect is executed in which the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 subtracts and updates the remaining time until the variation display (target variation) based on the starting winning is executed. Also good. As in these examples, the count display effect and the timer effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the initial number of seconds of the timer effect is always “3” (the timer effect is started 3 seconds before the cut-in image 35TM800 is displayed) is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of initial seconds may be selected at different ratios depending on the production mode or display result of the cut-in notice effect. For example, when the production mode of the cut-in notice effect is the first mode, the rate at which “3” is the initial value in the timer production is 80%, and the rate at which “5” is the initial value is 20%. When the production mode of the cut-in notice effect is the second mode, the rate at which “3” is the initial value in the timer production is 20%, and the rate at which “5” is the initial value is 80%. May be. Also, when the display result is off, the ratio of “3” to the initial value is 80% and the ratio of “5” to the initial value is 20% in the timer effect, but the display result is a big hit. In the timer effect, the ratio at which “3” becomes the initial value may be 20% and the ratio at which “5” becomes the initial value may be 80%.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a music reach effect is always executed when the count display effect is executed has been described. The music reach production may not be executed. In the above embodiment, an example in which a timer effect is always executed when a cut-in notice effect is executed has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and even when a cut-in notice effect is executed. A timer effect may not be executed. In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the cut-in notice effect is always executed when the timer effect is executed has been described. A notice effect may not be executed.

(4) In the above embodiment, the example in which the effect control CPU 120 displays the numerical value of the count display effect by the image imitating the 7-segment display in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is shown. Not limited to the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, an actual 7-segment display is provided, and the numerical value of the count display effect is displayed (emitted) by performing light emission control of the 7-segment display. good.

(5) In the above embodiment, the example is shown in which the count display effect is executed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, while the timer effect is executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. While the effect is executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the timer effect may be executed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Further, both the count display effect and the timer effect may be executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and both the count display effect and the timer effect may be executed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

(6) It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 has the remaining number of fluctuations that can be controlled in the short time state (number of time reductions) and the remaining number of fluctuations that can be controlled in the state of change (ST (special time)) in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. The number of rounds in the big hit gaming state can be displayed. During the period in which the information (numerical values) relating to these gaming states is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the count display effect is executed more than the period in which the information (numerical values) relating to these gaming states is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It is also possible to make the ratio of being reduced. According to such a configuration, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 restricts the simultaneous display of the numerical value of the count display effect and the information (numerical value) regarding the gaming state, giving priority to the latter, which is more important for the player. Can be notified.

(7) In the above embodiment, in the timer effect, the example of subtracting and updating the remaining time until the cut-in notice effect is executed has been shown, but the remaining time until another effect is executed is subtracted and updated. For example, the remaining time until the movable combination such as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 operates can be subtracted and updated. In the above embodiment, in the count display effect, an example of adding and updating the reproduction time of the music, which is a numerical value related to the execution status of the effect, is shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, the first logo panel 35TM410 You may make it add and update the elapsed time after movable movable objects, such as 2nd logo panel 35TM420, moved to an effect position.

(8) In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the execution of the suggestion effect that suggests that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the timer effect that performs the countdown operation for gradually decreasing the displayed numerical value is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an effect corresponding to the execution of the suggestion effect, an update effect that performs an update operation for updating the display mode of the display body (object displayed on the screen) may be executed. Specifically, an addition operation for expanding the display area of the display body stepwise (or increasing the number of display bodies stepwise), or reducing the display area of the display body stepwise (or the display body You may make it perform the update effect which performs a subtraction operation | movement which reduces a number in steps.

  As an example, an update effect may be executed in which an addition operation is performed to gradually expand the display area of the meter displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 or the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the display area of the meter is maximized. When the aspect is set to 100%, the meter display area is gradually increased and updated from 0% (initial value) to 10%, 20%, etc. When 100% is reached, the suggested effect When the update stops without reaching 100% (for example, 80%), the suggestion effect may not be executed (the execution ratio of the suggestion effect is low).

(9) When a plurality of types of suggestion effects are provided, an update effect corresponding to each type of suggestion effects may be executed. For example, a first cut-in notice effect that can be executed at the timing immediately after the reach state is established as the first suggestion effect, and a second cut-in notice effect that can be executed at a time immediately before the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped as the second suggestion effect. Is provided, the first update effect is performed to update the numerical value or meter indicating the possibility (expected degree) that the first cut-in notice effect is executed, and the second cut-in notice effect is executed. You may make it perform the 2nd update effect which performs the operation | movement which updates the numerical value or meter which shows the possibility (expectation degree) to read.

  In this case, the first update effect and the second update effect may be executed simultaneously in parallel. For example, the possibility (expectation) indicated by the first update effect at the timing immediately after the reach state is reached reaches 100% (while, the possibility (expectation) indicated by the second update effect is still 20% at this time. Corresponding to this, the first cut-in notice effect is executed, and the first update effect is finished in response to the execution of the first cut-in notice effect (the displayed numerical value or meter is erased), After that, the possibility (expectation) indicated by the second update effect reaches 100% at the timing immediately before the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped, and the second cut-in notice effect is executed in response to this, and the second cut is performed. The second update effect may be terminated in accordance with the execution of the in-notice effect (the displayed numerical value or meter is deleted).

(10) In the above embodiment, the numerical value (seconds) related to the count display effect related to the execution state of the suggested effect, the display color of the display body (meter), or the numerical value related to the update effect corresponding to the execution of the suggested effect ( The number of seconds) or the display color of the display body (meter) may be determined at different rates depending on the display result. For example, when the display result is a big hit, the display color is determined to be red at a higher rate than when the display result is out of place, and when the display result is out of place, the display result is higher than when the display result is a big hit. The display color may be determined to be blue by the ratio. Further, when the display result is a big hit, a plurality of display bodies to be displayed are determined at a higher rate than when the display result is out of place (a plurality of types of count display effects and update effects to be executed are determined). ) When the display result is out of order, one display body to be displayed is determined at a higher rate than in the case where the display result is a big hit (the number of types of count display effects and update effects to be executed is one). May be determined).

(11) In the above embodiment, an example in which the playback time (number of playback seconds) of the music is displayed as an effect related to the execution state of the music reach effect is shown. You may make it display the ratio of the reproduction period (period from the start of a music to the present time) to the present time with respect to the reproduction period (period from the beginning of the music to the last). For example, when the playback period of the entire music is 60 seconds, the playback rate is gradually updated such that 10%, 20%,... The playback ratio may reach 100% at the timing when the music is played back to the end (the timing when 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of playback of the music). Note that the reproduction time (number of reproduction seconds) or the reproduction ratio of the music may be displayed by a display body other than a numerical value (for example, the meter described above).

(12) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the example in which the counting display effect is continued until the final stage of the determined music reach effect is shown. However, the counting display effect may be ended before the final stage of the determined music reach effect is ended. For example, when the final stage of the determined music reach effect is the second stage, and the count display effect is started from the first step (initial value 1), the count display effect is ended only in the first step (final) It may be possible to end with a value of 15). In addition, when the final stage of the determined music reach effect is the third stage and the count display effect is started from the first step (initial value 1), the count display effect is ended only in the first step (final) The count display effect may be ended in the second stage (finished at the final value 30). Further, when the final stage of the music reach effect determined in advance is the third stage, and the count display effect is started from the second stage (initial value 16), the count display effect is ended only in the second stage ( It may be possible to end with a final value of 30). Even in this case, the execution ratio of the count display effect is the highest when the music reach effect is the third stage, the second highest when the music reach effect is the second stage, and the first stage. Try to be the lowest at some point.

(Example of slot machine)
In the above embodiment, as a gaming machine capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that it is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and capable of executing a count display effect and a timer effect related to the execution state of the suggestion effect Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been exemplified, the gaming machine having such a production structure is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and may be a slot machine.

  As described above, the slot machine also includes a main liquid crystal display as a first image display device and a sub liquid crystal display as a second image display device. The 1st logo panel and the 2nd logo panel which are the decorative bodies which have may be provided.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute the music reach effect and the cut-in notice effect as the suggestion effect, but the slot machine may execute the reel lock effect as the suggestion effect. The reel lock effect means that when the start lever is operated, the reel is not driven by normal control (for example, forward rotation method), but is driven by special control (for example, reverse rotation method and / or vibration method). It is a production to make. For example, the reel lock effect is composed of three stages of stage 1 to stage 3. In the first stage of the reel lock effect, the reel is vibrated at a low speed, and in the second stage of the reel lock effect, The reel is vibrated at a medium speed after the first stage, and in the third stage of the reel lock effect, the reel is vibrated at a high speed after the first stage and the second stage.

  In the slot machine having such an effect configuration, the sub control unit may execute the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display during the period in which the reel lock effect is being executed. Here, the period during which the sub control unit is executing the first stage of the reel lock effect is at the origin position where the first logo panel and the second logo panel overlap with the sub liquid crystal display in the front view. The visibility of the count display effect in the sub liquid crystal display is lowered. On the other hand, the period during which the second stage and the third stage of the reel lock production are being executed is in the production position where the first logo panel and the second logo panel do not overlap with the sub liquid crystal display in front view. The visibility of the count display effect in the sub liquid crystal display is improved. According to such a configuration, when the reel lock effect is in the first stage, it is more difficult to recognize the count display effect than when the reel lock effect is in the second and third stages. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the slot machine having such an effect configuration, the sub control unit may change the ratio at which the count display effect is executed in the sub liquid crystal display according to the stage of the reel lock effect (for example, (Same as the relationship between the stage of the music reach effect and the execution start timing of the count display effect shown in FIG. 13-17 (G)). Further, the execution ratio of the timer effect may be varied depending on whether or not the count display effect is executed (for example, whether the count display effect shown in FIG. 13-17 (H) is executed and the cut-in). Same as the relationship with the execution ratio of the notice effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by giving relevance to the count display effect and the timer effect in the slot machine.

[Explanation regarding the feature 01TM]
Next, a gaming machine provided with the characteristic part 01TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-1 to 14-24. The gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is provided with an image display device 5 in the vicinity of the center of the game area on the game board 2, but the image display device 5 is provided on the back side of the game board 2, As a configuration in which a movable body for production is provided at a position behind the board 2 and in front of the image display apparatus 5 (position between the game board 2 and the image display apparatus 5 in the front-rear direction). Also good.

  A movable body 01TM050 shown in FIG. 14-5 has a rotating disk provided so as to be rotatable and a motor for rotating the rotating disk. The movable body 01TM050 tilts sideways (FIG. 14-5 (8 ) And (10)) and an upright position (position shown in FIG. 14-5 (9)) standing upright. The movable body 01TM050 configured as described above is located at the tilted position when the rotating disk is in the initial driving state. Then, when the rotating disk is rotated clockwise by the motor by the motor, the rotating disk rotates about 90 degrees clockwise from the rotation axis about the rotation axis, and moves to the standing position. Further, by reversely driving the motor, the motor moves from the standing position to the tilted position. An effect in which these operations are executed is defined as a movable body operation effect.

  The CPU 103, when starting the variation display of the special symbol, displays a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation). Command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

  The CPU 120 for effect control uses a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first hold symbol) to specify that the reserved memory number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started. Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating a display result (a jackpot type in the case of a big hit or disappointment or a big jackpot), a special symbol change time, and a production content The special symbol variation display is executed based on the fact that one set of commands, such as a variation pattern designation command for designating reach and pseudo-ream), is received from the game control microcomputer 100, and the special symbol is displayed. The change time and production contents (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.) can be specified. The effect control CPU 120 receives the special symbol (first special symbol) based on the fact that the special symbol designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100 when the special symbol variation display is finished and the display result is finalized. It is possible to specify that the display result is derived after the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is terminated.

  FIG. 14A is a flowchart of a variation start time effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives the one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the display control of the display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is specified. An effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern designation command is set, and the decorative design based on the designated variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the change display is determined by the change start effect determination process shown in FIG.

  In the change start effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode based on the cut-in notice effect determination table (see FIG. 14-2 (F)). (Step S01TM1010). The cut-in notice effect is obtained by displaying a predetermined cut-in image with a higher priority than the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the decorative pattern and is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen in front of the player). It is a notice effect to be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 14-2 (F), in the cut-in notice effect determination table, determination values for determining the presence / absence of the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode are assigned according to the display result. When the display result is “out of” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out of”), it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 60%. It is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect of the first mode (character “CHANCE ??”) at the rate of%, and the cut-in preview of the second mode (character “CHANCE !!”) at the rate of 10%. Decide to perform the production. On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 30%. Then, it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect of the first mode (characters “CHANCE ??”) at a rate of 20%, and the second mode (characters of “CHANCE !!”) at a rate of 50%. Decide to execute the cut-in notice effect.

  In this way, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the ratio of winning a big hit is higher than when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, and the cut-in notice effect of the second mode (characters of “CHANCE !!”). Is executed, the percentage of jackpots is higher than when the cut-in notice effect of the first mode (characters “CHANCE ??”) is executed. Therefore, the player will be interested in whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed, and is also interested in the effect mode when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the execution ratio and execution mode of the cut-in notice effect are illustrated based on the display result specified by the display result specifying command. The execution ratio and execution mode of the cut-in notice effect may be determined based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. For example, the cut-in notice effect may be executed only when a variation pattern with reach is specified, or the cut-in notice effect may be executed only when a change pattern with pseudo-ream is specified.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of active display based on the final display mode determination table of active display (see FIG. 14-2 (A)) (step S01TM1020). Here, as described above, the active display is a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) being executed. In this example, the active display is a square active display provided at the lower center of the effect screen. It can be displayed in the area. The hold display is a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display of a decorative pattern (special design) that is not executed, and the hold display corresponding to the first hold memory is active at the lower left of the effect screen (as viewed from the player). Can be displayed in the first hold display area provided on the left side of the display area, and the hold display corresponding to the second hold memory is provided in the lower right part of the effect screen (on the right side of the active display area when viewed from the player). Display in the second hold display area. The final display mode of active display is the final display mode of active display during the variable display of the corresponding decorative design (special design).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-4 and 14-5, which will be described later, the active display and the hold display can be displayed when the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and the variation pattern is displayed. It can be displayed even when a corresponding super reach effect (for example, a battle effect to be described later) is being executed.

  FIG. 14B is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 14-2 (A), in this embodiment, any one of the normal mode, the blue mode, and the red mode can be determined as the final display mode of the active display. A judgment value is assigned to each aspect.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, when the display result is “out of” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “out”), the change pattern designation command is used. The final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variation display of the decorative pattern executed in the above manner is a normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 90%, and a blue mode (blue round display) at a rate of 8%. Thus, the red aspect (red round display) is obtained at a rate of 2%. Further, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “big hit”), it is possible to display the decorative pattern variation display executed based on the variation pattern designation command. The final display mode of the corresponding active display is a normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 5%, a blue mode (blue round display) at a rate of 30%, and a red mode (at a rate of 65%) (Red round display).

  As described above, when the final display mode of the active display is the red mode, the ratio of the big hit is the highest, and when the final display mode of the active display is the blue mode, the ratio of the big hit is the second. When the final display mode of the active display becomes the normal mode, the ratio of the big hit becomes the lowest. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (A), regarding the display mode of the active display, the expectation that the big hit is higher in the order of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern related to the display mode of the active display based on the active display change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 14B and 14C) (step S01TM1030).

  FIGS. 14B and 14C are explanatory diagrams illustrating a specific example of a change pattern of active display. As shown in FIGS. 14-2 (B) and (C), in this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode (display mode determined in step S01TM1020). A plurality of change patterns are provided as change patterns to be generated. Here, the display mode at the time of active shift is that the corresponding display (round object) corresponding to the change display is the first hold display when the change display of the decorative symbol is started (or started). This is a display mode of active display when shifting from the area or the second reserved display area to the active display area (that is, the initial display mode of active display).

  As the change pattern of the active display, the active display at the time of active shift is a normal mode, and thereafter, the active display does not change and the final display mode remains the normal mode. After that, the change pattern 102 in which the active display changes and the final display mode becomes a blue mode, and the active display at the time of active shift is the blue mode, and the active display does not change thereafter and the final display mode remains in the blue mode The change pattern 103, the active display at the time of active shift is a normal mode, and then the active display is changed and the final display mode is a red mode. The active display at the time of active shift is a blue mode. Then, the active display changes and the final display Sama a change pattern 105 as a red aspect, an active display red embodiment of the active shift, then the final display mode active display does not change with the change pattern 106 remains red aspect, there is.

  In the present embodiment, the hold display is a white round object, and does not change to another mode (for example, a blue circle or a red circle) at the stage of the hold display. Then, with the start of the variable display corresponding to the hold display, at the timing when the white round object displayed as the hold display in the hold display area is shifted to the active display area, (1) When the display mode does not change from the white circle (change patterns 101, 102, 104), (2) When the display mode of the object changes to a blue circle (change patterns 103, 105), (3) There are cases where the display mode of the object changes to a red circle (change pattern 106).

  As shown in FIG. 14B, when the display result is “out of” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), the change pattern of the active display is (1) When the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is the normal mode, the change pattern 101 is set at a rate of 100%. (2) The final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 Is a change pattern 102 at a rate of 30% and a change pattern 103 at a rate of 70%, and (3) the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is a red mode Is a change pattern 104 at a rate of 10% and a change pattern at a rate of 20%. Over down 105, and becomes the change pattern 106 at the rate of 70%.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (C), when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the start winning ( (1) When the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is the normal mode, the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the new first reserved memory) is 100%. (2) When the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is a blue mode, the pattern becomes the change pattern 102 at the rate of 70%, the change pattern 103 at the rate of 30%, 3) When the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is a red mode A change pattern 104 becomes at a rate of 80%, next change pattern 105 at a rate of 15%, a changing pattern 106 at a rate of 5%.

  As shown in FIGS. 14-2 (B) and (C), regarding the change pattern of active display, when the final display mode is a blue mode, it is expected that the big hit will be in the order of change pattern 103 <change pattern 102 When the degree becomes high and the final display form becomes a red form, the expectation level that becomes a big hit in the order of change pattern 104 <change pattern 103 <change pattern 102 becomes high. As described above, the change pattern in which the display mode changes from the active display at the time of active shift has a higher percentage of big hits than the change pattern in which the display mode does not change from the active display at the time of active shift. In addition, when the change width from the active shift is large (normal mode during active shift and the final display mode is red), when the change width from active shift is small (blue mode during active shift) The ratio of big hits is higher than when the final display mode is a red mode.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the change suggestion effect and the effect type for executing the change suggestion effect based on the change suggestion effect determination table (see FIGS. 14-2D and 14E). (Step S01TM1040), the variation start time effect determination process is terminated. The change suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display is changed and is an effect accompanied by an action on the active display. The change suggestion effects include the following first change suggestion effects and second change suggestion effects.

  In the first change suggestion effect, as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. Make it work. As a result, the active display 01TM001 displayed at the center of the screen and the movable body 01TM050 in the upright position have a positional relationship that overlaps in the front-rear direction. That is, the first change suggesting effect is an effect in which the movable body 01TM050 acts on the active display 01TM001, and an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes (the change effect is executed). Yes. Further, in a state where the movable body 01TM050 is in the standing position, the flame effect image 01TM160 is displayed around the active display 01TM001 (around the area overlapping the movable body 01TM050 in the front-rear direction in the screen). That is, the first change suggestion effect is an effect in which the flame effect acts on the active display 01TM001, and an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes (the change effect is executed). .

  In the second change suggestion effect, as shown in (13) to (16) of FIG. 14-5 described later, the character appears from the right side of the screen, and the character performs an action of throwing the ball toward the active display 01TM001. After the image is displayed, an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character has hit the active display 01TM001 is displayed. In other words, the second change suggesting effect is an effect in which the ball thrown by the character acts on the active display 01TM001, and an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes (the change effect is executed). It has become.

  Thus, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of effects as effects acting on the active display 01TM001, it is possible to further enhance the interest in changing the display mode of the active display 01TM001.

  FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E) are explanatory drawings showing a specific example of a change suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), in this embodiment, whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect and the change suggestion effect are determined according to the change pattern determined in step S01TM1030. When executing, it is possible to determine which of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is executed, and a determination value is assigned to each determination item.

  As shown in FIG. 14-2 (D), when the display result is “out of” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), (1) in step S01TM1030 When the determined change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 101 (normal → normal), it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 5%, and the first change suggestion at a rate of 95%. It is determined that neither the effect nor the second change suggesting effect is executed. (2) If the active display change pattern determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 102 (normal to blue), it is determined to execute the first change suggesting effect at a rate of 5%; It is decided to execute the second change suggesting effect at a rate of%. Further, (3) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 103 (blue → blue), it is decided to execute the second change suggesting effect at a rate of 20%; It is determined that neither of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is executed at the rate of%. Further, (4) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 104 (normal to red), it is decided to execute the first change suggesting effect at a rate of 10%, 90 It is decided to execute the second change suggesting effect at a rate of%. Further, (5) when the active display change pattern determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 105 (blue → red), it is determined to execute the first change suggesting effect at a rate of 15%; It is decided to execute the second change suggesting effect at a rate of%. Further, (6) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 106 (red → red), any of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 100%. It is decided not to execute the production.

  As shown in FIG. 14-2 (E), when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), (1) in step S01TM1030 When the determined change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 101 (normal → normal), it is decided to execute the second change suggesting effect at a rate of 80%, and the first change suggestion at a rate of 20%. It is determined that neither the effect nor the second change suggesting effect is executed. Further, (2) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 102 (normal to blue), it is determined to execute the first change suggesting effect at a rate of 70%. It is decided to execute the second change suggesting effect at a rate of%. Further, (3) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 103 (blue → blue), it is decided to execute the second change suggesting effect at a rate of 60%; It is determined that neither of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is executed at the rate of%. (4) If the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 104 (normal to red), it is determined to execute the first change suggesting effect at a rate of 90%. It is decided to execute the second change suggesting effect at a rate of%. (5) If the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 105 (blue → red), it is decided to execute the first change suggesting effect at a rate of 80%, It is decided to execute the second change suggesting effect at a rate of%. Further, (6) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 106 (red → red), any of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 100%. It is decided not to execute the production.

  As described above, the change pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes has a higher jackpot expectation than the change pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change. And as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), regarding the change pattern (102, 104, and 105) in which the display mode of the active display changes, when the display result is “out”. When the second change suggestion effect is selected higher than the first change suggestion effect and the display result is “big hit”, the first change suggestion effect is selected rather than the second change suggestion effect. Is expensive. Therefore, when the first change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the second change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed. In this way, when the first change suggesting effect is executed and when the second change suggesting effect is executed, the ratio of the big hits is different, so that it is interested in which effect is executed. Can be made.

  In addition, regarding the change patterns (102, 104, and 105) in which the display mode of the active display changes from the time of the active shift, it can be decided to execute the first change suggesting effect, and the second change suggesting effect is executed. In particular, the change pattern (101, 103, and 106) in which the display mode of the active display does not change from the time of the active shift is not determined to execute the first change suggesting effect, It is possible to decide to execute the second change suggesting effect. That is, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display always changes, but when the second change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may not change. As described above, when the first change suggesting effect is executed and when the second change suggesting effect is executed, any effect is executed depending on the ratio of change in the display mode of the active display. You can be interested in crab.

(Specific examples of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-3, 14-4, and 14-5. 14-3 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is executed. FIGS. 14-4 and 14-5 are the first change suggestion effect. Or it is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when the 2nd change suggestion effect is performed.

  In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit” and the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is “super reach big hit”. In addition, the display of the decorative symbols is performed, and a battle effect in which the teammate character and the enemy character battle is executed as a super reach effect. Then, the occurrence of a big hit is notified by executing a victory effect in which the teammate character finally wins.

  In step S01TM1010, effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the cut-in notice effect of the second mode (“CHANCE!”). In step S01TM1020, the final display mode of active display is set to the red mode. In step S01TM1030, it is determined that the change pattern of active display is changed to the change pattern 104 (normal to red). In the following, an example in which it is decided to execute the first change suggesting effect in step S01TM1040 is shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (12), and the second change suggesting effect is executed in step S01TM1040. An example of the determination is shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (17).

  First, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (1), in the state where the first reserved memory number is 2, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5R, the decorative symbol variation display (variation display started at the timing T1 shown in FIG. 14-3) is executed. At this time, in the small symbol display area 5l, small symbol display area 5c, and small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5, small symbol variation display (variation display started at the timing T1 shown in FIG. 14-3). Is running. The active display area 01TM003 displays a normal mode active display 01TM001 (white round display), and the hold display area 01TM004 displays two normal mode hold displays 01TM002 (white round display). Has been.

  In this embodiment, a symbol smaller than the decorative symbol displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5, whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed and the symbol indicating the display result of the decorative symbol is a small symbol. Called. The small symbol variation display can be executed in parallel with the decorative symbol variation display, and the small symbol stop display can also be performed in parallel with the decoration symbol stop display. The areas where the small symbols are variably displayed and stopped are defined as a small symbol display area 51, a small symbol display area 5c, and a small symbol display area 5r from the left.

  As described above, there are the decorative symbol variation display and the small symbol variation display as the effect symbol variation display executed in response to the special symbol variation display. The effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the special symbol variation display is started, and then the decorative symbol variation display and the small symbol variation display. Is started at the same timing, and when the special symbol change display is finished (when the special symbol is confirmed and stopped), the decoration is determined based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. The symbol variation display and the small symbol variation display are terminated at the same timing (decoration of the decorative symbol and the small symbol are terminated at the same timing).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the state (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 14-3), an operation promotion display 01TM031 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. The operation promotion display 01TM031 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B, and a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B. It has become. The first operation promotion display displayed here is a normal mode operation promotion display corresponding to the cut-in notice effect. At this time, in the small symbol display area 51, small symbol display area 5c, and small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbol variation display is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (3), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the operation of the push button 31B when the operation promotion display 01TM031 is displayed (T3 shown in FIG. 14-3). The cut-in notice effect of the second mode is executed, and the cut-in image 01TM040 (“CHANCE !!”) is displayed on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (4), timing when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the cut-in image 01TM040 (“CHANCE!”) Is displayed (FIG. 14-). 3), the cut-in image 01TM040 (“CHANCE !!”) is deleted, and the cut-in notice effect in the second mode is ended.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (5), the effect control CPU 120 sets “7” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to reach a reach state, and the character “reach!” Is displayed on the upper portion of the image display device 5 (timing T5 in FIG. 14-3). At this time, in the small symbol display area 51, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r, the small symbol variation display is continued. That is, the small symbols are also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped. The display is continuously changed without being displayed.

  And after reach state establishment, as shown to FIG. 14-4 (6), CPU120 for effect control performs a battle effect according to it being a fluctuation pattern of a super reach. Here, with the execution of the battle effect, the teammate character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are displayed on the image display device 5 (timing T6 in FIG. 14C).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (7), the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation promotion display 01TM031A during the execution of the battle effect (at the timing T7 shown in FIG. 14-3). The second operation promotion display displayed here is a special mode operation promotion display corresponding to the change suggestion effect, and an image imitating the push button 31B wrapped in flame and an image imitating the push button 31B. And a downward arrow displayed above, and is a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B. The special mode operation promotion display 01TM031A is a display mode having a higher priority than the image related to the decorative pattern and the battle effect (the mode in which the display layer is higher and the image appears to be displayed on the near side than the other effect images). Is displayed.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines in step S01TM1040 described above in response to the operation of the push button 31B (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 14-3) when the special mode operation promotion display 01TM031A is displayed. The first change suggesting effect or the second change suggesting effect is executed. When it is decided to execute the first change suggestion effect, the process proceeds to FIG. 14-5 (8), and when it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect, FIG. Go to (13).

(Example of executing the first change suggestion effect)
When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (8), at the timing when the push button 31 B is operated (shown in FIG. 14-3). At the timing of T8), the first change suggesting effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed when the first change suggestion effect is started. The blackout effect is an effect in which the dark image 01TM150 is displayed as a covering image that covers the entire display screen of the image display device 5, thereby reducing the visibility of the predetermined image and making it difficult to view. In the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed, so that the decorative pattern and the reach effect image (including the image related to the battle effect) are in a difficult-to-view state.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (8), when the blackout effect is executed, the decorative symbol that is one effect symbol becomes difficult to see, but the small symbol that is the other effect symbol is It remains visible. That is, the visibility of the decorative symbol “7” stopped in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbol variably displayed in the symbol display area 5C are reduced while the small symbol display is performed. The visibility of small symbols variably displayed in the area 51, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r is not lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 14-4, in a state where the blackout effect is not executed, the decorative symbol is displayed larger than the small symbol and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the center of the screen. Although it is possible to make the decorative symbol visibility higher than the small symbol visibility, the visibility of the small symbol is higher than the decorative symbol visibility in a difficult-to-see state where the blackout effect is executed. Become. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to appropriately grasp that the variation display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is continued while enhancing the effect of changing the visibility of the image related to the decorative symbol and the battle effect. It is.

  In this embodiment, the dark image 01TM150 covering the entire display screen is displayed in order to reduce the visibility of the predetermined image. However, by displaying the dark image 01TM150, the dark image 01TM150 is displayed more than the dark image 01TM150. A predetermined image with a low priority (an image whose display layer is lower and seen behind the dark image 01TM150 when viewed from the player) is completely invisible (that is, the layer transmittance of the dark image 01TM150 is 0%). The predetermined image having a display priority lower than that of the dark transition image 01TM150 is difficult to visually recognize but slightly visible (that is, the layer transmittance of the dark transition image 01TM150 is not 0%). You may do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which a covering image (dark image 01TM150) covering the entire display screen is displayed has been shown, but a covering image that covers only a partial region (for example, only the central portion) of the display screen is displayed. Thus, the visibility of only a partial area of the display screen may be reduced. In the present embodiment, an example in which the dark image 01TM150 is displayed to make the predetermined image difficult to view is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire screen emits white light (displays only a white image). Thus, the predetermined image may be made difficult to view, or the predetermined image may be made difficult to view by changing the aspect ratio of the predetermined image irregularly. In addition, a character or the like is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern (an image having a display priority lower than that of the decorative pattern, an image in which the display layer is lower than the decorative pattern, and is visible behind the decorative pattern as viewed from the player). In such a case, the visibility of a character or the like as a background image is reduced by displaying a cover image (dark image 01TM150 or the like).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (8) and the like, it is possible to visually recognize the hold display and the active display even in a visually difficult state, and a rectangular image showing the active display area 01TM003. (So-called interface image) can also be visually recognized, but is not limited to such a form, and is a corresponding display that changes the display mode in a difficult-to-view state (a corresponding display that is a target of a change effect, and is active in this example) Visibility may be lowered with respect to the corresponding display (the display 01TM002 in this example) other than the display 01TM001), and the visibility is also lowered with respect to a square image (so-called interface image) showing the active display area 01TM003. You may make it let it.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (8), the effect control CPU 120 maintains the normal display state 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 while maintaining the visually difficult state (white round display). Is moved above the active display area 01TM003 to the center of the screen, and the active display 01TM001 (white round display) in the normal mode is enlarged and displayed. Thereby, the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the first change suggestion effect is improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (9), the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable body operation effect that moves the movable body 01TM050 from the tilted position to the upright position while continuing the visually difficult state (FIG. 14). In addition, the effect effect of superimposing the flame effect image 01TM160 on the periphery of the enlarged active display 01TM001 is executed on the dark transition image 01TM150. Since the flame effect image 01TM160 is an image having a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the dark image 01TM150, it appears to the player to be displayed in front of the dark image 01TM150.

  Here, since the active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen and the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position overlap in the front-rear direction, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 temporarily decreases. (Timing of T9B shown in FIG. 14-3). Then, the production control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001 to the normal mode (white circle) during the period when the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is low (T9B to T10A shown in FIG. 14-3). A change effect is executed to change from a shape display) to a red mode (red round display).

  Since the flame effect image 01TM160 is displayed around the active display 01TM001, the flame effect image 01TM160 can be visually recognized even when the movable body 01TM050 is in the upright position as shown in FIG. 14-5 (9). is there. As a result, a visual effect is produced as if the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position is covered with flame. As described above, the display effect can be enhanced by displaying the flame effect image 01TM160 at a position corresponding to the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position.

  Next, the production control CPU 120 changed the display mode of the active display 01TM001 from the normal mode (white round display) to the red mode (red round display) as shown in FIG. 14-5 (10). Accordingly, the operation of returning the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position to the tilted position is executed (T10A to T10B shown in FIG. 14-3). As a result, the movable body operation effect is finished, and the visibility of the active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen is improved again. The display mode of the active display 01TM001 at this time is changed to a red mode (red round display) different from the display mode (normal mode (white round display)) before execution of the movable body motion effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the red active display 01TM001 displayed enlarged in the center of the screen to the original size and moves it to the lower active display area 01TM003. That is, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is lowered to return to the visibility before the first change suggestion effect and the blackout effect are executed. As a result, in the active display area 01TM003, the active display 01TM001 changed from the normal mode to the red mode is displayed. Then, the display of the dark image 01TM150 is terminated to cancel the visually difficult state, and the visibility of the predetermined image (the image related to the decorative design and the battle effect) is restored (timing T11 shown in FIG. 14-3). As a result, the first change suggestion effect ends, and the change effect executed corresponding to the first change suggestion effect and the blackout effect executed corresponding to the first change suggestion effect ends. Become.

  As shown in FIG. 14-5 (11), it is easier to visually recognize a predetermined image (an image related to a decorative pattern and a battle effect) by restoring the visibility, and the player can see the battle effect again. Here, during the period during which the blackout effect is being executed (the period from T8 to T11 shown in FIG. 14-3, the period from (8) to (10) shown in FIG. 14-4), the effect control CPU 120 changes. The display control of the battle effect corresponding to the pattern is continuously executed, and during this period, the display control related to the middle part of the battle effect (portions (13) to (15) in FIG. 14-5 described later) is performed. It is running continuously.

  When the blackout effect ends, the battle effect can be visually recognized from the portion corresponding to the display control of the battle effect at that timing, and in this example, from the end part of the battle effect shown in FIG. 14-5 (11). The battle production is visible. Even after the end of the blackout effect, the small symbol variation display is continued in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (12) (at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 14-3), in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol whose display result is a big hit. The combination of numbers (in this example, “777”) is stopped, and the combination of numbers (“777” in this example) constituting the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r is stopped. Display. Then, the teammate character 01TM100 performs a victory effect to win the enemy character 01TM110, and displays the character “Victory!” On the upper part of the image display device 5 to notify the occurrence of the big hit.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 at the timing of T13 shown in FIG. 14-3. The combination of decorative symbols (“777”) being displayed is confirmed and stopped, and the combination of small symbols (“777”) that is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r is confirmed and stopped. Thus, the decorative symbol variation display and the small symbol variation display corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot are completed.

  As described above, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern and the image related to the super reach effect, which have been easily visible in the image display device 5 so far, become difficult to visually recognize due to the blackout effect. On the other hand, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 that is the target of the change effect is improved by moving the active display 01TM001 that is the target of the change effect to the center of the screen and displaying it enlarged. In this state, it is suggested that the movable body 01TM050 acts on the active display 01TM001 by performing a movable body motion effect that moves the movable body 01TM050 from the tilted position to the standing position, and the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes. To do. And the change effect which changes the display mode of active display 01TM001 in the state which movable body 01TM050 exists in a standing position will be performed.

  As described above, the first change suggestion effect accompanied by the movable body operation effect acting on the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) to be the target of the change effect is set with the predetermined image (the image related to the decorative design and the super reach effect) being in a visually difficult state. By being executed, the player can be focused on the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect, and the interest of the first change suggestion effect and the change effect can be improved.

  In addition, before executing the change effect, the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect is made higher than the predetermined image (the image related to the decorative pattern and the super reach effect). The interest of the change effect can be improved by making the player pay attention to the target correspondence display (active display 01TM001).

  In the present embodiment, the movable body motion effect is executed, so that the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position and the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) to be changed are overlapped in the front-rear direction, The visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect is temporarily lowered before the change effect is executed. In this way, the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is suggested to change is once reduced before the corresponding display changes, thereby causing unexpectedness in the change and further increasing interest. Can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), when the first change suggesting effect is executed, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the second change When the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may not change. Here, the blackout effect is always executed when the first change suggestion effect is executed, whereas the blackout effect is not executed when the second change suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, when the effect that acts on the active display 01TM001 is executed after the predetermined image (the image related to the decorative pattern and the super reach effect) is in the visually difficult state, the active image 01TM001 is acted on without causing the predetermined image to be in the visually difficult state. The rate at which the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes is higher than when the effect is performed. Therefore, the player is interested in the visibility of the predetermined image when the effect acting on the active display 01TM001 is executed, and the interest of the change suggesting effect can be further improved.

(Example of executing the second change suggestion effect)
When it is determined that the second change suggesting effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 performs the second change suggesting effect at the timing when the push button 31B is operated (at timing T8 shown in FIG. 14-3). Execute. In the present embodiment, unlike the case of the first change suggestion effect, the blackout effect is not executed when the second change suggestion effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 14-5 (13), in the second change suggestion effect, the character A appears in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, in the image display device 5, the visibility of the predetermined image (the image related to the decorative design and the battle effect) is not lowered because the blackout effect is not executed, and it is easy to visually recognize the battle effect. Therefore, the player can see the middle part of the battle effect. At this time, in the small symbol display area 51, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r, the small symbol variation display is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (14), in the second change suggestion effect, an effect image in which the character A performs an action of throwing the ball toward the normal mode active display 01TM001 (white round display) is displayed. (Timing of T9A shown in FIG. 14-3).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (15), in the second change suggestion effect, an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character A hits the normal mode active display 01TM001 (white round display). Is displayed (timing of T10A shown in FIG. 14-3). At this time, in the active display area 01TM003, an effect image (active display 01TM001G) different from the normal active display 01TM001 (white round display) that has been displayed is displayed. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the explosion of the active display 01TM001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (16), the effect control CPU 120 hides the effect image (active display 01TM001G) displayed in the active display area 01TM003, and displays the active red area in the active display area 01TM003. Display 01TM001 is displayed (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 14-3). As a result, the second change suggestion effect ends, and the change effect executed in response to the second change suggestion effect ends.

  As described above, when the second change suggesting effect is executed, the ball thrown by the character A acts on the active display 01TM001, and the changing effect that changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001 from the normal mode to the red mode is executed. Will be. And after the 2nd change suggestion production end, the battle production can continue to be visually recognized, and the player can continue the battle in the middle part of the battle production (FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (15)). The last part of the production (FIG. 14-5 (16)) can be viewed continuously. Even after the end of the second change suggestion effect, the small symbol variation display is continued in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (17) (at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 14-3), in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol whose display result is a big hit. Combination (“777” in this example) is stopped and the combination of numbers (“777” in this example) constituting the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r is stopped. Display. Then, the teammate character 01TM100 performs a victory effect to win the enemy character 01TM110, and displays the character “Victory!” On the upper part of the image display device 5 to notify the occurrence of the big hit.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 at the timing of T13 shown in FIG. 14-3. The combination of decorative symbols (“777”) being displayed is confirmed and stopped, and the combination of small symbols (“777”) that is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r is confirmed and stopped. Thus, the decorative symbol variation display and the small symbol variation display corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot are completed.

  In addition, the 2nd change suggestion effect shown above is a 2nd change suggestion effect of the success mode which can be performed when the display mode of active display 01TM001 changes. In the second change suggestion effect of the successful mode, the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is displayed as the effect image (active display 01TM001G) when the effect image (active display 01TM001G) is displayed in the active display area 01TM003. Changes from the previous display mode. On the other hand, the second change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed when the display mode of the active display 01TM001 does not change. As shown in FIG. Although an effect image for performing an action of throwing the ball toward the active display 01TM001 is displayed, after that, the effect image (active display 01TM001G) is not displayed in the active display area 01TM003, and as a result, displayed in the active display area 01TM003. The display mode of the active display 01TM001 is not changed.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect as the super reach effect in response to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command being the change pattern of the super reach. During the variation display period of decorative symbols (and small symbols) based on the variation pattern of super reach, the start timing and end timing of the battle effect corresponding to the variation pattern are determined in advance. It is constant regardless of the execution status of the effects (for example, the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect). Therefore, in the variation display of decorative symbols (and small symbols) based on the variation pattern, the execution period of the battle effect overlaps with the execution period of other effects (for example, the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect). In such a case, the visibility of the battle effect may decrease due to other effects.

  In this example, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, during the period in which the execution period of the battle effect overlaps with the execution period of the blackout effect (a period indicated by T8 to T11 in FIG. 14-3), It becomes a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the battle effect (period shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10)). Since this period corresponds to a period during which the middle part of the battle effect is being executed, the player cannot see the middle part of the battle effect. However, it is possible to see the final part of the battle effect that is executed after the execution period of the blackout effect ends. On the other hand, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, the blackout effect is not executed, and the execution period of the battle effect and the execution period of the blackout effect do not overlap. It becomes possible to see through the middle part and the end part.

  In this way, the execution period of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect (periods T8 to T11 shown in FIG. 14-3) are both shorter than the execution period of the battle effect, The second change suggestion effects are all started after the start of the battle effect, and are all ended before the battle effect ends (before the victory effect is executed). Thereby, regardless of the execution status of other effects (the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect), the player at least the beginning part of the battle effect, the final part of the battle effect, and the display result notification part ( It is possible to see the victory or defeat effect). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the battle effect has been started at least in the early stage of the battle effect without adjusting the execution period or start timing or end timing of the battle effect according to the execution status of the other effects. It is possible for the player to grasp the end part and the notification part (victory effect or defeat effect) of the display result, which are important parts in the battle effect.

  In this embodiment, as an effect of prompting the operation of the push button 31B, an effect of displaying a normal mode operation promotion display 01TM031 (see FIG. 14-4 (2)) and a special mode of operation promotion display 01TM031A ( 14-4 (see (7)) can be performed. The normal mode operation promotion display 01TM031 is displayed immediately after the start of the variable display, and when the push button 31B is operated while the normal mode operation promotion display 01TM031 is displayed, the first mode (“CHANCE ?? ") Or the cut-in notice effect of the second mode (" CHANCE !! ") is executed. On the other hand, the special mode operation promotion display 01TM031A is displayed after the reach state is established (during execution of the super reach effect), and the push button 31B is operated when the special mode operation promotion display 01TM031A is displayed. The first change suggesting effect or the second change suggesting effect is executed.

  As described above, the operation promotion display is performed, and the operation effect executed when the push button 31B is operated according to the operation promotion display, the cut-in notice effect, the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion. There is a production. Here, when either the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is executed and the cut-in notice effect is not executed, both the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect are executed. The ratio of winning big hits is higher than when the cut-in notice effect is executed. Thereby, when the player operates the push button 31B, the player is interested in which operation effect of the operation suggestion effect (the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect) and the cut-in notice effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect.

  Further, as described above, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect is greater than when the second change suggestion effect is executed. The rate of change is high, and the rate of big hits is high. Therefore, when the player operates the push button 31B in response to the operation promotion display 01TM031A of the special mode being displayed, which one of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is executed. Will pay attention to.

  Note that the operation effects are not limited to the effects shown in the above-described embodiment. For example, a special background image (active display, hold display) that affects a background image of a decorative pattern from a normal background image to a corresponding display (active display, hold display). For example, it may be a zone effect that changes from a top of the corresponding display to a background image showing a lightning strike toward the corresponding display), and a large number of characters (characters of the same type or multiple types of characters) form a group. It may be a group notice effect across the entire screen including the area where the corresponding display (active display, hold display) is displayed.

(Modification example)
In the above-described embodiment, in the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect, the effect that acts on the active display 01TM001 (first change suggestion effect: the effect that the movable body 01TM050 acts on the active display 01TM001 and the flame effect are active display Although an example in which an effect acting on 01TM001 and a second change suggesting effect: an effect in which a ball thrown by a character hits the active display 01TM001 has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and acts on the active display 01TM001. You may make it perform the production which changes the display mode of active display 01TM001, without performing production. For example, after the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is improved from the normal state as in the third change suggesting effect shown below, the display mode of the active display 01TM001 without the effect acting on the active display 01TM001. May be changed.

(Third change suggestion production)
A specific example of such a third change suggesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-6 and 14-7. FIG. 14-6 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the third change suggesting effect is executed. FIG. 14-7 shows the image display device 5 when the third change suggesting effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed.

  In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit” and the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is “super reach big hit”. In addition, the display of the decorative symbols is performed, and a battle effect in which the teammate character and the enemy character battle is executed as a super reach effect. Then, the occurrence of a big hit is notified by executing a victory effect in which the teammate character finally wins.

  In step S01TM1010, effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the cut-in notice effect of the second mode (“CHANCE!”). In step S01TM1020, the final display mode of active display is set to the red mode. In step S01TM1030, it is determined that the change pattern of active display is changed to the change pattern 104 (normal to red). Hereinafter, an example will be described in which it is determined in step S01TM1040 to execute the third change suggesting effect.

  When the third change suggesting effect is executed, in the period from T1 to T7 shown in FIG. 14-6, similarly to the case where the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect are executed, FIG. Production control shown in (1) to FIG. 14-4 (7) (production control similar to the period T1 to T7 shown in FIG. 14-3) is executed. Then, in response to the operation of the push button 31B when the special mode operation promotion display 01TM031A is displayed (at the timing T8 shown in FIG. 14-6), the effect control CPU 120 performs the above-described step S01TM1040. The third change suggesting effect determined in (1) is executed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the third change suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (18), at the timing when the push button 31B is operated (shown in FIG. 14-6). At the timing of T8), the third change suggesting effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed when the third change suggesting effect is started. That is, by displaying the dark transition image 01TM150 as a cover image that covers the entire display screen of the image display device 5, the visibility of the predetermined image is lowered to make it difficult to view. In the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed, so that the decorative design and the reach effect image (including the image related to the battle effect) are in a visually difficult state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (18), the effect control CPU 120 maintains the normal display state 01TM001 (white round display) displayed in the active display area 01TM003 while continuing the visually difficult state. Is moved above the active display area 01TM003 to the center of the screen, and the active display 01TM001 (white round display) in the normal mode is enlarged and displayed. Thereby, the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the third change suggestion effect is improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (19), the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001 from the normal mode (white round display) to the red mode (red round display) ( T9 timing shown in FIG. 14-8).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the red active display 01TM001 displayed enlarged in the center of the screen to the original size and moves it to the lower active display area 01TM003. That is, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is lowered to return to the visibility before the third change suggesting effect and the blackout effect are executed. As a result, in the active display area 01TM003, the active display 01TM001 changed from the normal mode to the red mode is displayed. Then, the display of the dark image 01TM150 is terminated to release the difficult-to-view state, and the visibility of the predetermined image (the image related to the decorative design and the battle effect) is restored (timing T10 shown in FIG. 14-6). As a result, the third change suggestion effect ends, and the change effect executed corresponding to the third change suggestion effect and the blackout effect executed corresponding to the third change suggestion effect ends. Become.

  As shown in FIG. 14-7 (20), it is easier to visually recognize a predetermined image (an image related to a decorative pattern and a battle effect) by restoring the visibility, and the player can see the battle effect again. Here, during the period in which the blackout effect is executed (the period from T8 to T10 shown in FIG. 14-6, the period from (18) to (19) shown in FIG. 14-7), the effect control CPU 120 changes. The display control of the battle effect corresponding to the pattern is continuously executed. During this period, the display control related to the middle part of the battle effect (the portions shown in (13) to (15) of FIG. 14-5 described above) is performed. It is running continuously.

  Then, when the blackout effect ends, the battle effect can be visually recognized from the portion corresponding to the display control of the battle effect at that timing, and in this example, from the end part of the battle effect shown in FIG. 14-7 (20). The battle production is visible. Even after the end of the blackout effect, the small symbol variation display is continued in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (21) (at the timing of T11 shown in FIG. 14-6), a decorative design whose display result is a big hit in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The combination of numbers (in this example, “777”) is stopped, and the combination of numbers (“777” in this example) constituting the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r is stopped. Display. Then, the teammate character 01TM100 performs a victory effect to win the enemy character 01TM110, and displays the character “Victory!” On the upper part of the image display device 5 to notify the occurrence of the big hit.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 at the timing T12 shown in FIG. 14-6. The combination of decorative symbols (“777”) being displayed is confirmed and stopped, and the combination of small symbols (“777”) that is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r is confirmed and stopped. Thus, the decorative symbol variation display and the small symbol variation display corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot are completed.

  As described above, when the third change suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern and the image related to the super reach effect, which have been easily visible in the image display device 5 so far, become difficult to visually recognize due to the blackout effect. On the other hand, the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is improved in a state where the visibility of the active display 01TM001 that is the target of the change effect is improved by moving the active display 01TM001 that is the target of the change effect to the center of the screen and being enlarged. Will change.

  That is, before the execution of the third change suggestion effect, the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect is lower than the visibility of the predetermined image (image related to the super reach effect), but the third change suggestion In the production, by making the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) subject to the change effect higher than the visibility of the predetermined image (image relating to the super reach production), the corresponding display (active display) (01TM001) can increase the interest of the change effect by making the player pay attention.

(Other variations)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the first change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect are executed as the effects related to the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the same as the first change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect as the pre-reading notice effect related to the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is not executed. It is also possible to execute the production. That is, based on the determination result at the time of the start winning, the change pattern of the hold display and the type of the change suggestion effect are determined, and the variable display of a plurality of times until the change display (target change) based on the start winning is executed is performed. In particular, the first change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect, or the third change suggestion effect may be executable on the hold display corresponding to the change display (target change) based on the start winning prize.

  (2) In the above embodiment, the example in which the display mode of the corresponding display (active display) corresponding to one variation display is changed to one is described. However, the corresponding display corresponding to one variation display ( A change pattern in which the display mode (active display or hold display) changes a plurality of times may be provided. For example, when the number of held memories becomes 2 due to the start winning, the second hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the normal mode, and then with the first hold display shift (hold 2 → hold 1 ), The first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect for the first hold display corresponding to the start winning prize is executed, and the first hold display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then With the second hold display shift (hold 1 → hold 0), the first change suggesting effect or the second change suggesting effect for the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is executed, The active display may change from a blue color to a red color.

  In this way, a plurality of change suggestion effects may be executable for the corresponding display (hold display or active display) corresponding to one variation display. For example, the second change suggestion effect is executed in response to the first change effect (change from the normal mode to the blue mode), and the second change effect (change from the blue mode to the red mode) is One change suggestion effect may be executed. In addition, for a corresponding display (holding display or active display) corresponding to one variable display, first, the second change suggesting effect of the failure mode is executed as the first change suggesting effect, and the display mode of the corresponding display is normally set. You may make it change the display mode of the said corresponding display from a normal mode to a red mode by performing a 1st change suggestion production as a 2nd change suggestion production after that, without changing from a mode.

  (3) In the above embodiment, the blackout effect is executed in association with the execution of the change suggestion effect (first change suggestion effect, third change suggestion effect), and the decorative design and reach effect image (image relating to the battle effect) However, the visibility of the corresponding display that is the target of the change suggestion effect (for example, active display) and the corresponding display that is not the target of the change suggestion effect (for example, hold display) is reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, but the visibility of the corresponding display (for example, the active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change suggestion effect is not reduced when the blackout effect is executed. The visibility of the corresponding display (for example, the hold display 01TM002) that is not the target of the display may be lowered and become difficult to view.

  (4) In the above embodiment, an example in which the blackout effect is always executed at a ratio of 100% when the first change suggesting effect is executed has been described. Even when the change suggestion effect is executed, the blackout effect may not be executed. For example, when the first change suggesting effect is executed, the blackout effect is executed at a rate of 30% when the display result is out of proportion, and the blackout effect is set at a rate of 80% when the display result is a big hit. You may make it run with. Further, the first change suggesting effect may not be executed even when the blackout effect is executed.

  (5) Moreover, you may provide a some aspect as an aspect of a blackout production. For example, even in a difficult-to-view state, the viewing difficulty is relatively low, and the display priority is lower than the dark image via the dark image (which appears to be displayed at the back for the player). The blackout effect of the first aspect in which a dark image with a rate of 50% is superimposed and displayed, and the degree of visual difficulty is relatively high even in a visually difficult state, and the display priority is lower than the dark image via the dark image (game) And a blackout effect of the second mode in which a dark image with a layer transmittance of 0% that transmits the display layer is displayed in a superimposed manner. And when a display result becomes a big hit, you may make it perform the blackout effect of a 2nd aspect with a high visual difficulty at a higher rate than the case where a display result becomes a loss. Further, when the display mode of the corresponding display (active display, hold display) changes, the blackout effect of the second mode having a higher degree of visual difficulty is executed at a higher rate than when the display mode of the corresponding display does not change. You may make it.

  (6) In the above embodiment, the blackout effect is executed in association with the execution of the first change suggestion effect, and the visibility of a predetermined image (decorative pattern and reach effect image (including an image related to the battle effect)) is improved. Although the example to reduce was shown, it is not restricted to such a form, and with the start of the first change suggesting effect, an effect of enlarging and displaying the predetermined image is executed to improve the visibility of the predetermined image Anyway. For example, before the first change suggestion effect is executed, the visibility of the predetermined image is higher than the visibility of the corresponding display (hold display, active display) that is the target of the first change suggestion effect. When the change suggesting effect is executed, the predetermined image is enlarged and displayed (further improving the visibility), and the visibility of the predetermined image is higher than the visibility of the corresponding display that is the target of the first change suggesting effect. The state is maintained, and in that state, the movable body operation effect is executed (the first change suggestion effect is ended), and the display mode of the corresponding display that is the target of the first change suggestion effect is changed. May be.

  In addition, the blackout effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of the first change suggestion effect, and once the visibility of the predetermined image is reduced, the effect of enlarging and displaying the predetermined image is executed so that the predetermined image is visually recognized. The first change suggesting effect is executed, and an effect of enlarging and displaying the predetermined image is executed to improve the visibility of the predetermined image, and then the blackout effect is executed. Thus, the visibility of the predetermined image may be lowered.

(An example of a pachinko machine that performs a probable fall determination)
As a pachinko gaming machine, with the gaming state controlled to the high probability state, the game state is determined based on the result of the probability variation falling judgment by executing whether or not to shift the gaming state to the low probability state. There is a pachinko machine that shifts to a low probability state. And, as shown in FIG. 9-4, it is possible to apply a configuration in which the jackpot probability is different according to the set value to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that executes such a probability change fall determination. is there. In the following, a pachinko gaming machine in which the jackpot probability differs according to the set value that has been set and executes the probability variation fall determination will be described.

  In such a pachinko machine, when a start prize (winning to the first start prize port or the second start prize port) is generated, a random number for determining the probability change fall is extracted, and a special condition based on the start prize in the high probability state is extracted. When the symbol fluctuation display is executed, it is determined whether or not to end the high-accuracy state based on the random number for determining the probability variation fall (so-called presence or absence of the probability variation fall), and the high-accuracy state is determined based on the determination result. I try to end it. Specifically, the CPU 103 extracts a random number for determining the probability change fall when the winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected by the switch process shown in step S21 of FIG. Whether or not to end the high-probability state based on the random number for the probability variation fall determination when the special symbol variation display based on the winning is started in the certain state (in the special symbol normal processing shown in step S110 of FIG. 5) The probability change fall determination is executed, and the high-accuracy state is terminated based on the determination result to shift to the low-accuracy state.

  In this probability variation fall determination, a decision using a random number for probability variation fall determination is determined as either “no probability variation fall” or “with certain probability fall”, and based on the fact that it is determined as “no probability variation fall” The state is continued, and the high-accuracy state is terminated based on the determination that “there is a certain fall”. The CPU 103 transmits a probability variation fall determination result designation command indicating whether or not there is a probability variation fall in the probability variation fall determination to the effect control CPU 120.

  FIG. 14-8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display result determination table that is referred to in a low-probability state. As shown in FIGS. 14-8 (A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 sets the set value (1 to 6). The big hit determination is executed with reference to the display result determination table corresponding to any of the above.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process, the winning probability (winning rate) of the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to the set value. The set value consists of 6 levels 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result is set. In each display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the subject of variable display, a determination value for jackpot is set.

  As shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 at the time of non-probability change (at low probability) is used, When the first special symbol is subject to variable display, the probability (1/300) is lower than when the set values are “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”. ) To win a big hit. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 at the time of non-probable change (at low probability), the variation special figure designation buffer is the first. Wins the jackpot with a higher probability (1/290) than when the set value is “1”. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/290) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 at the time of non-probability change (at the time of low probability), the variation special figure designation buffer is the first. Wins the jackpot with a higher probability (1/280) than when the set values are “1” and “2”. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 at the time of non-probability change (low probability) is used, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first. Wins a big hit with a higher probability (1/270) than when the set values are “1”, “2”, and “3”. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/270) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of non-probability change (low probability), when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first Is a big win with a higher probability (1/260) than when the set values are “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/260) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 6 at the time of non-probability change (at the time of low probability), the variation special figure designation buffer is the first. Wins a big hit with a higher probability (1/250) than when the set values are “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time of starting the variable display in the low-accuracy state, and the MR1 value is changed to FIGS. If it matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit shown in F), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). In other words, the big win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 14-8 (A) to (F) indicate the probability (ratio) of big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  Next, after the display result becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit), and after the big hit gaming state, it is controlled to the high probability high base state. The CPU 103 displays the display result in the state controlled to the high accuracy and high base state based on the display result determination table (FIGS. 14-9 (A) to (F)) at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability) described later. decide.

  FIG. 14-9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display result determination table that is referred to in the highly accurate state. As shown in FIGS. 14-9 (A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 sets the set value (1 to 6). The big hit determination is executed with reference to the display result determination table corresponding to any of the above.

  As shown in FIG. 14-9 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability) is used, When one special symbol is subject to variable display, the probability (1/60) is lower than when the set value is “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6” And you are going to win a big hit. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/60) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability), when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/58) than when the set value is “1”. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/58) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  As shown in FIG. 14C, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 at the time of probability variation (at the time of high probability) is used, the variation special figure designation buffer is first. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/56) than when the set values are “1” and “2”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/56) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability) is used, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/54) than when the set values are “1”, “2”, and “3”. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/54) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability) is used, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/52) than when the set values are “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4”. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/52) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 6 at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability), when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the set values are “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/50) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time of starting the variable display in the high-accuracy state, and the MR1 value is changed to FIGS. If it matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit shown in F), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). In other words, the big win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 14-9 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of winning a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 14-8 and 14-9. The jackpot determination may be made using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. .

  In the present embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The setting value that can be set to may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  In this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the high-accuracy and high-base state is controlled. In the probability variation fall determination that is executed when the special symbol fluctuation display is started in the high accuracy high base state, if it is determined that there is no probability variation fall, the high accuracy base state continues, When it is determined that there is a “falling”, the state shifts to a low-accuracy state (low-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy low-base state). The random number for the probability change fall determination is a random number extracted at the time of starting winning (at the timing when the first starting port switch 22A or the second starting port switch 22B is turned on), and in the highly accurate base state, When the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to is started, the probability variation fall determination is executed based on the random number for probability variation fall determination corresponding to the start winning.

  FIG. 14-10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the probability variation fall determination table. The probability variation fall determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a probability variation fall determination value to be compared with a random number for probability variation fall determination is set. The probability variation fall determination table is a table that is referred to in a highly accurate state, and is referred to in order to determine “probability fall” or “no probability variation fall” based on a random number for probability variation fall determination.

  As shown in FIG. 14-10, in the probability variation fall determination, the probability variation fall is won with a probability of 1/80. That is, it is determined that there is “probable change fall” with a probability of 1/80, and “no probability change fall” with a probability of 79/80.

  In other words, when the CPU 103 is about to start the fluctuation display in the highly accurate state, the random value for the probability variation fall determination is any probability variation fall determination value corresponding to the “probability variation fall” shown in FIG. 14-10. If it matches, it is decided to end the high-accuracy state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a start winning (winning to the first start winning port or the second starting winning port) occurs, a random number for the probability change fall determination is extracted, and the start winning is obtained in a highly accurate state. When the special symbol based fluctuation display is executed, it is determined whether or not to end the high-accuracy state based on the random number for the probability variation fall determination (so-called presence / absence of the probability variation fall), and the high accuracy is determined based on the determination result. The state is ended. That is, when it is determined that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination at the timing when the variable display is started in the high accuracy state, the state is shifted from the high accuracy state to the low accuracy state. Therefore, since the determination probability change fall determination is performed before the big hit determination, it is prevented that the big hits are continuously generated (so-called excessive play is prevented).

  Here, for the big hit determination described above, as shown in FIGS. 14-8 and 14-9, a display result determination table corresponding to the currently set value (any one of 1 to 6) is selected. Then, the display result determination table is referred to, but regarding the probability variation fall determination, the common probability variation fall determination table (FIG. 14-10) is referred to regardless of the currently set value. That is, when the CPU 103 starts to display the variation of the special symbol in the highly accurate state (in the special symbol normal processing shown in step S110 of FIG. 5), the display result corresponding to the set value is set for the big hit determination. The determination table is selected and executed based on the selected display result determination table, but the probability variation fall determination is performed based on the common probability variation fall determination table regardless of the set value. As a result, the ratio for ending the high-accuracy state is a common ratio (in this example, 1/80) regardless of the set value.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to suppress the amount of information (number of tables) necessary for executing the probability change fall determination, and it is possible to effectively use the storage capacity of the ROM 101. Although the probability variation fall probability is constant regardless of the set value in the high-accuracy state, as shown in FIG. 14-9, the higher the set value, the higher the jackpot probability. The probability of being determined as “big hit” in the big hit determination prior to being determined as “high” is also increased. As a result, the big hits are likely to occur continuously (so-called easy to play).

  Next, the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine that executes the probability change fall determination will be described. In the example of the game flow shown below, when a big hit occurs, the high probability base state is controlled after the big hit gaming state ends, and the probability change fall determination is executed when the variable display is started in the high probability high base state. . Here, the display result of the variable display executed in the high-accuracy base state does not become “big hit”, and the first display of the variable display is started. If it is determined that there is a “probable change fall” in any of the probability change fall determinations that have been executed, the change display corresponding to the probability change fall determination (any change display from the first to the 100th change) is low. Control is made to the accurate base state, and the low-accuracy base state is maintained until the 100th fluctuation display is completed, and then the low-accuracy low base state is controlled.

  On the other hand, (2) if any of the probability change fall determinations executed in response to the fluctuation display up to the 100th time is not determined to be “probable change fall”, it is highly accurate until at least the 100th fluctuation display ends. When it is determined that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination performed in response to the fluctuation display after the 101st time, the low change from the start of the change display corresponding to the probability change fall determination is maintained. Controlled to a low base state.

  FIG. 14-11 (A) corresponds to the case where “probable fall” is determined by the probability fall fall within 100 revolutions after being controlled to the high probability high base state after the big hit gaming state (corresponding to (1) above). 14-11 (B) is a case where the probability change falls after the 101th rotation after the control to the high-accuracy base state after the big hit gaming state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game flow when determined (when it corresponds to said (2)). In this way, the game flow is determined according to the number of times of display of fluctuations after the control is performed in the high-accuracy base state when it is determined that there is a sure-falling fall in the probability variation fall determination executed in the high-accuracy base state. Differently, the referenced variation pattern table is also different.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the gaming state are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 can control the effect mode corresponding to the current gaming state among the plurality of effect modes. Specifically, in the normal state (low accuracy low base state), it is possible to control the normal mode in which the character is not displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the high base state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state). Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-16 and FIGS. 14-19 and 14-20, which will be described later, it becomes possible to control to the battle RUSH mode in which the teammate character 01TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen as the background image of the decorative pattern. ing.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, 14-19, and 14-20, in the battle RUSH mode, the characters “battle RUSH” and “remaining x times” (x = 0 to 100) are displayed at the upper left of the screen. , Or?) Is displayed, it indicates the remaining number of fluctuation display times that can be executed in the battle RUSH mode. Here, in the first variation display executed after the big hit gaming state, “100 remaining times” is displayed, and thereafter, every time the variable display is executed without generating a big hit, “99 remaining”, “98 remaining” The suggested remaining fluctuation display count is subtracted and updated by one, such as “times” and “97 remaining times”. The number of remaining fluctuation displays suggested in this way is the minimum number of fluctuation displays that can be executed without causing a big hit in the battle RUSH mode (high base state) (so-called guaranteed remaining number of short times). It can be said.

  Then, when the 100th variation display is executed without causing a big hit (after the end of the big hit gaming state) after shifting to the battle RUSH mode, “0 remaining” is displayed (FIG. 14-16). (See (10) and FIGS. 14-19 (3)). When the 100th variation display is executed, the low-accuracy base state is reached (in any probability variation fall determination executed corresponding to the variation display so far including the 100th variation display. If it is determined that there is a "probable fall"), the battle RUSH mode (high base state) ends at the 100th fluctuation display (see FIG. 14-17 (14)), and the next fluctuation display starts. Transition to normal mode (low accuracy low base state).

  On the other hand, when the 100th variation display is executed without causing a big hit after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit gaming state), it is high when the 100th variation display is executed. When the high accuracy base state is maintained (when it is not determined that there is a “probable change fall” in any of the positive change fall determinations executed in response to the change display so far including the 100th change display) The battle RUSH mode continues, and in the 101st and subsequent fluctuation displays, the characters “remaining? Times” are displayed at the upper left of the screen (see FIG. 14-19 (7)). This is because, when it is determined that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination executed corresponding to the fluctuation display after the 101st time, the gaming state shifts to the low probability low base state by the change display. This is because the minimum number of variable displays that can be executed without generating a big hit in the battle RUSH mode (high base state) (so-called guaranteed remaining time count) is uncertain. When it is determined that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination executed in response to the fluctuation display after the 101st time, the RUSH mode ends with this fluctuation display, and the normal mode starts from the next fluctuation display. Migrate to

(In case of falling down within 100 fluctuations after the transition to the high-accuracy base state)
As shown in FIG. 14-11 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state) and the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, the variable display is started and When the display result is “big hit”, the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to the highly accurate high base state, and the effect mode is controlled to the battle RUSH mode. It will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes the probability change fall determination when starting the variable display in a state where the gaming state is controlled to the highly accurate base state.

  Here, in the high-accuracy and high-base state, the CPU 103 is surely falling when the fluctuation display to be executed is a fluctuation display within the 99th time after the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-accuracy and high-base state). Based on the judgment that “no probability change falls” and that the display result is judged as “out of”, it is used for non-winning use of the probability change fall in the high accuracy base shown in FIG. 14-12 (A). A variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table. In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is not “reach out of” variation pattern, and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode “normal reach out” And a variation pattern of “Super Reach Missing (Battle Draw)” in which a battle effect that ends with a draw between the ally character and the enemy character is executed. It has been. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (A), the fluctuation pattern of “non-reach” is determined at a rate of 90%, and the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach is off” is determined at a rate of 8%. It is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of “super reach out (battle draw)”.

  Further, the CPU 103 determines the probability change fall when the change display to be executed in the high-accuracy base state is a change display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-accuracy base state). Based on the fact that it is determined that there is no “probable fall” and the display result is “big hit”, the big hit fluctuation for non-winning probability change fall at the time of high accuracy and high base shown in FIG. 14-12 (B). The variation pattern is determined based on the pattern size determination table. In this example, the “normal reach big hit” variation pattern in which the decorative symbol variation display mode is the reach mode, and the battle effect in which the decorative symbol variation display mode is the reach mode and the ally character wins the enemy character are executed. Fluctuation patterns of “Super reach big hit (battle victory)” are provided. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (B), the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach jackpot” is determined at a rate of 5%, and the fluctuation pattern of “super reach jackpot (battle victory)” is determined at a ratio of 95%.

  The CPU 103 includes a hold-down number subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command together with a probability change fall determination result designation command for designating “no change in probability change” as one set of commands, and transmits it to the effect control CPU 120. To do. The CPU 120 for effect control that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the change display of the decorative pattern to be executed is the change display within the 100th time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit gaming state). The battle RUSH mode is continued.

  On the other hand, the CPU 103 determines the probability change fall when the change display to be executed in the high-accuracy base state is the change display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state). Based on the fact that it is determined that there is a “probable fall” and the display result is determined to be “out of”, the fluctuation varies based on the deviation variation pattern determination table for probability variation fall winning shown in FIG. 14-12 (C). Determine the pattern. In this example, the decorative display variation display mode is the reach mode, the battle effect where the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw, and the current setting value depending on the display mode of the character displayed when the reach state is established A variation pattern of “super-reaching out (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect” is executed in which the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the above is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (C), the variation pattern of “super reach out (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  Further, the CPU 103 determines the probability change fall when the fluctuation display to be executed in the high-accuracy base state is a fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-accuracy base state). Based on the fact that it is determined that there is a “probable fall” and the display result is determined to be “big hit”, the fluctuation is based on the big hit variation pattern determination table for probability variation fall winning shown in FIG. 14-12 (D). Determine the pattern. In this example, there is provided a variation pattern of “super reach big hit (battle victory)” in which a battle effect in which the decorative character variation display mode is a reach mode and the ally character wins against the enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (D), the fluctuation pattern of “super reach big hit (battle victory)” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  The CPU 103 includes a hold-down number determination command, a display result specification command, and a variation pattern specification command, together with a probability change fall determination result specification command for specifying “probable change fall” as a set of commands, and transmits it to the effect control CPU 120. To do. The CPU 120 for effect control that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the change display of the decorative pattern to be executed is the change display within the 100th time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit gaming state). The battle RUSH mode is continued.

  The CPU 103 shifts the gaming state to the low probability and high base state at the timing when the variable display is started, based on the determination that the probability variation falls is “there is a probability variation fall”.

  When the fluctuation display to be executed in the low probability high base state is the fluctuation display within the 99th time since the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high base state), the CPU 103 displays the display result as “out”. Based on the determination, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of low accuracy base shown in FIG. 14-12 (E). In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is not “reach out of” variation pattern, and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode “normal reach out” And a variation pattern of “Super Reach Missing (Battle Draw)” in which a battle effect that ends with a draw between the ally character and the enemy character is executed. It has been. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (E), the variation pattern of “non-reach” is determined at a rate of 95%, and the variation pattern of “normal reach is lost” is determined at a rate of 3%. It is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of “super reach out (battle draw)”.

  Further, the CPU 103 displays the display result as “big hit” when the fluctuation display to be executed in the low probability high base state is the 99th fluctuation display after the big hit gaming state is finished (after the transition to the high base state). Based on this determination, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of low accuracy base shown in FIG. 14-12 (F). In this example, the “normal reach big hit” variation pattern in which the decorative symbol variation display mode is the reach mode, and the battle effect in which the decorative symbol variation display mode is the reach mode and the ally character wins the enemy character are executed. Fluctuation patterns of “Super reach big hit (battle victory)” are provided. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (F), the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach jackpot” is determined at a rate of 2%, and the fluctuation pattern of “super reach jackpot (battle victory)” is determined at a rate of 98%.

  The CPU 120 for effect control that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the change display of the decorative pattern to be executed is the change display within the 100th time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit gaming state). The battle RUSH mode is continued.

  As described above, the CPU 103 is in a high base state (a highly accurate high base state or a low state) from the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high base state) to the 100th change display executed without the next big hit. (Highly accurate base state) is continued. Here, when starting the 100th variation display, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table dedicated to the 100th variation display.

  The CPU 103 determines that the display result is “out of” when the fluctuation display to be executed in the low probability high base state is the 100th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high base state). Based on this, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the 100th deviation shown in FIG. 14-12 (G). In this example, the decorative display variation display mode becomes the reach mode, and the battle effect in which the ally character loses to the enemy character, and the display mode of the character displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, the current setting value is suggested. The first setting suggestion effect and the display of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the battle effect is ended (the timing after the fact that the teammate character has been defeated by the enemy character) indicate the current setting value. A variation pattern of “super-reaching loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect” in which two setting suggestion effects are executed is provided. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (G), the fluctuation pattern of “super reach out (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the current set value based on the determination of “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination. Even if the high-probability state shifts to the low-probability state, if a high setting is suggested in the setting suggestion effect, a positive element or a supplemental element for continuation of the game can be given to the player, and the setting is related to the probability change fall determination The interest can be improved in terms of performing the suggestion effect.

  The CPU 103 displays the display result as “big hit” when the fluctuation display to be executed in the low probability high base state is the 100th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high base state). Based on this determination, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table dedicated to the 100th hit shown in FIG. 14-12 (H). In this example, there is provided a variation pattern of “super reach big hit (battle victory)” in which a battle effect in which the decorative character variation display mode is a reach mode and the ally character wins against the enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (H), the fluctuation pattern of “super reach big hit (battle victory)” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  The CPU 120 for effect control that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the change display of the decorative pattern to be executed is the change display within the 100th time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit gaming state). The battle RUSH mode is continued.

  In the high-accuracy high-base state, the CPU 103 determines whether the change to be executed is the 100th change display after the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state). Based on the determination of “probably falling” and the determination that the display result is “out of”, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for 100th deviation shown in FIG. 14-12 (G). decide.

  In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the probability change falls when the change display to be executed in the high-accuracy base state is the 100th change display after the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-accuracy base state). Based on the determination of “probable fall” and the determination that the display result is “big hit”, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table for the 100th time shown in FIG. 14-12 (H). decide.

  The CPU 103 includes a hold-down number determination command, a display result specification command, and a variation pattern specification command, together with a probability change fall determination result specification command for specifying “probable change fall” as a set of commands, and transmits it to the effect control CPU 120. To do. The CPU 120 for effect control that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the change display of the decorative pattern to be executed is the change display within the 100th time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit gaming state). The battle RUSH mode is continued.

  The CPU 103 shifts the gaming state to the low probability and high base state at the timing when the variable display is started, based on the determination that the probability variation falls is “there is a probability variation fall”.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the low-accuracy high base state in response to the end of the 100th variation display after the big hit gaming state ends (after controlling to the high base state). As a result, the next time (the 101st time after the end of the big hit gaming state) is displayed in the normal state (low probability low base state). Further, the effect control CPU 120 ends the battle RUSH mode in response to the end of the 100th variation display after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the big hit gaming state ends). As a result, the next variable display (the 101st time after the big hit gaming state is finished) is executed in the normal mode.

(In case of falling down after 101 fluctuations after transition to high-accuracy and high-base state)
As shown in FIG. 14-11 (B), after the big hit gaming state ends, the probability change falls from the time when the high probability base state is controlled until the 100th variation display is executed without the next big hit. If it is not determined that there is “probable fall”, game control and effect control are performed by the following method.

  When the fluctuation display to be executed in the high-accuracy base state is the 100th fluctuation display after the big hit gaming state (after transition to the high-accuracy base state), Based on the determination of “no fall” and the determination that the display result is “displacement”, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for 100th deviation shown in FIG. . In this example, a variation pattern of “super reach divergence (battle draw)” is provided in which a battle effect in which the battle between the teammate character and the enemy character ends in a draw is executed as a variation display mode of the decorative symbols. . In the example of FIG. 14-13 (I), the fluctuation pattern of “superreach loss (battle draw)” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the probability change falls when the change display to be executed in the high-accuracy base state is the 100th change display after the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-accuracy base state). Based on determining that there is no “probable change fall” and determining that the display result is “big hit”, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table for the 100th time shown in FIG. 14-13 (J). decide. In this example, there is provided a variation pattern of “super reach big hit (battle victory)” in which a battle effect in which the decorative character variation display mode is a reach mode and the ally character wins against the enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (J), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot (battle victory) is determined at a rate of 100%.

  The CPU 103 includes a hold-down number subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command together with a probability change fall determination result designation command for designating “no change in probability change” as one set of commands, and transmits it to the effect control CPU 120. To do. The CPU 120 for effect control that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the change display of the decorative pattern to be executed is the change display within the 100th time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit gaming state). The battle RUSH mode is continued.

  When the fluctuation display to be executed in the high-accuracy base state is the fluctuation display for the 101st and subsequent times after the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state), Based on determining that there is no “probable fall” and determining that the display result is “out of”, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the deviation pattern determination table for the 101st and subsequent times shown in FIG. 14-13 (K). decide. In this example, a variation pattern of “non-reach deviation” is provided in which the decorative display variation display mode is not the reach mode, and the display result is not. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (K), the fluctuation pattern of “non-reach” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  Further, the CPU 103 determines the probability change fall when the fluctuation display to be executed in the high-accuracy base state is a fluctuation display after the 101st time since the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-accuracy base state). Based on the fact that it was determined that there was no “probable fall” and the display result was determined to be “big hit”, the fluctuation was made based on the big hit variation pattern determination table for the 101st and subsequent times shown in FIG. 14-13 (L). Determine the pattern. In this example, there is provided a variation pattern of “super reach big hit (battle victory)” in which a battle effect in which the decorative character variation display mode is a reach mode and the ally character wins against the enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (L), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot (battle victory) is determined at a rate of 100%.

  The CPU 103 includes a hold-down number subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command together with a probability change fall determination result designation command for designating “no change in probability change” as one set of commands, and transmits it to the effect control CPU 120. To do. Receiving one set of commands, the effect control CPU 120 displays the variation display of the decorative pattern to be executed from the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit gaming state) for the 101st and subsequent variations. The battle RUSH mode is continued even after the decorative display of the decorative symbol is finished based on the reception of the probability variation fall determination result designation command designating “no fall”.

  When the fluctuation display to be executed in the high-accuracy base state is a fluctuation display for the 101st and subsequent times after the end of the big hit gaming state (after transition to the high-accuracy high-base state), the CPU 103 determines “ Based on the determination that “probably falling” and the display result is “out of”, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the deviation variation pattern determination table for probability variation falling winning shown in FIG. 14-13 (M). decide. In this example, the decorative display variation display mode becomes the reach mode, and the battle effect in which the ally character loses to the enemy character, and the display mode of the character displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, the current setting value is suggested. 1 setting suggestion effect and the 2nd setting which suggests a present setting value by the display mode of the battle RUSH end picture displayed at the timing (timing when it was notified that the friend character was defeated by the enemy character) There is provided a variation pattern of “super reach out (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect” in which the suggestion effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (M), the fluctuation pattern of “super reach out (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  Further, the CPU 103 determines the probability change fall when the fluctuation display to be executed in the high-accuracy base state is a fluctuation display after the 101st time since the end of the big hit gaming state (after transition to the high-accuracy base state) Based on the fact that it is determined that there is a “probable fall” and the display result is determined to be “big hit”, it fluctuates based on the big hit variation pattern determination table for probability variable fall winning shown in FIG. Determine the pattern. In this example, there is provided a variation pattern of “super reach big hit (battle victory)” in which a battle effect in which the decorative character variation display mode is a reach mode and the ally character wins against the enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (N), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot (battle victory) is determined at a rate of 100%.

  The CPU 103 shifts the gaming state to the low-probability low-base state at the timing when the variable display is started based on the determination that “there is a probability variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination.

  The CPU 103 includes a hold-down number determination command, a display result specification command, and a variation pattern specification command, together with a probability change fall determination result specification command for specifying “probable change fall” as a set of commands, and transmits it to the effect control CPU 120. To do. The CPU 120 for effect control that has received one set of commands is the display of the variation of the decorative symbol to be executed from the 101st time onward after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit gaming state), and “ The battle RUSH mode is terminated when the variation display of the decorative symbol is completed based on the reception of the probability variation fall determination result designation command designating “probability variation fall”.

  That is, when the next variable display is started, the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), and the effect mode is the normal mode.

  In this way, in the high-accuracy base state, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (A), when the display result is determined to be “out of”, the super reach (battle effect) is executed at a rate of 2%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (B), when the display result is determined to be “big hit”, super reach (battle effect) is executed at a rate of 95%. That is, the rate at which super reach (battle effect) is executed when controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than the rate at which super reach (battle effect) is executed when not controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-12 (C) and (D) and FIGS. 14-13 (M) and (N), when it is determined that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination, When super reach (battle production) is executed at the rate of%, as shown in FIGS. 14-12 (A) and (B), when it is determined that there is no “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination Super-reach (battle effect) is executed at a rate of 2% when the display result is “out of” and 95% when the display result is “big hit”. That is, the ratio of the super reach (battle effect) that is executed when it is determined that there is a “probable fall” in the probability change fall determination is the super reach (battle effect) that is determined as “no probability change fall” in the probability change fall determination. ) Is higher than the rate of execution.

  Therefore, when the super reach (battle effect) is executed, the player can recognize that there is a high rate of advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the rate of occurrence of a probability fall that is disadvantageous to the player is generated. It can be recognized that it is expensive. In this way, the execution of the super reach (battle production) suggests both an advantageous event and an unfavorable event for the player. Interest can be further improved.

  Furthermore, even when the event that triggered the super reach (battle effect) is the occurrence of a probability change fall, the first setting suggestion effect is being executed during the execution of the variation display subject to the probability change fall determination. Is executed and the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed during execution of the variable display in which the high base state ends, so that the player grasps the setting of the gaming machine that is currently playing the game. Or since it becomes possible to guess, the disappointment of the player due to the occurrence of a probable fall can be reduced.

(Setting suggestion production)
As described above, from the end of the big hit gaming state, until the 99th fluctuation display is executed, it is determined that the display result is determined to be “out of”, and the probability variation fall determination is determined to be “with certain change fall”. As a variation pattern of the variation display corresponding to the probability change fall determination, a variation pattern of “super reach deviation (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect” with a battle effect to be drawn and a first setting suggestion effect is selected. (See FIG. 14-12 (C)). The effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggestion effect based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command in which the variation pattern of “super-reaching deviation (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect” is designated.

  Further, as described above, when the 100th variation display is executed after the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability display of the variation display up to the 100th including the 100th variation display is “probable variation falling”. Based on the determination of “Yes”, when the display of the 100th variation is executed, the battle effect that is defeated on the condition that the display result determination is “out of”, and the first A variation pattern of “super-reaching loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect” with the setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect is selected. The production control CPU 120 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command in which the fluctuation pattern of “super-reaching deviation (battle draw) + setting suggestion presentation” is designated, and performs the first setting suggestion presentation and the second setting suggestion presentation. Execute.

  As described above, the first setting suggestion effect that is executed in the fluctuation display determined as “probably falling” or the 100th fluctuation display after the big hit gaming state ends is shown in FIG. 14 to be described later. As shown in -16 (6) and the like, the currently set value is suggested by the character displayed when the reach state is established. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (A), the number of times of fluctuation display when it is determined that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination is (1) high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode). If the number is less than 50 times, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect is determined as “reach!”, And (2) controlled to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode). If it is 51 times or more, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggesting effect is determined as “REACH”.

  Here, in (1), when the character “Leach!” Is displayed, if the current setting value is any one of 1 to 3, the character “Leach !!!!” is displayed in blue. If the current set value is any of 4 to 6, the character “Leach!” Is displayed in red. Therefore, when the character “Leach !!” is blue, it indicates that the set value is any one of “1”, “2”, and “3”. Is in a red mode, it indicates that the set value is any one of “4”, “5”, and “6”. In other words, if the blue color is “reach!”, The reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 33% (1/3), and if it is “reach!” In the red color, the setting suggestion effect is Is 33% (1/3).

  In (2), when the character “REACH” is displayed, if the current setting value is any one of 1 to 4, the character “REACH” is displayed in blue and the current setting is displayed. When the value is any one of 3 to 6, the characters “REACH” are displayed in red. Therefore, when the character “REACH” is in a blue mode, it indicates that the setting value is any one of “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4”, and the character “REACH” Is in a red mode, it is suggested that the set value is any one of “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. That is, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 25% (1/4) in the case of “REACH” in the blue aspect, and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is in the case of “REACH” in the red aspect. 25% (1/4). When the set value is “3” or “4”, the display mode of the characters “REACH” is assigned to the blue mode or the red mode at a rate of 50%.

  In addition, the second setting suggestion effect executed in the 100th variation display after the big hit game state is ended, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (14) described later, etc. The display mode (background, number of stars) of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the enemy character is defeated) suggests the currently set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (B), the number of times of fluctuation display when it is determined that there is a “probable fall” is (1) high-accuracy high-base state (battle RUSH mode). If it is 30 times or less after the control, the background to be displayed in the second setting suggestion effect is determined to be “full moon background”, and (2) after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode) If it is 31 times or more and 60 times or less, the background to be displayed in the second setting suggestion effect is determined as “half moon background”, and (3) 61 times after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode). In the case of the above, the background to be displayed in the second setting suggesting effect is determined as “a crescent moon background”. The number of stars displayed in the second setting suggestion effect suggests a set value, and 1 to 6 stars are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5.

  Here, in (1), when the “full moon background” is displayed, if the current set value is “p (p = 1 to 6)”, p stars are displayed. Therefore, when the number of stars is one, it indicates that the setting value is “1”, and when the number of stars is two, it indicates that the setting value is “2”. If the number of stars is 3, it indicates that the setting value is “3”, and if the number of stars is 4, it indicates that the setting value is “4”. If the number of stars is 5, it indicates that the setting value is “5”, and if the number of stars is 6, it indicates that the setting value is “6”. Yes. That is, when the “full moon background” is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 100%.

  In (2), when “half moon background” is displayed, if the current set value is “q (q = 1 to 6)”, q−1 or q stars are displayed. Let Therefore, when the number of stars is one, it is suggested that the setting value is “2” or “1”. When the number of stars is two, the setting value is “3” or “2”. If the number of stars is 3, the setting value is “4” or “3”, and if the number of stars is 4, The value suggests that it is “5” or “4”, and if the number of stars is 5, the setting value suggests that it is “6” or “5”, and the number of stars When the number is six, it is suggested that the set value is “1” or “6”. That is, when the “half moon background” is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 50%.

  In (3), when displaying the “crescent moon background”, if the current set value is “r (r = 1 to 6)”, r−1, r, or r + 1 Display stars. Therefore, when the number of stars is one, it is suggested that the setting value is “2”, “1”, or “6”. When the number of stars is two, the setting value is “ 3 ”,“ 2 ”, or“ 1 ”, and if the number of stars is 3, the setting value is“ 4 ”,“ 3 ”, or“ 2 ” If the number of stars is 4, it indicates that the setting value is “5”, “4”, or “3”. If the number of stars is 5, the setting value Suggests "6", "5", or "4". If the number of stars is 6, the setting value should be "1", "6", or "5" It suggests. That is, when the “crescent moon background” is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 33%.

  In the present embodiment, when the actual setting value is 1, q-1 = 0 may occur in the above (2), and r-1 = 0 may occur in the above (3). In these cases, if the number of stars to be displayed is set to 0, it is inconsistent with the set value range (1 to 6). Therefore, when q-1 = 0 in (2) and r-1 = 0 in (3), the number of stars to be displayed is 6. In the present embodiment, when the actual set value is 6, r + 1 = 7 in (3) above. If the number of stars to be displayed is 7 in this case, it is inconsistent with the set value range (1 to 6). Accordingly, when r + 1 = 7 in (3), the number of stars actually displayed is set to 1.

  In the first setting suggestion effect, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect increases in the order of “REACH” <“reach!”. That is, the first setting that is executed when [the number of times of variation display determined as “probably falling” is more than 51 times after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode)]. It is executed in the case of [when the number of fluctuation display times determined as “probably falling” in the probability variation fall determination is 50 times or less after being controlled to the highly accurate base state (battle RUSH mode)] rather than the suggestion effect. The one setting suggestion effect has higher reliability of the suggested setting value. As described above, the first setting suggestion that the reliability varies depending on the timing (the number of fluctuation displays after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode)) determined by the probability variation fall determination. Since the effect can be executed, it is possible to relate the timing of the probability change fall and the reliability of the first setting suggestion effect, and the interest of the first setting suggestion effect can be improved.

  Similarly, in the second setting suggestion effect, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect increases in the order of crescent moon background <half moon background <full moon background. That is, the second setting executed when [the number of times of the fluctuation display determined as “probably falling” in the probability variation fall determination is 61 times or more after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode)]. Than the suggestion effect [when the number of fluctuation displays determined as “probably falling” in the probability changing fall determination is 31 times or more and 60 times or less after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode)]. The second setting suggestion effect to be executed has higher reliability of the suggested setting value, and moreover, [the fluctuation display number determined as “probably falling” in the certain variation falling judgment is highly accurate. The reliability of the suggested setting value is higher in the second setting suggestion effect executed in the case of 30 times or less after being controlled to the base state (battle RUSH mode). In this way, the second setting suggestion that the reliability varies depending on the timing (the number of fluctuation displays after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode)) determined by the probability variation fall determination. Since the effect can be executed, it is possible to relate the timing of the probability change fall and the reliability of the second setting suggestion effect, and the interest of the second setting suggestion effect can be improved.

  Here, the reliability of the first setting suggestion effect is 25% or 33%, while the reliability of the second setting suggestion effect is 33%, 50%, or 100%. Therefore, the highest reliability 33% in the first setting suggestion and the lowest reliability 33% in the second setting suggestion coincide with each other, and the second setting suggestion is more than the first setting suggestion. The reliability will be high. The first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are effects that can be executed in one variation display based on a common variation pattern. In this case, the timing after the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Thus, the second setting suggesting effect is executed. In this way, when the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed within one variation display, the second setting suggestion effect with high reliability is executed after the first setting suggestion effect. By doing so, the player's interest in the setting suggestion effect can be maintained.

  In the present embodiment, when the second setting suggestion effect is executed, an example is shown in which the first setting suggestion effect is always executed at a timing before that, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. Instead, even if the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed. Further, the second setting suggestion effect may be executed before the first setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Example of production when falling within 100 revolutions)
Next, with respect to an effect example in the case where it is determined that there is a probability variation fall within 100 revolutions after the high hitting base state (battle RUSH mode) is controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished, FIG. 15, FIG. 14-16 and FIG. 14-17. FIG. 14-15 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17 show the first setting suggestion effect and the first setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image relevant to 2 setting suggestion effects.

  In the example shown below, it is assumed that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to “6”. Note that the CPU 103 notifies the effect control CPU 120 of the set value by transmitting a command for specifying the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The setting value notified by this command is the setting value when the power is turned on if it is not controlled to the setting change mode that can change the setting value when the power is turned on, and when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. This is the setting value at the end of the setting change mode.

  First, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (1), it is assumed that the CPU 120 for effect control is performing the 19th variation display after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state where the second reserved memory number is 0, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol change display (T1 shown in FIG. 14-15). (Variable display started at the timing). In the active display area 01TM003, an active display 01TM001 corresponding to the currently displayed variable display is displayed.

  Here, in response to controlling the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode, the effect control CPU 120 displays the teammate character 01TM100 at the center of the image display device 5 and displays “battle” at the upper left of the image display device 5. “RUSH” is displayed. Furthermore, in correspondence with the fact that the currently displayed variation display is the 19th variation display after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left (“ The characters “Remaining 81 times” are displayed below (Battle RUSH).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (2), when the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. It is assumed that the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6B newly occurs at the timing of T2 shown in 14-15 and the second reserved memory number becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the second reserved memory number has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “2” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in the state where the second reserved memory number is 1, the symbol display. The decorative symbol “4” is fixed in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol “6” is stopped in the symbol display area 5R. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols for which the display result is “off” is confirmed and stopped (timing T3 shown in FIG. 14-15).

  Next, when the CPU 103 executes the 20th fluctuation display after controlling to the high-accuracy and high-base state based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 1, it is determined that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination. It is assumed that the variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern of “super reach out (battle draw) + setting suggesting effect” based on the determination and the determination that the display result is “out”. Then, the CPU 103 sets one set including the fluctuation pattern designation command for designating the fluctuation pattern “super-reaching out (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect” and the probability variation fall determination result designation command for designating “probable fall”. The command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Then, the gaming state is shifted to the low-accuracy base state at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started.

  The effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command that designates “super reach out (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect”, and the variation display mode of the decorative symbols becomes the reach mode, and the ally character and the enemy character It is recognized that a battle effect that ends with a draw and a first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value is displayed according to the display mode of characters displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. And the aspect of the 1st setting suggestion effect is determined based on the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation display after controlling to a highly accurate base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode).

  Here, the production control CPU 120 determines that there is a “probable change fall” within 50 times (20 times in this example) within 50 times after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). Based on the determination, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggesting effect corresponding to the 20th variation display determined to be “probably falling” is determined as “reach!”, And the setting value is “6”. It is assumed that the character “Leach! Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (4), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and In the symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbol variation display is started (timing T4 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

  Here, the production control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and displays it in the second reserved display area 01TM006 as the second reserved memory count becomes zero. The second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Furthermore, in correspondence with the fact that the currently running fluctuation display is the 20th fluctuation display after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left (“ The characters “remaining 80 times” are displayed under “Battle RUSH”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (5), when the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. It is assumed that a new start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6B has occurred and the second reserved memory number is 1 at the timing of T5 shown in 14-15. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the second reserved memory number has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (6), the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The reach state is set by stopping and displaying the decorative pattern. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first setting suggesting effect is executed to display the characters “reach !!!!” on the upper part of the image display device 5 in red (timing T6 shown in FIG. 14-15).

  When the reach state is established in the battle RUSH mode, the player grasps that the character “Leach! In addition, there is a possibility that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 currently playing a game may be in the range of 4 to 6, and the suggested set value (4 to 6) is a value close to the actual set value. To be sure (high reliability). In this way, although the player feels regrettable by executing the effect suggesting that the probability change fall has occurred in the variation display in which the probability change fall has occurred, there is a possibility that the set value is high (4 to 6). For this reason, a decrease in gaming motivation is suppressed. In addition, since the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed in the battle RUSH mode is relatively large (80 times), the game is played with a willingness to somehow generate a big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (7), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first setting suggestion effect and starts a battle effect that is an effect corresponding to the super reach variation pattern (FIG. 14-). T7 timing shown in FIG. With the execution of this battle effect, the teammate character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are displayed on the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (8), the effect control CPU 120 “draws” the upper part of the image display device 5 while the image display device 5 displays the friend character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110. "Is displayed (timing T8 shown in FIG. 14-15). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 ends the battle effect, and the decorative symbol “4” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol “5” in the symbol display area 5C, and the ornament in the symbol display area 5R. The symbol “4” is confirmed and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols for which the display result is “off” is confirmed and stopped (timing T9 shown in FIG. 14-15).

  Next, based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 1, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is “out” when executing the 21st variation display after controlling to the high base state. Thus, it is assumed that the variation pattern is determined as a variation pattern of “non-reach”. Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern “non-reach” to the effect control CPU 120. This 21st variation display is executed in a low-accuracy base state.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (9), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and In the symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbol variation display is started (timing T10 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

  Here, the production control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and displays it in the second reserved display area 01TM006 as the second reserved memory count becomes zero. The second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Furthermore, in correspondence with the fact that the currently displayed fluctuation display is the 21st fluctuation display after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left (“ The characters “79 times remaining” are displayed below (Battle RUSH).

  After that, it is assumed that the display result is “out of” continuously until the 99th variation display is executed after the control to the high base state. The gaming state during this period is a low probability and high base state.

  Next, based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 3, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is “out” when executing the 100th variation display after controlling to the high base state. The fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of “super-reaching out (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect”. Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern “out of super reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect” to the effect control CPU 120. This 100th variation display is executed in a low-accuracy base state.

  The effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command for designating “super-reaching out (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect”, and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, and the ally character becomes the enemy character. The first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value according to the character display mode displayed when the reach state is established, and the timing when the battle effect ends (the friend character is defeated by the enemy character) It is recognized that the second setting suggesting effect that suggests the current set value should be executed according to the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the fact that it has been notified). And the aspect of the 1st setting suggestion effect and the aspect of the 2nd setting suggestion effect are determined based on the frequency | count of change display after controlling to a high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode).

  At this time, with regard to the first setting suggestion effect, the first setting suggestion executed corresponding to the fluctuation display (20th fluctuation display after being controlled to the high-accuracy high-base state) that has been determined to be “probably falling”. It is determined in the same manner as the production.

  The production control CPU 120 is determined to have “probably falling” within 30 times (20 times in this example) within 30 times after being controlled to the high-accuracy and high-base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). Based on this, in the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 100th variation display in the high base state, the background is determined to be “full moon background”, and the setting value is set to “6”. Based on this, it is assumed that the number of stars to be displayed is determined to be 6. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (10), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and In the symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbol variation display is started (timing T11 shown in FIG. 14-15).

  Here, the production control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and displays it in the second reserved display area 01TM006 as the second reserved memory number becomes 2. The first second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003, and the second and subsequent second hold displays 01TM005 are shifted to the active display area 01TM003 side. Furthermore, in correspondence with the fact that the currently displayed variable display is the 100th variable display after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left (“ Under "Battle RUSH", the characters "0 remaining" are displayed. Since the player may be the last variation display executed in the high base state (battle RUSH mode), the player pays attention to the effect performed in the variation display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (11), the effect control CPU 120 sets “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The reach state is set by stopping and displaying the decorative pattern. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, a first setting suggesting effect is displayed to display the characters “reach !!!!” on the upper part of the image display device 5 in a red manner (timing T12 shown in FIG. 14-15).

  When the reach state is established in the battle RUSH mode, the player is executed in the high base state (battle RUSH mode) including the change display because the character “REACH !!” is displayed in red. In addition, it is understood that there is a possibility that the change display has been performed with a change display executed at a relatively early stage (1 to 50 rotations). In addition, there is a possibility that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 currently playing a game may be in the range of 4 to 6, and the suggested set value (4 to 6) is a value close to the actual set value. To be sure (high reliability). In this way, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed a plurality of times at different execution timings, so that the first setting suggestion when the player is performing the fluctuation display that has fallen with certainty. Even if the production is overlooked, the first setting suggestion production executed again can be seen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (12), the CPU 120 for effect control ends the first setting suggestion effect and starts a battle effect that is an effect corresponding to the super reach variation pattern (FIG. 14-). T13 timing shown in FIG. Along with the execution of this battle effect, the teammate character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are displayed on the image display device 5, and above the teammate character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (upper part of the image display device 5), “RUSH ends if defeated. , RUSH continuation for a draw ”is displayed. In other words, when a battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the high base state ends at this time (100th change display), and a battle effect in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw. When it is executed, the effect is to show the player that the high base state will continue from the next time (change display after the 101st time).

  For the player, although the probability change fall has already been suggested at this point in time, no notification has been given, so the player has not yet been convinced of the probability change fall. Therefore, it is a situation in which it is not clear whether the high base state (low-accuracy high-base state) is finished or whether the high base state (high-accuracy high-base state) continues. In such a situation, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the high base state (highly accurate high base state) continues.

  In this example, since the change display is executed based on the change pattern of “super-reach out (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect”, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (13), the friend character 01TM100 is the enemy character. A battle effect defeated by 01TM110 is executed (timing T14 shown in FIG. 14-15). At the timing when the friendly character 01TM100 is defeated by the enemy character 01TM110, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “2” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol “3” in the symbol display area 5C. The decorative symbol “2” is stopped and displayed in the area 5R. As a result, the player understands that the display result is “out of” and the high base state is terminated by the 100th variation display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (14), the effect control CPU 120 ends the battle effect and executes the second setting suggestion effect (timing T15 shown in FIG. 14-15). As described above, the production control CPU 120 is based on the fact that it has been determined that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination within 30 times after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). The background is determined to be “full moon background” and the number of stars to be displayed is determined to be 6 based on the setting value being set to “6”. Based on this determination, the CPU 120 for effect control displays an image that is “full moon background” and the number of stars is “6” as the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 notifying that the battle RUSH mode has ended. . This battle RUSH end image 01TM300 includes the characters “battle RUSH end” displayed in the center of the screen.

  The player grasps that the battle RUSH mode (high base state) has ended by viewing the battle RUSH end image 01TM300. And since the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 is “full moon background” and the number of displayed stars is 6, it was executed in the high base state (battle RUSH mode) including the fluctuation display. Of the fluctuation display so far, it is grasped that it has fallen with certainty in the fluctuation display executed at a relatively early stage (1 to 30 rotations). In addition, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is currently playing a game is 6, and the suggested setting value (6) is an actual setting value (reliability is 100%). To grasp.

  In this way, in the fluctuation display where the high base state (battle RUSH mode) is ended, the player is disappointed by the fact that the player has already been in a low probability state by falling down with certainty. Since the value is high (6), a decrease in gaming motivation is suppressed. Although the player has finished the high base state (battle RUSH mode), the player can expect the next big hit with a high probability, and will continue to play with a willingness to generate the big hit.

  Next, the CPU 103 ends the low-accuracy high-base state and ends the low-probability low-base state based on the end of the 100th fluctuation display after the big hit gaming state ends (after controlling to the high-base state). (Normal state) (T16 timing shown in FIG. 14-15). In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control ends the second setting suggestion effect, and “2” for the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, “3” for the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area. Decide and stop the decorative symbol “2” at 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols for which the display result is “off” is confirmed and stopped.

  As described above, the CPU 103 controls the high-accuracy and high-base state after the big hit gaming state, and then determines that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination. The gaming state is shifted to the low-accuracy base state at the timing when the display is started. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode in response to being controlled to the high-accuracy and high-base state after the big hit gaming state is finished, and then the “probable change fall determination command” ", The battle RUSH mode is continued until the 100th variation display is completed. In this way, by controlling the common performance mode in the high-accuracy base state and the low-accuracy base state, the player can use only the background image of the decorative pattern and the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect). It becomes difficult to determine whether or not a certain fall has occurred. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation after a certain fall, and to increase interest in setting suggestion effects.

(Example of production in the case of a probable fall after 101 rotations)
Next, with respect to an example of production when it is determined that there is a probability variation fall after 101 rotations after being controlled to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode) after the big hit gaming state, FIG. 18, FIG. 14-19 and FIG. 14-20. 14-18 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, and FIGS. 14-19 and 14-20 show the first setting suggestion effect and the first setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image relevant to 2 setting suggestion effects. In the example shown below, it is assumed that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to “2”.

  First, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (1), it is assumed that the CPU 120 for effect control is executing the 99th variation display after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state where the second reserved memory number is 3, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol variation display (T1 shown in FIG. 14-18). (Variable display started at the timing). The active display area 01TM003 displays an active display 01TM001 corresponding to the currently displayed variable display, and the second hold display area 01TM006 displays three second hold displays 01TM005.

  Here, in response to controlling the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode, the effect control CPU 120 displays the teammate character 01TM100 at the center of the image display device 5 and displays “battle” at the upper left of the image display device 5. “RUSH” is displayed. Furthermore, in correspondence with the fact that the currently displayed variation display is the 99th variation display after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left (“ The characters “Remaining once” are displayed below “Battle RUSH”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “4” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in the state where the second reserved memory number is 3, the symbol display. The decorative symbol “5” is fixed in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol “2” is stopped in the symbol display area 5R. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols for which the display result is “off” is confirmed and stopped (timing T2 shown in FIG. 14-18).

  Next, based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 3, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is “out” when executing the 100th variation display after controlling to the high-accuracy base state. Based on the above, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined as a fluctuation pattern of “super-reaching out (battle draw)”. That is, based on the fact that it is not determined that there is a “probable change fall” by the probability change fall determination until the 100th change display, the change pattern without the setting suggestion effect is determined. Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern “super-reaching deviation (battle draw)” to the effect control CPU 120. This 100th variation display is executed in a highly accurate and high-base state.

  The effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (3), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display of the image display device 5. In the area 5R, the decorative symbol variation display is started (timing T3 shown in FIG. 14-18).

  Here, the production control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and displays it in the second reserved display area 01TM006 as the second reserved memory number becomes 2. The first second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003, and the second and subsequent second hold displays 01TM005 are shifted to the active display area 01TM003 side. Furthermore, in correspondence with the fact that the currently displayed variable display is the 100th variable display after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left (“ Under "Battle RUSH", the characters "0 remaining" are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (4), the effect control CPU 120 sets “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing at which the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The reach state is set by stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, the characters “REACH” are displayed in blue on the upper portion of the image display device 5 (timing T4 shown in FIG. 14-18).

  Here, in the reach effect in the variation pattern not accompanied by the setting suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the number of times of change display after controlling to the battle RUSH mode (after being controlled to the high-accuracy high-base state). The character to be displayed is determined as either “REACH!” Or “REACH”. Specifically, when it is 50 times or less after controlling to the battle RUSH mode, the character to be displayed is determined as “reach!”, And when it is 51 times or more after controlling to the battle RUSH mode. Determines “REACH” to be displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display color (mode) of the character to be displayed based on the display result in the reach effect in the variation pattern not accompanied by the setting suggestion effect. Specifically, when the display result is “out of place”, the blue display is determined at a higher rate than when the display result is “big hit”, and when the display result is “big hit”, the display result is The red aspect is determined at a higher rate than the case of “out of”. Therefore, in the battle RUSH mode, it is difficult for the player to detect the presence or absence of the probability change fall only by looking at the characters displayed at the timing when the reach state is established.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (5), the effect control CPU 120 starts a battle effect that is an effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (timing T5 shown in FIG. 14-18). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the teammate character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are displayed on the image display device 5, and above the teammate character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (upper part of the image display device 5), “RUSH ends if defeated. , RUSH continuation for a draw ”is displayed. In other words, when a battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the high base state ends at this time (100th change display), and a battle effect in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw. When it is executed, the effect is to show the player that the high base state will continue from the next time (change display after the 101st time).

  In this example, since the fluctuation display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern of “super-reaching deviation (battle draw)”, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (6), the teammate character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 draw. A battle effect ending in is executed (timing T6 shown in FIGS. 14-18). At the timing when the friend character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are drawn, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “2” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 and the decorative symbol “3” in the symbol display area 5C. The decorative pattern “2” is stopped and displayed in the display area 5R. As a result, the player knows that the display result is “out of” and the high base state continues after the next time (change display after the 101st time).

  Next, based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 2, the CPU 103 has determined that the display result is “out” when executing the 101st variation display after controlling to the high-accuracy base state. Based on the above, it is assumed that the variation pattern is determined as a variation pattern of “non-reach”. Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern “non-reach” to the effect control CPU 120. The 101st variation display is executed in a highly accurate and high-base state.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (7), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and In the symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbol variation display is started (timing T8 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

  Here, the production control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and also displays it in the second reserved display area 01TM006 as the second reserved memory number becomes 1. The first second hold display 01TM005 that has been displayed is shifted to the active display area 01TM003, and the second and subsequent second hold displays 01TM005 are shifted to the active display area 01TM003 side. Further, as described above, the fluctuation display currently being executed corresponds to the fluctuation display for the 101st time after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). The characters “Remaining times” are displayed in the upper left (below “Battle RUSH”). The player may be the last variation display executed in the high base state (battle RUSH mode) during the period in which the characters “remaining? Times” are displayed, so the effect performed in the variation display Will pay attention to.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (8), when the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. It is assumed that a new start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6B has occurred and the second reserved memory number has become 2 at the timing of T9 shown in 14-18. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the second reserved memory number has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  After that, it is assumed that the display result is “out of” continuously until the 123rd variation display is executed after the control to the high base state. The gaming state during this period is a highly accurate and high base state.

  Next, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 executes the 124th variation display after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state in which the second reserved memory number is 0, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol change display (T10 shown in FIG. 14-18). (Variable display started at the timing). In the active display area 01TM003, an active display 01TM001 corresponding to the currently displayed variable display is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (9), when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. It is assumed that a new start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6B has occurred and the second reserved memory number becomes 1 at the timing of T11 shown in 14-18. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the second reserved memory number has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (10), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “5”, the symbol display in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 with the second reserved memory number being one. The decorative symbol “1” is stopped in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol “2” is stopped in the symbol display area 5R. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols for which the display result is “off” is confirmed and stopped (timing T12 shown in FIG. 14-18).

  Next, when the CPU 103 executes the 125th fluctuation display after controlling to the high-accuracy and high-base state based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 1, it is determined that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination. It is assumed that the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern of “super-reaching out (battle defeat) + setting suggesting effect” based on the determination and the determination that the display result is “out”. Then, the CPU 103 sets one set including the fluctuation pattern designation command for designating the fluctuation pattern “super-reaching out (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect” and the probability variation fall determination result designation command for designating “probability change fall”. The command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Then, the gaming state is shifted to the low-probability and low-base state at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started.

  The effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command for designating “super-reach out (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect”, and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, and the ally character becomes the enemy character. The first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value according to the character display mode displayed when the reach state is established, and the timing at which the battle effect ends (the friend character is defeated by the enemy character) It is recognized that the second setting suggestion effect that suggests the current set value is to be executed by the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the fact that it has been notified). And the aspect of the 1st setting suggestion effect and the aspect of the 2nd setting suggestion effect are determined based on the frequency | count of a variable display (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode) after controlling to a highly accurate base state.

  The production control CPU 120 is determined to have “probably falling” in the probability changing fall determination after 61 times (125 times in this example) after being controlled to the high-accuracy and high-base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). Based on that, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 125th fluctuation display determined to be “probably falling” is determined as “REACH”, and the setting value is set to “2”. It is assumed that the character “Leach! Further, the production control CPU 120 determines that there is a “probable change fall” in the positive change fall determination after 51 times (125 times in this example) after being controlled to the high-accuracy and high-base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). Based on this, in the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 125th fluctuation display in the high base state, the background is determined to be “crescent moon background” and the setting value is set to “2”. It is assumed that the number of stars to be displayed is determined to be 3 based on the

  Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (11), on the basis of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and In the symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbol variation display is started (timing T13 shown in FIG. 14-18).

  Here, the production control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and displays it in the second reserved display area 01TM006 as the second reserved memory count becomes zero. The second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Furthermore, in correspondence with the fact that the currently displayed fluctuation display is the 125th fluctuation display after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left (“ The characters “Remaining times” are displayed under “Battle RUSH”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (12), when the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. It is assumed that a new start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6B occurs at the timing of T14 shown in 14-18 and the second reserved memory number becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the second reserved memory number has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (13), the effect control CPU 120 sets “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The reach state is set by stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, a first setting suggestion effect is executed to display the characters “REACH” in a blue manner on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing T15 shown in FIG. 14-18).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (14), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first setting suggestion effect, and starts a battle effect that is an effect corresponding to the super reach variation pattern (FIG. 14-). T16 timing shown in FIG. Along with the execution of this battle effect, the teammate character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are displayed on the image display device 5, and above the teammate character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (upper part of the image display device 5), “RUSH ends if defeated. , "If you win, you win!" That is, when a battle effect is performed in which the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character, the high base state ends at this time (the 125th fluctuation display), and a battle effect is performed in which the teammate character wins the enemy character. Is an effect that indicates to the player that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  For the player, although the probability change fall has already been suggested by the first setting suggestion effect at this time point, the notification has not been made, so that the player has not yet been convinced of the probability change fall. Therefore, it is a situation in which it is not clear whether the high base state (highly accurate and high base state) is finished or whether the high base state (highly accurate and high base state) continues. In such a situation, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the high base state (highly accurate high base state) continues. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the display result is “big hit”.

  In this example, since the change display is executed based on the change pattern of “superreach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect”, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (15), the teammate character 01TM100 is the enemy character. A battle effect defeated by 01TM110 is executed (timing T17 shown in FIG. 14-18). At the timing when the friendly character 01TM100 is defeated by the enemy character 01TM110, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “2” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol “3” in the symbol display area 5C. The decorative symbol “2” is stopped and displayed in the area 5R. As a result, the player recognizes that the display result is “out of” and the high base state is ended by the 125th variation display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (16), the effect control CPU 120 ends the battle effect and executes the second setting suggestion effect (timing T18 shown in FIG. 14-18). As described above, the production control CPU 120 is based on the fact that it has been determined that “there is a surely falling fall” in the surely falling fall determination after 61 times after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). The background is determined to be “crescent moon background” and the number of stars to be displayed is determined to be 3 based on the setting value being set to “2”. Based on this determination, the CPU 120 for effect control displays an image that is “Crescent background” and the number of stars is “3” as the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 for notifying that the battle RUSH mode has ended. . This battle RUSH end image 01TM300 includes the characters “battle RUSH end” displayed in the center of the screen.

  Next, the CPU 103 continues to control the low probability low base state (normal state) based on the end of the 125th fluctuation display after the big hit gaming state ends (after controlling to the high base state). (T19 timing shown in FIG. 14-18). In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control ends the second setting suggestion effect, and “2” for the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, “3” for the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area. Decide and stop the decorative symbol “2” at 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols for which the display result is “off” is confirmed and stopped.

  As described above, the CPU 103 controls the high-accuracy and high-base state after the big hit gaming state, and then determines that there is a sure-falling fall based on the 101st and subsequent probability-falling fall judgments. The game state is shifted to the low probability and low base state at the timing when the variable display corresponding to is started. The production control CPU 120 controls the production mode to the battle RUSH mode in response to being controlled to the high-accuracy high-base state after the big hit gaming state, and then specifies the probability change fall determination result corresponding to the 101st and subsequent fluctuation display. The battle RUSH mode is continued until the command specifies “probably falling”, and the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect are executed with the fluctuation display specified as “probably falling” and the battle RUSH mode is set. Terminate. In this way, the setting suggestion effect is executed by enabling the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect to be executed in the variable display that triggers the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. It is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine in which the probability change fall determination is executed by diversifying the timing.

  As described above, when a battle effect is executed in the 100th or 100th or subsequent fluctuation display in a state in which the battle RUSH mode corresponding to the high base state is controlled, (1) an ally character is an enemy character If the player wins the game, the display result becomes “hit” and the game is controlled to the big win game state. (2) When the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw, the display result becomes “out of”, but the high base state (battle RUSH mode) (3) When the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character, the display result is “out of” and the high base state (battle RUSH mode) is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to increase the interest in the battle effect that is executed in response to the variable display after the 100th time and the 101st time after being controlled in the battle RUSH mode.

(Modification example in the case of falling down within 100 fluctuations after transition to the high-accuracy and high-base state)
In the above-described example, when it is determined that “probably falling” is detected within 100 times after the transition to the high-accuracy and high-base state (battle RUSH mode), the variation display determined as “probably falling” is displayed. Only the first setting suggestion effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed, and both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed in the 100th variation display in which the high base state ends. Not only in such a form, but both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect may be executed with the change display determined to be “probably falling”.

  Further, in the above-described example, when it is determined that “probable change falls” within 100 times after shifting to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode), the fluctuation display determined as “probably change fall” However, the battle RUSH mode is continued for the production mode. Not only in such a form, but when it is determined that there is a “probable fall” within 100 times after the transition to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode), the effect mode becomes the low-accuracy base state. You may make it change into the other production modes which can grasp | ascertain.

  In the example shown below, when it is determined that there is a “probable change fall” within 99 times after the transition to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode), The first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed, and from the next fluctuation display to the 100th fluctuation display, the chance time is controlled so that the low-accuracy base state can be grasped. FIG. 14-21 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow when it is determined that there is a “probable fall” within 99 times after being controlled to the high-accuracy and high-base state.

  In the example of FIGS. 14-21, a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the game state are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 can control to the effect mode corresponding to the current game state among the plurality of effect modes. It is. Specifically, in the normal state (low probability low base state), it is possible to control the normal mode in which the character is not displayed as the background image of the decorative design. In the high accuracy high base state, as described above, the background of the decorative design is possible. As an image, the teammate character 01TM100 can be controlled in the battle RUSH mode displayed in the center of the screen. In the low-accuracy base state, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 and 14-24, which will be described later, a background image of a decorative pattern is displayed. As a result, the cloud can be displayed at the top of the screen and the friend character 01TM100 can be controlled at the chance time to be displayed at the center of the screen.

  As shown in FIG. 14-21 (C), when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state) and the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, the variable display is started and the variation is changed. When the display result is “big hit”, the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy and high base state, and the effect mode is controlled to the battle RUSH mode. It will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes the probability change fall determination when starting the variable display in a state where the gaming state is controlled to the highly accurate base state.

  Here, in the high-accuracy and high-base state, the CPU 103 is surely falling when the fluctuation display to be executed is a fluctuation display within the 99th time after the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-accuracy and high-base state). Based on the judgment that “no probability change falls” and that the display result is judged as “out of”, it is used for non-winning use of the probability change fall in the high accuracy base shown in FIG. 14-12 (A). A variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table.

  Further, the CPU 103 determines the probability change fall when the change display to be executed in the high-accuracy base state is a change display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-accuracy base state). Based on the fact that it is determined that there is no “probable fall” and the display result is “big hit”, the big hit fluctuation for non-winning probability change fall at the time of high accuracy and high base shown in FIG. 14-12 (B). The variation pattern is determined based on the pattern size determination table.

  The CPU 103 includes a hold-down number subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command together with a probability change fall determination result designation command for designating “no change in probability change” as one set of commands, and transmits it to the effect control CPU 120. To do. Based on the fact that the CPU 120 for effect control that has received one set of commands has not received the probability change fall determination result designation command for designating “there is a probability change fall” after entering the battle RUSH mode (after the big hit gaming state), The battle RUSH mode is continued.

  On the other hand, the CPU 103 determines the probability change fall when the change display to be executed in the high-accuracy base state is the change display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state). Based on the determination of “probable fall” and the determination that the display result is “out of”, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for deviation shown in FIG. 14-12 (G). . In this example, the decorative display variation display mode becomes the reach mode, and the battle effect in which the ally character loses to the enemy character, and the display mode of the character displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, the current setting value is suggested. 1 setting suggestion effect and the 2nd setting which suggests a present setting value by the display mode of the battle RUSH end picture displayed at the timing (timing when it was notified that the friend character was defeated by the enemy character) There is provided a variation pattern of “super reach out (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect” in which the suggestion effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (G), the fluctuation pattern of “super reach out (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  Further, the CPU 103 determines the probability change fall when the fluctuation display to be executed in the high-accuracy base state is a fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-accuracy base state). Based on the fact that it is determined that there is a “probable fall” and the display result is determined to be “big hit”, the fluctuation is based on the big hit variation pattern determination table for probability variation fall winning shown in FIG. 14-12 (D). Determine the pattern.

  The CPU 103 includes a hold-down number determination command, a display result specification command, and a variation pattern specification command, together with a probability change fall determination result specification command for specifying “probable change fall” as a set of commands, and transmits it to the effect control CPU 120. To do. The CPU 120 for effect control that has received one set of commands changes the battle RUSH mode to the current time based on the fact that the probability change fall determination result designation command for designating “with certain change fall” is received in the state of controlling the battle RUSH mode. It ends with the fluctuation display of and shifts to the chance time from the next fluctuation display.

  The CPU 103 shifts the gaming state to the low probability and high base state at the timing when the variable display is started, based on the determination that the probability variation falls is “there is a probability variation fall”.

  When the fluctuation display to be executed in the low probability high base state is a fluctuation display within the 100th time after the end of the big hit gaming state (after the transition to the high base state), the display result is “out of”. Based on the determination, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of low accuracy base shown in FIG. 14-12 (E).

  Further, the CPU 103 displays the display result as “big hit” when the fluctuation display to be executed in the low probability high base state is the fluctuation display within the 100th time after the big hit gaming state ends (after the transition to the high base state). ”Is determined, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of the low probability base shown in FIG. 14-12 (F).

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the low-accuracy high base state in response to the end of the 100th variation display after the big hit gaming state ends (after controlling to the high base state). As a result, the next time (the 101st time after the end of the big hit gaming state) is displayed in the normal state (low probability low base state). Further, the effect control CPU 120 ends the chance time in response to the end of the 100th variation display after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the big hit gaming state ends). As a result, the next variable display (the 101st time after the big hit gaming state is finished) is executed in the normal mode.

  14-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, and FIGS. 14-23 and 14-24 show the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect image relevant to 2 setting suggestion effects. In the example shown below, it is assumed that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to “6”.

  First, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (1), it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 is executing the 19th variation display after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state where the second reserved memory number is 0, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol variation display (T1 shown in FIG. 14-22). (Variable display started at the timing). In the active display area 01TM003, an active display 01TM001 corresponding to the currently displayed variable display is displayed.

  Here, in response to controlling the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode, the effect control CPU 120 displays the teammate character 01TM100 at the center of the image display device 5 and displays “battle” at the upper left of the image display device 5. “RUSH” is displayed. Furthermore, in correspondence with the fact that the currently displayed variation display is the 19th variation display after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left (“ The characters “Remaining 81 times” are displayed below (Battle RUSH).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (2), when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. It is assumed that the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6B is newly generated and the second reserved memory number is 1 at the timing of T2 shown in 14-22. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the second reserved memory number has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “2” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in the state where the second reserved memory number is 1, the symbol display. The decorative symbol “4” is fixed in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol “6” is stopped in the symbol display area 5R. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols for which the display result is “out” is confirmed and stopped (timing T3 shown in FIG. 14-22).

  Next, when the CPU 103 executes the 20th fluctuation display after controlling to the high-accuracy and high-base state based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 1, it is determined that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination. It is assumed that the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern of “super-reaching out (battle defeat) + setting suggesting effect” based on the determination and the determination that the display result is “out”. Then, the CPU 103 sets one set including the fluctuation pattern designation command for designating the fluctuation pattern “super-reaching out (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect” and the probability variation fall determination result designation command for designating “probability change fall”. The command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Then, the gaming state is shifted to the low-accuracy base state at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started.

  The effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command for designating “super-reach out (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect”, and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, and the ally character becomes the enemy character. The first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value according to the character display mode displayed when the reach state is established, and the timing at which the battle effect ends (the friend character is defeated by the enemy character) It is recognized that the second setting suggestion effect that suggests the current set value is to be executed by the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the fact that it has been notified). And the aspect of the 1st setting suggestion effect and the aspect of the 2nd setting suggestion effect are determined based on the frequency | count of a variable display (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode) after controlling to a highly accurate base state.

  Here, the production control CPU 120 determines that there is a “probable change fall” within 50 times (20 times in this example) within 50 times after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). Based on the determination, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggesting effect corresponding to the 20th variation display determined to be “probably falling” is determined as “reach!”, And the setting value is “6”. It is assumed that the character “Leach! Further, the production control CPU 120 determines that there is a “probable change fall” within 30 times (20 times in this example) within 30 times after being controlled to the high-accuracy and high-base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). In the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 100th variation display in the high base state, the background is determined to be “full moon background” and the setting value is set to “6”. Suppose that it is determined that the number of stars to be displayed is six. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (4), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and In the symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbol variation display is started (timing T4 shown in FIG. 14-22).

  In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 that has received a set of commands including the probability variation fall determination result designation command for designating “with certain probability fall” executes the next and subsequent (21st and later) variation display in a low-accuracy base state. Based on the above, it is determined that the battle RUSH mode is terminated with the fluctuation display executed this time (20th time), and that the next time (after the 21st time) the fluctuation display is shifted to the chance time.

  Here, the production control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and displays it in the second reserved display area 01TM006 as the second reserved memory count becomes zero. The second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Furthermore, in correspondence with the fact that the currently running fluctuation display is the 20th fluctuation display after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left (“ The characters “remaining 80 times” are displayed under “Battle RUSH”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (5), when the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. It is assumed that the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6B newly occurs at the timing of T5 shown in 14-22 and the second reserved memory number becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the second reserved memory number has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (6), the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The reach state is set by stopping and displaying the decorative pattern. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, a first setting suggestion effect is displayed in which the characters “reach!” Are displayed in red on the top of the image display device 5 (timing T6 shown in FIG. 14-22).

  When the reach state is established in the battle RUSH mode, the player grasps that the character “Leach! In addition, there is a possibility that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 currently playing a game may be in the range of 4 to 6, and the suggested set value (4 to 6) is a value close to the actual set value. To be sure (high reliability). In this way, although the player feels regrettable by executing the effect suggesting that the probability change fall has occurred in the variation display in which the probability change fall has occurred, there is a possibility that the set value is high (4 to 6). For this reason, a decrease in gaming motivation is suppressed. In addition, since the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed in the battle RUSH mode is relatively large (80 times), the game is played with a willingness to somehow generate a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 14-16 (7), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first setting suggestion effect and starts a battle effect that is an effect corresponding to the super reach variation pattern (see FIG. 14-22). T7 timing shown). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the teammate character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are displayed on the image display device 5, and above the teammate character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (upper part of the image display device 5), “RUSH ends if defeated. , RUSH continuation for a draw, jackpot for victory! ”Is displayed. In other words, when a battle effect is performed in which the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character, the high-accuracy base state ends at this time (the 19th variation display), and the battle between the teammate character and the enemy character ends in a draw. When the production is executed, the high-accuracy base state continues from the next time (the 20th and subsequent fluctuation display), and when the battle production is executed in which the teammate character wins the enemy character, the display result is “big hit”. It is an effect that indicates to the player that "

  For the player, although the probability change fall has already been suggested at this point in time, no notification has been given, so the player has not yet been convinced of the probability change fall. Therefore, it is a situation in which it is not clear whether the high-accuracy base state ends or the high-accuracy base state continues. In such a situation, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the highly accurate and high base state continues.

  In this example, since the change display is executed based on the change pattern of “superreach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect”, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (8), the friend character 01TM100 is the enemy character. A battle effect defeated by 01TM110 is executed (timing T8 shown in FIG. 14-22). At the timing when the teammate character 01TM100 is defeated by the enemy character 01TM110, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “4” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol “5” in the symbol display area 5C. The decorative symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the area 5R. As a result, the player understands that the display result is “out of range” and the high-accuracy state ends with the 20th variation display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (8), the effect control CPU 120 ends the battle effect and executes the second setting suggestion effect (timing T9 shown in FIG. 14-22). As described above, the production control CPU 120 is based on the fact that it has been determined that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination within 30 times after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). The background is determined to be “full moon background” and the number of stars to be displayed is determined to be 6 based on the setting value being set to “6”. Based on this determination, the CPU 120 for effect control displays an image that is “full moon background” and the number of stars is “6” as the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 notifying that the battle RUSH mode has ended. . This battle RUSH end image 01TM300 includes the characters “battle RUSH end” displayed in the center of the screen.

  The player grasps that the battle RUSH mode (highly accurate and high base state) has ended by viewing the battle RUSH end image 01TM300. And since the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 is “full moon background” and the number of displayed stars is 6, it was executed in the high base state (battle RUSH mode) including the fluctuation display. Of the fluctuation display so far, it is grasped that it has fallen with certainty in the fluctuation display executed at a relatively early stage (1 to 30 rotations). In addition, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is currently playing a game is 6, and the suggested setting value (6) is an actual setting value (reliability is 100%). To grasp.

  In this way, in the fluctuation display where the high-accuracy high-base state (battle RUSH mode) ends, it is suggested that the player is disappointed by the fact that the player has already fallen into the low-accuracy state due to the noticeable fall. Since the set value is high (6), a decrease in game motivation is suppressed. Although the player has finished the highly accurate and high base state (Battle RUSH mode), the player can expect the next big hit with a high probability, and will continue to play with a willingness to generate the big hit.

  Next, based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 1, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is “out” when executing the 21st variation display after controlling to the high base state. Thus, it is assumed that the variation pattern is determined as a variation pattern of “non-reach”. Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern “non-reach” to the effect control CPU 120. This 21st variation display is executed in a low-accuracy base state.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (10), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and In the symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbol variation display is started (timing T11 shown in FIG. 14-22).

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the chance time image 01TM400 related to the “full moon background” battle RUSH end image 01TM300 displayed in the second setting suggestion effect in response to controlling the effect mode to the chance time. While displaying as a background image, the friendly character 01TM100 is displayed at the center of the image display device 5, and “chance time” characters are displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5. Furthermore, in correspondence with the fact that the currently displayed fluctuation display is the 21st fluctuation display after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left (“ The characters “79 times remaining” are displayed below (Battle RUSH).

  After that, it is assumed that the display result is “out of” continuously until the 99th variation display is executed after the control to the high base state. The gaming state during this period is a low probability and high base state.

  Next, based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 4, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is “out” when executing the 100th variation display after controlling to the high base state. Thus, it is assumed that the variation pattern is determined as a variation pattern of “non-reach”. Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern “non-reach” to the effect control CPU 120. This 100th variation display is executed in a low-accuracy base state.

  The effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-24 (11), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display of the image display device 5. In the area 5R, the decorative pattern variation display is started (variation display started at the timing T12 shown in FIG. 14-22).

  Next, the CPU 103 ends the low-accuracy high-base state and ends the low-probability low-base state based on the end of the 100th fluctuation display after the big hit gaming state ends (after controlling to the high-base state). (Normal state) is controlled (timing T13 shown in FIG. 14-22). Further, as shown in FIG. 14-24 (12), the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters “chance time end” at the center of the image display device 5 and also in the symbol display area 5 L of the image display device 5. The decorative symbol “2”, the decorative symbol “5” in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol “3” in the symbol display area 5R are stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols for which the display result is “off” is confirmed and stopped.

  As described above, the CPU 103 controls the high-accuracy and high-base state after the big hit gaming state, and then determines that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination. The gaming state is shifted to the low-accuracy base state at the timing when the display is started. Then, the production control CPU 120 controls the production mode to the battle RUSH mode in response to being controlled to the high-accuracy and high-base state after the big hit gaming state is finished, and then “probably falls” with the probability variation fall determination result designation command. Is specified, the battle RUSH mode is terminated with the current variation display, and the chance time is controlled from the next variation display to the end of the 100th variation display. In this way, the player can easily grasp that the probability has fallen by being controlled in different performance modes in the high-accuracy base state and the low-accuracy base state.

  In this way, when the probability falls within 99 times after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state, the player moves to the chance time from the next fluctuation display, so the player is in the high accuracy and high base state (Battle RUSH mode). It is possible to recognize how many times the fluctuation display has been performed since the time of control. Although the number of times of fluctuation display when the probability falls is smaller (as the probability fall falls faster in the battle RUSH mode), the period of the high probability state is short and the period of the low probability state is long, so the player may lose the willingness to play The first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed as the effects accompanying the change display that has fallen with certainty. As for the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, the earlier the timing when it is determined that there is a “probable change fall” in the probability change fall determination (the number of fluctuation display times after being controlled to the high accuracy high base state (battle RUSH mode)) Since the reliability of the setting suggestion is higher, the continuation of the game can be promoted.

  In the embodiment described above, the change suggestion effect acting on the corresponding display (active display, hold display) as described above in the period controlled to the high base state (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state). After executing (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, third change suggestion effect), it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display. Here, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the execution ratio of the change effect may be varied depending on whether or not the probability change has fallen (whether or not the low-accuracy and high-base state is present). Further, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the execution ratio of the change effect may be varied according to the set value that has been set.

  For example, in the case of the highly accurate base state, the execution ratio of the change effect when the change suggesting effect is executed is 90%, whereas in the case of the low accuracy high base state, the change suggesting effect is executed. The execution ratio of the change effect is 50% (when the set value is 1 to 3) or 10% (when the set value is 4 to 6). That is, in the high-accuracy base state, the display mode of the corresponding display is likely to change when the change suggestion effect is executed. In the low-accuracy base state, the display mode of the corresponding display is displayed when the change suggestion effect is executed. Is hard to change. In the low-accuracy base state, when the change suggestion effect is executed, if the setting value is low (when the setting value is 1 to 3), the display mode of the corresponding display is relatively easy to change. When the value is high (when the set value is 4 to 6), the display mode of the corresponding display is relatively difficult to change. According to such a configuration, during the period in which the ratio of the big hit is controlled to the low-accuracy base state, even if the change suggestion effect is executed, it is difficult to execute the change effect. While reducing the expectation without doing it, it is possible to suggest that it is a high setting because it is difficult to execute the change effect even if the change suggestion effect is executed, so that the willingness to continue the game is improved Can do.

  In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the set value that has been set. For example, when the set value is high (in the case of 4 to 6), the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case where the set value is low (in the case of 1 to 3). May be. On the other hand, when the set value is low (in the case of 1 to 3), the setting is suggested at a higher rate than when the set value is high (in the case of 4 to 6). An effect may be executed.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hit ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing control according to a set value among a plurality of set values having different advantages for a player,
A gaming state control means capable of controlling to a special state having a high ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state in which a game medium easily enters a variable device;
A state transition lottery execution means capable of executing a state transition lottery for shifting the gaming state in the special state;
A setting suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value based on the result of the state transition lottery.

Images